RC Material

Guide Book
REFRESHER COURSE
for
Certified Energy Managers and Auditors
2018
Bureau of Energy Efficiency

Ministry of Power,
Govt. of India
4th Floor, Sewa Bhawan
R. K. Puram, New Delhi - 110066 (INDIA)
Prepared by
National Productivity Council, India
Copyright © Bureau of Energy Efficiency 2018
All rights reserved. All information contained in this publication is copyrighted, and as such no part of
this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any other means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without
permission in writing from the publishers.
CORE TEAM
PRINCIPAL EDITOR (NPC) Mr. R. Suryanarayanan
Director,
National Productivity Council (NPC)
Mr. Abhay Bakre

Director General
Mr. Pankaj Kumar

Secretary
Mr. Saurabh Diddi

Director
Dr. Ashok Kumar

REVIEW GROUP (BEE) Director
Mr. S. K. Khandare
Director
Mr. Sameer Pandita

Director
Ms. Rajini Thompson

Coordinator (Exam)
Mr. K.V.R. Raju

ADVISORY INPUTS (NPC) Regional Director,
National Productivity Council (NPC)
EXTERNAL CONTRIBUTORS & REVIEWERS
Mr. Padu S Padmanabhan Mr. R.K. Khilnani, A. M Narayanan J. Nagesh Kumar

Strategic Energy, Water, Managing Director, Head - Energy Director , CEEP
Environment Expert Energy Tech Consultants Efficiency And former Director (NPC,
Pvt. Ltd Energy Management Chennai)
Centre-Kerala
Mr. T. Sankaranarayanan Mr. P. Dharmalingam Mr. H. Ragavendra Dr. P. Kanagavel

Energy Consultant (Former ENSAVE Consultancy Prabhu Additional Director & Head,
Regional Director (NPC, and Training Pvt. Ltd. Director & Head, National Institute of Wind
Mumbai) Former Regional Director NPC, Bengaluru Energy (NIWE), MNRE
(NPC, Chennai)
Mr. S. Srinivas, Deputy Mr. R. Kumar, Mr. V.S. Deshpande Dr. Anant Shukla
Exec. Director (IGBC) CII- Director - Energy & Head – Sales & ASEAN-German Energy
Sohrabji Godrej Green Sustainability, Marketing (Div-T2) Programme (AGEP)
Business Centre Jones Lang LaSalle Transparent Cogen Senior Advisor
Deutsche Gesellschaft für,
Systems Pvt. Ltd., Internationale
Pune Zusammenarbeit (GIZ)
GmbH, Indonesia
Dr. Satyanarayan Seshadri Deepak Gokhale
CTO, Aspiration Energy General Manager
Corporate Technical and
Energy Services
Aditya Birla Management
Corporation Pvt. Ltd.
NPC CONTRIBUTORS
Mr.. Suryanarayanan Mr. Sreenivasulu Deverapalli Mr. Joel Franklin Ms. P. Chitra
Director (Energy) Sr. Dy. Director (Env.) Asaria, Dy. Director
NPC, Chennai NPC, Chennai Deputy Director, NPC, Chennai
NPC, Chennai
Mr. Velayutham V Mr. J. P. Varun, Asst. Mr. Idhayachander Ms. V G. Sandhya

Dy. Director, NPC, Chennai Director, NPC, Chennai Ravichandran Assistant Director
Dy. Director, NPC, NPC, Chennai
Chennai
PREFACE
Most of the energy managers/auditors, who qualified way back, may not have
kept pace with the advancements in the field of energy. Furthermore, Gazette
states that certificate issued on successful completion of Energy
Manager/Energy Auditor exam is valid for only five years with the effect from
the date of the award and is renewable only on attending a refresher course.
Accordingly, refresher course was proposed and the topics for coverage were
finalized after several rounds of meeting by the expert groups and in line with
the requirements of the Bureau of Energy Efficiency. The course material is
prepared by National Productivity Council after taking into account the latest
developments and advancements such as renewable energy, smart grid,
smart cities, ISO 50001 (2018 version), measurement & verification, carbon
footprint, energy efficient buildings and so on.
The training based on refresher course material is expected to boost self-

confidence and skill-set of the energy managers/energy auditors. It is
designed to improve their energy management and auditing skills and boost
their confidence and motivate them to take up challenging assignments.
ACRONYMS
AAC Autoclaved Aerated Concrete

AMI Advanced Metering Infrastructure
AT&C Aggregate Technical & Commercial
BAT Best Available Technology
BEE Bureau of Energy Efficiency
BEMS Building Energy Management System
BIPV Building integrated photovoltaic
BM Building Management
BoS Balance of System
BP British Petroleum
BPO Business Process Outsourcing
CAES Compressed air energy storage
CAPEX Capital Expenditure
CBM Coal Bed Methane
CCF Closed Cavity Facades
CCHP Combined Cooling, Heating, and Power
CdTe Cadmium telluride
CEEDR Centralized Energy Efficiency Data Repository
CERC Central Electricity Regulatory Commission
CFL Compact Fluorescent Light
CIGS Copper Indium Gallium selenide/sulphide
COP Conference of the Parties (UNFCCC)
COP Coefficient of Performance
CPP Captive Power Plant
CPS Cyber-physical systems
CPV Concentrator Photovoltaic or Concentrating Photovoltaic
CRI Colour Rendering Index
CSR Corporate Sustainability Reporting
DC Designated Consumer
DCV Demand-Controlled Ventilation
DGUs Double-glazed units
DHI Diffuse Horizontal Irradiation
DISCOM Distribution Service Company
DNI Direct Normal Irradiation
DX Distributed System
EC Electronically commutated (fans)
ECBC Energy Conservation Building Code
ECM Energy Conservation Measure
EE Energy Efficiency
EEM Energy Efficiency Measure
EER Energy Efficiency Ratio
EIMAS Energy Information Management Analytic System
EmAEA Empaneled Accredited Energy Auditor
EnBIs Energy Baselines
EnPIs Energy Performance Indexes
EP Environmental Protection
EPC Engineering, Procurement and Construction
EPI Energy Performance Index
EPS Expanded polystyrene
ESCerts Energy Saving Certificates
ESCO Energy Service Company
ETC Evacuated Tube Collectors
FIT Feed-in Tariff
FPC Flat Plate Collectors
GAP Gap analysis
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GHG Greenhouse gases
GHI Global Horizontal Irradiation
GRIHA Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment
GTKM Gross Tonne Kilometers (It is total weigh of locomotives and vehicles)
HAN Home Area Network
HRV Heat recovery ventilation
IEA International Energy Agency
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEX Indian Energy Exchange
IGBC Indian Green Building Council
INDC Intended Nationally Determined Contribution
IoT Internet of things
KPIs Key Performance Indexes
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
LiBr Lithium Bromide
LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
LPD Lighting Power Density
LPD Litres per day
LPF Litres per Flush
LSG Light to Solar Gain Ratio
M&V Measurement & Verification
MBN Parameter for monitoring the Energy Performance of Refinery
MEG Micro energy grid (MEG)
MEMS Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Systems
MEPS Minimum Energy Performance Standards
MJ Mega Joule
MNRE Ministry of New and Renewable Energy
MTOE Million tonnes oil equivalent
MW Megawatt
NABERS National Australian Built Environment Rating System
NBC National Building Code
NMEE National Mission on Enhanced Energy Efficiency
NZEB Net Zero Energy Building
ORC Organic Rankine Cycle
Pa Pascal
PAT Perform Achieve Trade
PDCA Plan Do Check Act
PDEC Passive downdraft evaporative cooling
PE cells Photoelectric cells
PLF Plant Load Factor
PMU Phasor Measurement Units
POSCO Power System Operation Corporation Limited
PPA Power Purchase Agreement
PPP Purchase Power Parity
PRDS Pressure Reducing and DeSuperheating System ...
PRV Pressure Reducing Valve
PTC Parabolic Trough Collector
PTPP Parabolic Trough Power Plant
PV Photovoltaic
PXIL Power Exchange of India
R/P Reserve to Production ratio
R-APDRP Restructured Accelerated Power Development and Reforms Programme
REC Renewable Energy Certificate
RESCO Renewable Energy Service Company
R-LNG Re-gasified Liquid Natural Gas
RPO Renewable Purchase Obligation
S&L Standard & Labeling
SDA State Designated Agency
SEC Specific Energy Consumption
SECI \Solar Energy Corporation of India Limited
SERC State Electricity Regulatory Commission (SERC) regulations
SEUs Significant Energy Uses
SHGC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient
T&D Transmission & Distribution
TFC Total Final Consumption
TOE Tonnes oil equivalent
Toe Tonne oil equivalent
U value Denotes conduction heat loss
UNFCC United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change
USEPA US Environmental Protection Agency
USGBC US Green Building Council
VAM Vapour Absorption Machine
VAV Variable Air Volume
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
VLT Visual Light Transmission
WBP Whole Building Performance
WWR Window-to-wall ratio
XPS Extruded polystyrene
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page no.
PREFACE VII
ACRONYMS IX
1. ENERGY SCENARIO UPDATES 1

1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 Coal 3
1.3 Oil 4
1.4 Natural Gas 6
1.5 Hydro Power 7
1.6 Nuclear Power 8
1.7 Bioenergy 8
1.8 Electricity 9
1.9 Carbon-dioxide emissions 14
1.10 Policy Interventions 15
1.11 Renewable Energy Thrust 16
1.12 Distributed Generation 19
1.13 Smart Cities 21
1.14 Smart Transportation 22
1.15 Smart Grid 24
1.16 Internet of Things (IoT) 26
1.17 Industry 4.0 28
2. PERFORM ACHIEVE TRADE (PAT) UPDATES 29

2.1 PAT Genesis 29
2.2 Overview of PAT 30
2.3 PAT Concept 31
2.4 Baseline Assessment 31
2.5 Monitoring and Verification 32
2.6 Certification of Energy Savings 36
2.7 Trading of ESCerts 37
2.8 Check Verification 39
2.9 Enforcement of Compliance to PAT 42
2.10 PAT Development 42
3. KEY THRUST AREAS OF ENERGY CONSERVATION ACT, 2001 49

3.1 Introduction 49
3.2 Standard & Labelling 49
3.2.1 Standard 50
3.2.2 Label 50
3.2.3 Energy Saving Calculation for Submersible Pump Set 53
3.2.4 Star-label Upgradation 54
3.3 Star Rating of Building 54
3.4 Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) for Non-Residential (Commercial) 58
Buildings
3.4.1 Impact of ECBC Compliance 58
3.4.2 Scope of ECBC (Commercial Buildings) 58
3.4.3 Applicable Building Systems 59
3.4.4 Building Classification 59
3.4.5 Levels of Energy Efficiency Performance 60
3.4.6 Energy Performance 60
3.4.7 ECBC Compliance Approaches & Methods 61
3.4,8 Case Study of an ECBC-compliant Building 63
3.5 Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) for Residential Buildings 64
4. ENERGY EFFICIENCY DATA ANALYTICS 66

4.1 Purpose and Background 66
4.2 Energy Productivity/Efficiency Indicators: Definition and Goal 66
4.3 Energy Efficiency Performance Indicators for Industries 67
4.4 Benchmarking of Sectoral Energy Efficiency 68
4.5 Plant Energy Efficiency Data Analytics 70
4.6 Importance of “Data” in conducting Gap Analysis 75
4.7 Energy Information Management and Analytical Systems (EIMAS) 76
4.8 Centralized Energy Efficiency Data Repository 76
4.9 Policies to Support Industrial Energy Efficiency 77
5. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EnMS): ISO 50001: 2018 80

5.1 Introduction 80
5.2 Why ISO 50001 to Manage Energy Effectively? 80
5.2.1 Energy Performance Approach 81
5.2.2 Relationship between Energy Performance and the EnMS 81
5.2.3 Plan-Do-Check-Act (PDCA) cycle 82
5.3 Benefits of Implementing ISO 50001 83
5.4 Why a New ISO 50001 Version? 83
Requirements of ISO 50001:2018 Clauses 84
(S.No. (1 to 10 below) correspond with clause numbers of the Standard)
1 Scope 84
2 Normative references 84
3 Terms and definitions 84
4 Context of organization 85
4.1 Understanding the organization and its context 85
4.2 Understanding the needs and expectations of interested parties 85
4.3 Determining the scope of energy management system 86
4.4 Energy management system 87
5 Leadership 87
5.1 Leadership and commitment 87
5.2 Energy Policy 87
5.3 Organizational roles, responsibilities and authorities 88
6 Planning 89
6.1 Actions to address risks and responsibilities 89
6.2 Objectives, energy targets and planning to achieve them 90
6.3 Energy review 91
6.4 Energy Performance Indicators 92
6.5 Energy baseline 93
6.6 Planning for collection of energy data 94
7 Support 95
7.1 Resources 95
7.2 Competence 95
7.3 Awareness 95
7.4 Communication 96
7.5 Documented information 96
7.5.1 General 96
7.5.2. Creating and Updating 97
7.5.3. Control of documented information 97
8. Operation 98
8.1 Operational planning & control 98
8.2 Design 98
8.3 Procurement 99
9. Performance evaluation 97
9.1 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation of energy performance and 100
the EnMS
9.1.1 General 100
9.1.2 Evaluation of Compliance with legal requirements and other requirements 100
9.2 Internal audit 100
9.3 Management review 101
10. Improvement 102
10.1 Nonconformity and corrective action 102
10.2 Continual improvement 102
6. MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION OF ENERGY PERFORMANCE 104

OF ORGANIZATIONS
6.1 Introduction 104
6.2 Standards, Protocols and Guidelines 104
6.3 Purpose of M&V 105
6.4 M&V Applications 106
6.4.1 Energy Performance Contracts 106
6.4.2 Use of M&V in PAT Scheme 107
6.4.3 M&V for Effective ISO 50001 implementation 107
6.5 Fundamental Principles of M&V 108
6.6 The M&V Process 109
6.7 Factors driving Energy Savings 110
6.8 Measuring Energy Savings and Examples 111
6.9 The Four Basic Options or Methods for Conducting M&V 113
6.9.1 Measurement Boundary 114
6.9.2 114
6.9.3 Option B – Retrofit Isolation: All Parameter Measurement 115
6.9.4 Option C – Whole Facility 116
6.9.5 Option D – Calibrated Simulation 117
6.9.6 Selecting the Option 117
6.10 Uncertainty and M&V Cost 118
6.11 What is not M&V? 119
6.11.1 Difference between “Measurement & Verification” and “Monitoring and 119
Verification”
6.11.2 Difference between M&V and Monitoring &Targeting 119
6.12 Conclusion 120
6i M&V Plan 121
6ii CONTENTS OF A FULL M&V REPORT 123
6iii M&V CASE STUDY: EEM: STEAM TRAP REPLACEMENT 124
7. BEST PRACTICES, TECHNOLOGIES AND CASE STUDIES  125

ELECTRICAL AND THERMAL SYSTEM
7.2 Best Practices and Technologies in Electrical System 125
7.2.1 Case for Energy Efficient Motors 125
7.2.2 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Applications 128
7.2.3 High COP Chillers 134
7.2.4 Internet of Things (IOT) Application for Chiller System 137
7.3 Best Practices and Technologies in Thermal System 139
7.3.1 Pressure Reducing Turbine 139
7.3.2 Heat Pump 140
7.3.3 Heat Pipe 143
7.3.4 Condensing boiler 144
7.3.5 Absorption chillers 146
7.3.6 Trigeneration 147
7.3.7 Organic Rankine Cycle (ORC) 149
8. BEST PRACTICES IN BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND 150

CONSERVATION
8.2 Green Building 151
8.3 Net Zero Energy Building (NZEB) 154
8.4 Building as an Energy System 154
8.5 Energy Saving Approaches for Building 155
8.5.1 Passive Designs 155
8.5.2 HVAC 163
8.5.3 Lighting 168
8.5.4 Renewable Energy 170
8.5.5 Other areas 170
8.5.6 Emerging Trends 172
9. RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS 174

9.2 Types of Renewable Energy System 174
9.3 Installable Potential and Installed Capacities 175
9.4 Solar Energy 175
9.4.1. Solar Radiation Resource 176
9.4.2 Solar Thermal Applications 177
9.4.3 Flat Plate Collectors (FPC) based Solar Water Heaters 177
9.4.4 Evacuated Tube Collectors (ETC) based Solar Water Heaters 178
9.4.5 Concentrated Solar Power (CSP) 178
9.4.6 Parabolic Solar Dish Collector 179
9.4.7 Parabolic Trough Collectors (PTC) 179
9.4.8 Linear Fresnel Collectors 180
9.4.9 Power Towers 180
9.4.10 Industrial Applications of Solar Thermal Energy 181
9.411 Solar PV Technology 182
9.4.12 PV system types 184
9.4.13 Grid-connected (Rooftop Solar) PV Plant 184
9.4.14 Approach and Methodology to Develop a Rooftop PV Plant 186
9.4.15 Off Grid Solar PV 188
9.4.16 Business Models for Installation of Large Capacity Rooftop 189
9.4.17 Solar Power Parks 190
9.4.18 New Solar Technologies 191
9.5 Wind Energy 192
9.5.1 Types of Wind Turbines 192
9.5.2 Development of Wind Project 193
9.5.3 Offshore Wind Energy 194
9.5.4 Repowering 194
9.5.6 Small-scale Wind turbine 194
9.5.7 Small WindSolar Hybrid System 195
9.6 Bio-energy 196
9.6.1 Direct Combustion of Biomass 196
9.6.2 Co-firing of Biomass 197
9.6.3 Biomass Gasification 197
9.6.4 Anaerobic Digestion 198
9.6.5 Liquid Biofuels 199
9.7 Small-scale Hydropower 200
9.8 Electrical Energy Storage (EES) 201
9.9 RE/EE Integration for mitigation of Climatic Change 204
10. GHG AND CARBON FOOTPRINT ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING 208
10.1 Introduction to Greenhouse gases and Carbon Foot Print 206
10.2 Global Greenhouse Gas Emission Scenarios 208
10.3 Indian GHG Scenario 209
10.4 GHG Accounting and Reporting 210
10.5 Relevant Protocols and Standards 210
10.6 Estimating GHG or Carbon Emissions 211
10.7 Calculations and Methods for Determining GHG Emissions 212
10.7.1 Measuring GHG emissions from identified sources converting them to CO2 212
equivalent using GWP
10.7.2 Measuring energy use and converting it to CO2 equivalent using notified 212
emission factors
10.7.3 Estimating emissions from production using product emission factors 213
10.7.4 Estimating emissions based on fuel consumed and its composition 214
(ultimate analysis)
10.7.5 Approaches for estimating GHG emissions from transport 214
10.7.6 Estimating GHG emissions from chemical reaction using material balance 215
approach
10.8 Carbon Footprints 215
10.9 Types of Carbon Footprints 216
10.9.1 Organizational Footprint 216
10.9.2 How to calculate an Organizational Footprint? 219
10.9.3 Communicating organizational carbon footprint 221
10.10 Reporting GHG Emissions 221
A. ENERGY AUDIT INSTRUMENTS 223

A1. Introduction 223
A2. Typical Instruments Used For Energy Audit 223
B. SOFTWARE AND SIMULATION FOR ENERGY AUDITING 229

B1 Introduction 229
B2 Applications of Various Softwares 229
B3 Softwares for Process Plants, Power Plants, Solar Systems Refinery, 233
Optimizing Heat Exchanger network, Steam plants, and other thermal systems
REFERENCES 242
LIST OF TABLES
Page no.
1.1 Breakup of Installed Capacity by Energy Source 10
1.2 Electricity Generation by Fuel Source 10
1.3 Renewable energy installed capacity in India (MNRE) 12
1.4 Per Capita Electricity Consumption (CEA) 13
2.1 Timelines and Activities for a PAT Cycle 35

2.2 PAT Cycle-I (2012-13 to 2014-15) 43
2.3 Details of DCs in PAT-II (2016-2019) 44
2.4 SEC Norms for Electric /Diesel Traction of Zonal Railways 45
2.5 Targets for PAT-III (2017-2019) 47
2.6 No. of DCs Covered in PAT Cycles II, III, and IV 47
3.1 Verified Building Information and Energy Data for the BPO 56
3.2 Bandwidths for BPO Buildings for 4 Climatic Zones 57
4.1 Energy Efficiency Performance Indicators1 for Indian Industry 67
4.2 Specific Energy Consumption in Industry – India and the World 69
4.3 Energy Efficiency Policy & Program Pathway in Indian Industry Sector 78
5.1 Consistency Relationship between Policy, Objective, Target and Action Plan 91
5.2 Sample Training Plan 96
6.1 Four Basic Options or Methods for Evaluating Avoided Energy Use 114
7.1 IE Classes 126

7.2 Typical Compressor Sizes and Efficiencies 136
7.3 Typical Chiller Types and Efficiencies 147
8.1 List of Green Building Features 152

8.2 Energy Saving Potential in HVAC System Design 163
9.1 Installable Potential and Installed Capacities 175

9.2 Typical SHWS Capacity and Collector Area 177
10.1 GHG and its GWP 211

10.2 Estimation of Total GHG Emissions based on emission releases 212
10.3 GHG Emissions Factors 213
10.4 Estimation of Total GHG Emissions based on Fuel/ Power Consumption 213
10.5 Estimation of Total GHG Emissions based from emission factors 214
10.6 Ultimate Analysis of Sub-Bituminous coal 214
10.7 Activities Covered Under Each Scope 218
A1 Introduction 223
A2 Typical Instruments Used For Energy Audit 223
LIST OF FIGURES
Page no.
1.1 Break-up Primary Energy Consumption by Fuel/Source 1
1.2 Breakup of World Primary Energy Consumption by Fuel/Source 1
1.3 World Primary Energy Consumption Trend 2
1.4 Primary Energy Consumption Trend of India 2
1.5 Coal Reserves by Country (Total Reserves 1035 Billion Tonnes in 2017) 3
1.6 India’s Coal Energy Scenario 3
1.7 Coal Demand by Sector: 2015-16 (Quantity in Million Tonnes) 4
1.8 India’s Oil Energy Scenario 5
1.9 Sector-wise Breakup of Petroleum products Consumption 2016-17 5
1.10 India’s Gas Energy Scenario 6
1.11 Gas Demand by Sector FY 2015-16 7
1.12 Electricity Installed Capacity by Energy Source 9
1.13 Electricity Generation by Fuel Source 10
1.14 Electricity Consumption by Sectors in India during 2016-17 11
1.15 Final Commercial Energy Consumption (MTOE) 11
By Various Sectors 2015-16
1.16 Renewable Energy Installed Capacity in India (%) (MNRE) 12
1.17 Energy Intensity Trend 14
1.18 CO2 Emissions Trend 14
1.19 Break-up of Targeted Generation of 175 GW (MNRE) 16
1.20 Road Map for Solar Power by 2022 (MNRE) 16
1.21 Distributed Generation 20
1.22 Conventional Grid 24
1.23 Schematic Representation of Smart Grid 26
2.1 Components of NMEEE 29

2.2 Concept of Target, Compliance, ESCerts and Penalty 30
2.3 PAT Concept 31
2.4 SEC Assessment Using Gate-to-Gate Approach 32
2.5 Reductions in SEC 32
2.6 Process Flow for ESCerts Trading 38
2.7 Process of Check Verification 48
2.8 GtG for Building
3.1 Endorsement Label (Laptops) 50

3.2 Examples of Comparative Labels 51
3.3 Label Information for a Refrigerator 52
3.4 Example of Star level Upgradation under Star Labelling program of Variable 54
Speed Room Air Conditioners
3.5 ECBC-Compliance Approach 61
4.1 Energy Productivity Indicators 67

4.2 Pyramid of Energy Indicators in Industry 68
4.3 Data Sources for GAP analysis 71
4.4 GAP Analysis Steps 71
4.5 SECs Compared with SEC(BAT) 72
4.6 Prioritization through GAP analysis 72
4.7 Steps for Target Setting 73
4.8 Realistic Target Setting 73
4.9 Normalization Factors for Adjusting SEC Targets 74
4.10 Variation of SEC for Alumina Refinery Units 75
4.11 Importance of Normalizing data before Gap Analysis1 75
4.12 EIMAS and CEEDR Linkinge 77
4.13 Industrial Energy Productivity Policy Planning and Implementation Process 79
5.1 Relationship between EnMS and Energy Performance 81

5.2 PDCA cycle 82
5.3 Addressing Legal and Other Requirements 86
5.4 Model Energy Policy 88
5.5 Strategic Planning to address risk and responsibilities 89
5.6 Energy Review 89
5.7 Energy Performance Indicator 93
5.8 EnMS journey Review 103
6.1 Steps involved in M&V Process 110

6.2 Energy Savings Depend upon Performance and Usage 110
6.3 Energy Use of Industrial Boiler before and after ECM 111
6.4 Illustrations of M&V Options 113
6.5 Balancing Uncertainty and M&V Costs 119
7.1 Efficiency classes IE1 to IE4 128

7.2 Variable Torque Load 128
7.3 Constant torque Load 129
7.4 Constant Power Control 129
7.5 Damper versus VFD 129
7.6 Load/Unload Control 133
7.7 VFD Control 130
7.8 (a) Multiple datasets from Sensor Networks 137
(b) Optimization Approach from sensor networks Real Time Machine Learning 137
Model
7.9 Compressor Power consumption IOT vs Non-IOT 138
7.10 IOT for Chillier System Efficiency 138
7.11 Pressure Reducing Turbine Application 139
7.12 Schematic Diagram of Heat Pump 140
7.13 Heat Pump Circuit 142
7.14 Schematic Diagram of Heat Pipe 143
7.15 Schematic diagram of the Condensing Boiler 145
7.16 Overall Thermal Efficiency Vs Temperature of Flue Gas 146
7.17 Trigeneration 147
7.18 Trigeneration Application 148
7.19 ORC Process Schematic 149
8.1 Energy Consumption in an Information Technology Park Building 150

8.2 NZEB Concept 154
8.3 Sustainable Cooling Strategy 155
8.4 Cool Roofs 156
8.5 Green Roofs 156
8.6 Types of Shading 157
8.7 Fenestration 157
8.8 Properties relevant to Daylight Harvesting 158
8.9 DGU with Low-E-Coating 159
8.10 Heat Loss Comparison 159
8.11 Effective Schemes for Natural Ventilation 160
8.12 Stack Effect Ventilation 161
8.13 Passive Downdraft Evaporative Cooling 161
8.14 Dome Shaped Skylights 162
8.15 Internal Light Shelf 162
8.16 Chilled Water System 164
8.17 Ice-Bank System 164
8.18 Schematic diagram of a Trigeneration system 165
8.19 Schematic Diagram of a Radiant Cooling System 166
8.20 Demand Controlled Ventilation 167
8.21 Schematic diagram of a Solar Air Conditioning System 168
9.1 Various Forms of Renewable Energy Resources 174

9.2 Global Irradiation 176
9.3 Flat Plate Collector 177
9.4 Evacuated Tube Collector 178
9.5 Solar Dish Collector 179
9.6 Parabolic Trough Collector 179
9.7 Schematic of a PTPP with a Thermal Storage System 180
9.8 Power Tower 181
9.9 Solar Thermal Heat for Pre-heating of Feed to Steam Boiler 182
9.10 PV Modules 183
9.11 Inverter 183
9.12 Grid-Connected (Utility-Interactive) PV System 185
9.13 Net-metering 186
9.14 Typical Stand-alone PV System Powering DC and AC Loads 188
9.15 CAPEX Model 189
9.16 RESCO Model 190
9.17 Horizontal Axis Wind Turbine 193
9.18 Vertical Axis Wind Turbine 193
9.19 Offshore Wind Turbine 194
9.20 Hybrid Wind-Solar Power System 196
9.21 Downdraft Gasifier 197
9.22 Anaerobic Digestion 198
9.23 Run-of River Hydro 200
9.24 Electrical Energy Storage (EES) 202
10.1 Global CO2 Concentration Increase Since 1980 206

10.2 Global Average Annual Temperature Trend 207
10.3 Potential Future GHG Emission Pathways 209
10.4 The Different Boundaries of Organisational and Product Footprints 217
10.5 The Different Scopes of Carbon Emissions 219
B1 Pump Efficiency Calculations 230

B2 Model of Pumping System 231
B3 Results of Pump versus System Curve 231
B4 Data Input 238
B5 Data Inputs (Multiple Compressors) 239
B6 Output Screen (Single Compressor Simulation) 240
1
1.0 ENERGY SCENARIO UPDATES
1.1 Introduction
Fossil fuels such as oil, natural gas, and coal have been the world’s primary energy source
for several decades. Currently, conventional fossil fuels supply about 85% of the global
primary energy consumption for industrial, transportation, commercial and residential uses.
Total primary energy consumption comprising commerciallytraded fuels including
renewable energy was 13511.2 million tonnes oil equivalent (MTOE) in 2017. The world
primary energy consumption by fuel type/source is shown in Figure 1.1.
World Primary Energy Consumption - 2017
6.8% 3.6% Oil

4.4%
34.2% Gas
Coal
Nuclear
27.6% Hydro
Other renewables
23.4%
World Total Primary Energy consumption - 13511.2 MTOE
Figure 1.1: Breakup of World Primary Energy Consumption by Fuel/Source

Source: BP Statistical Review of World Energy 2018
India’s primary energy consumption was 753.7 million tonnes oil equivalent in 2017, which is
about 5.6% of the world’s consumption and third highest after China and the United States.
Its energy consumption is projected to grow by 4.2% annually, faster than all major
economies in the world. Indian economy faces significant challenges in meeting energy
needs in the coming decades. The increasing energy needs coupled with slower than
expected increase in domestic energy production has meant that bulk of energy will have to
be met by imports. The consumption by energy source/type is shown in the Figure 1.2.
India - Primary Energy Consumption - 2017

1.1% 4.1% 2.9%
29.5% Oil
Gas
Coal
Nuclear
56.3%
6.2% Hydro
Other renewables
India - Total Primary Energy consumption - 753.7 MTOE
Figure 1.2: Breakup of India’s Primary Energy Consumption by Fuel/Source

2
The world is facing the reality that fossil fuels will be exhausted soon as the global
consumption rate is outpacing the discovery and exploitation of new reserves, and that the
global environment is worsening due to increasing greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions
caused by fossil fuels. The world primary energy consumption trend is shown in Figure 1.3.
World Primary Energy Consumption Trend

16000.0
14000.0
12000.0
10000.0
MTOE
8000.0
6000.0
4000.0
2000.0
-
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
Oil Gas Coal Nuclear Hydro Other renewables
Figure 1.3: World Primary Energy Consumption Trend

The India’s growth of primary energy consumption is shown in Figure 1.4.
Primary Energy Consumption Trend of India

1200.0
1000.0
800.0
MTOE
600.0
400.0
200.0
-
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
Oil Gas Coal Nuclear Hydro Other renewables
Figure 1.4: Primary Energy Consumption Trend of India

3
1.2 Coal
Coal is the predominant of

the three major fossil fuels REST OF Coal Reserves by Country
and most widely distributed WORLD,
US, 24.2%
23.4%
with reserves in over 100
countries. The coal
INDIA, 9.4%
reserves by country are
shown in Figure 1.5. World RUSSIA,
15.5%
proved coal reserves are
currently sufficient to meet CHINA,
136 years of global 13.4% AUSTRALIA,
14.0%
production, which means
Figure 1.5: Coal Reserves by Country (Total Reserves 1035
that Reserve/Production Billion Tonnes in 2017) (Source: BP Statistical Review of World Energy)
(R/P) ratio is much higher
than that of oil and gas.
India has 9.4% of the world

reserves (fifth largest coal
reserves in the world after the
US, Russia, China, and
Australia.) with an estimated
R/P ratio of 136 years. India is
second largest in terms of
coal consumption after China.
India’s coal scenario is
presented in Figure 1.6. The
share of coal (including
lignite) in the primary energy
mix of the country is the
highest at 56 %. Coal used in Figure 1.6: India’s Coal Energy Scenario
India comprises 10% coking (Source: BP Statistical Review of World Energy)
coal and 90% non-coking coal.
Coal is mainly used as a fuel for electricity generation and other industrial processes such as
iron and steel, and cement manufacturing. Domestic coal production has been inadequate to
meet the total demand of coal in the country. Large quantities of coal are being imported
from other countries to meet the shortfall in domestic coal production, and compensate for
low calorific value and high ash content in domestic coal. Coal demand by sector is given in
Figure 1.7.
Although use of coal is not compatible with GHG reduction, it will continue to be the
dominant fuel as about 76.2% by electricity generation (utility and captive) in India is coal-
based (Source: BP Statistical Review of World Energy).
4
Coal also plays an important role in the security of supply and will continue to supply a
strategic share over the next three decades. The efficiencies of most of coal-fired power
plants in India range from 28 to 32% as compared to 45% for the most efficient plant (IEA).
Figure 1.7: Coal Demand by Sector: 2015-16 (Quantity in Million Tonnes)

Source: Sector-wise Demand as per Annual Plan of Min. of Coal, GOI.
Efforts for use of clean coal include beneficiation of coal for improving coal quality. Coal
washing is on the prevalent techniques adopted under beneficiation. The washing process
consists of removing impurities (mainly ash, sulphur and rocks) from the raw coal. Ministry of
Environment, Forest and Climatic Change (MoEFCC) issued a directive in 2016 which
requires washing of coal for supplies to stand-alone power plants of any capacity or a
captive power plant of 100 MW or above located within 500 and 749 km from pitheads.
The various other efforts being proposed by government and industry in the coming decades
include repowering existing coal-fired plants to improve their efficiency, replacing inefficient
subcritical power plants with energy efficient and low carbon technologies such as super
critical and ultra-super critical plants equipped with carbon capture technologies, which
would emit almost 40% less CO2 than subcritical plants.
1.3 Oil
Oil remains the world’s leading energy source, accounting for about 34% of total global
energy consumption in 2017. In recent years, supply of unconventional oil (shale oil, oil
sands, natural gas liquid, liquid fuels derived from coal and gas) along with increased crude
production both from mature oil fields has supported oil demand. Major demand for oil has
come from transportation sector.
India has only 0.3% of the world reserves with an estimated R/P ratio of only 14.4 years
while its share of world consumption is 4.8% (2007). India imports over 80% of its crude oil
requirements amounting to 211.1 million tonnes (4239 thousand barrels daily) in 2017.
India’s oil scenario is presented in Figure 1.8.
5
Figure 1.8: India’s Oil Energy Scenario

(Source: BP Statistical Review of World Energy)
The growing mobility and increasing demands for passenger and freight movement has
increased the consumption of petroleum products in the road transport sector. Transport
sector is the largest consumer of commercial energy (diesel and petrol). There is a continual
shift in the share of railways in freight movement to less fuel-efficient road transport mode.
The road-based mobility is the dominant mode in passenger transport as well. Sector-wise
petroleum product consumption (%) is shown in Figure 1.9.
Figure 1.9: Sector-wise Breakup of Petroleum products Consumption 2016-17

Source: Energy Statics 2018, CENTRAL STATISTICS OFFICE
Government is continually promoting improvements in energy efficiency in conventional

vehicles. India has adopted Euro 6/VI equivalent standards that will go into effect in 2020.
The passenger car fuel efficiency standards has been finalized that would result in an
6
average fuel consumption of 20 km/L for the four-wheeled passenger vehicles. However, it is
to be noted that heavy duty vehicles (HDV) dominate the overall fuel consumption in the
road transport sector is untouched.
The government is also promoting growth in fully electric and hybrid vehicles in the coming
years. Government of India has also proposed methanol and ethanol blending in petrol.
Ethanol Blending Programme aims at 20 percent ethanol blending in petrol by 2030, but
faces supply constraints.
1.4 Natural Gas
It is the number three fuel, contributing 23.4% of global primary energy. Unconventional gas,
shale and coal bed methane (CBM) are also available as LNG in the regional gas markets.
Natural gas is the only fossil fuel whose share of the primary energy mix has seen the
highest growth rate
internationally and has the
potential to play an important
role in the transition to a
cleaner, more affordable and
secure energy future. Natural
Gas offers a much cleaner
alternative to coal for power
generation and produces only
around half of the carbon
dioxide (CO2) emissions of coal
when burned to generate power.
India has only 0.6% of the world Figure 1.10: India’s Gas Energy Scenario
reserves with an estimated R/P
ratio of 43.6 years (Figure: 1.10) while its share of world consumption is 1.5%. About 40% of
the consumption is met by imports. The Government wants to make India a gas-based
economy by boosting domestic production and buying cheap LNG. India has set a target to
raise the share of gas in its primary energy mix up to 15% by 2022.
Natural gas is becoming more accessible in India thanks to a growing global gas market.
Natural gas is available as (i) Domestic Natural Gas and (ii) Imported Re-gasified Liquefied
Natural Gas (R-LNG). Since conceptualizing National Gas Grid (NGG) in 2000, India has
built extensive gas pipeline network, R-LNG terminals and City Gas Distribution (CGD)
networks. However, the pipeline network has been developed mostly in the northern and
western regions. A large part of the country lacks transmission infrastructure and access to
gas.
7
Gas consumption is
Other
dominated by sectors such as
industries Fertilizer
fertilizer, power, refineries, 14% 34%
city gas distribution and Petro-
petrochemicals (Figure 1.11). chemicals
The gap between production 8%
and demand is met LNG
imports. The government gas Refining
allocation policy give priority 10%
of gas supply to heavily
subsidized fertilizer industry CGD
Power
and city gas distribution. 11%
23%
CGD sector has four distinct Figure 1.11: Gas Demand by Sector FY 2015-16
Source: MoPNG
segments―Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) mostly used as auto-fuel, and Piped Natural Gas (PNG) used in
domestic, commercial and Industrial applications.
CNG is now prevalent in around 11 Indian states, with many cities mandating its use in
public transport (taxis, auto-rickshaws and buses). The growth in this sector is severely
constrained by insufficient number of CNG filling stations.
With proposed creation of smart cities, natural gas transmission infrastructure is being
expanded. India is currently expanding piped natural gas to cover 10 million households
within the next four years.
In 2013, Government instituted the Direct Benefit Transfer for LPG scheme to administer
domestic LPG subsidy linked to Aadhar (Unique Identification card).
The Pradhan Mantri Ujjwala Yojana, a new scheme launched on 1 May 2016 to provide free
LPG connections to women from below poverty line families has surpassed the target of 1.5
crore connections for 2016/`7 by providing 2.2 crore new LPG connections.
Government has also launched “Give it up” campaign to encourage well-to-do households to
voluntarily give up their subsidy so that the saved amount could be utilized to provide LPG
connections to poor households who depend on polluting cooking fuels. This campaign is
also aimed at reducing subsidy burden of LPG.
1.5 Hydro Power
Hydropower is the leading renewable source for electricity generation globally, supplying
71% of all renewable electricity. Hydro projects are not only considered as a means of power
generation but also as water security to the country. Hydropower has good synergies with all
generation technologies, for example, pumped hydro can be used as storage, as well as to
balance the power variability caused by increased renewable energy fed into the grid.
8
India has the potential of about 150 GW hydro power and out of which about 43 GW (up to
31.03.16) has been installed and operating at a load factor of 60% or lower. Renovation,
modernisation and up-rating of old hydro power plants is being periodically carried out to
overcome power shortage and resource constraints. Older hydro power units (>30 years)
are being refurbished to enhance the installed capacity to extend its useful life by further
1520 years. Nearly 94,000 MW is estimated to be available from pumped hydro schemes,
across 56 sites.
India has an estimated potential of 25 GW of small hydro projects (up to 25 MW capacity as

defined by MNRE). As of 2017 about 4.4 GW of small hydro projects (less than 10 MW)
have been installed.
1.6 Nuclear Power
The development of nuclear power is today concentrated in a relatively small group of

countries namely China, Korea, India and Russia. As of January 2015, the total identified
resources of uranium are considered sufficient for over 100 years’ of supply based on
current requirements.
The nuclear is increasingly seen as a means to add large scale base load power generation
while limiting the amount of GHG emissions. The low share of fuel cost in total generating
costs makes nuclear the lowest-cost base load electricity supply option. Uranium costs
account for only about 5% of total generating costs and thus protect plant operators against
fuel price volatility.
India has 22 nuclear reactors in operation in seven nuclear power plants, having a total
installed capacity of 6780 MW or nearly 2% of total installed utility power generation
capacity. Nuclear plants generated 38,247 million kWh at 64.4% PLF in the year 2017-18.
Pressurized Heavy Water Reactors (PHWR) based on natural uranium account for almost all
of the present installed capacity. Six more reactors are under construction with a combined
generation capacity of 4300 MW.
1.7 Bioenergy
Bio-energy is energy from organic matter (biomass) i.e. materials of biological origin that is
not fossilised. It represents the transformation of organic matter into a source of energy,
whether it is collected from natural surroundings or specifically grown for the purpose; for
example, agricultural residues and social forestry. It can be used in its original form as fuel,
or be refined to different kinds of solid, gaseous or liquid biofuels.
9
Bioenergy supplies 10% of global energy supply. Traditionally, biomass is seen as the main
domestic fuel, especially in more rural areas without access to electricity or other energy
sources. Bioenergy is gradually shifting from a traditional and indigenous energy source to a
modern and globally traded commodity. Climate change and energy independency are major
drivers for bioenergy development. These fuels can be used in all sectors of society, for
production of electricity, for transport, for heating and cooling, and for industrial processes.
Bioethanol is being promoted as an alternative sustainable source to hydrocarbonbased
fuels (petrol/diesel) used in transportation.
Around 500 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of biomass is available in India.
Approximately, 120-150 MTPA of biomass (covering agricultural and forest residues) is
estimated to be surplus, which corresponds to a potential of approximately 18000 MW of
electricity. Apart from this 5000 MW and 2600 MW of additional power can be generated
through bagasse-based cogeneration and waste-to-energy plants, respectively.
1.8 Electricity
India is the world's third largest producer and consumer of electricity with installed capacity
of 344 GW as on 31 May 2018. The break-up of installed capacity by energy source is
shown in Figure 1.12 and Table 1.1.
Hydro Oil
13.2% RES* (MNRE) 0.2%
20.1%
Nuclear
Other 2.0%
Gas
9.5%
7.2%
Coal
57.3%
Coal Gas Oil Hydro (Renewable) Nuclear RES* (MNRE)
Figure 1.12: Electricity Installed Capacity by Energy Source
* Installed capacity in respect of RES (MNRE) as on 31.03.2018. RES (Renewable Energy Sources) include Small Hydro Project,
Biomass Gasifier, Biomass Power, Urban & Industrial Waste Power, Solar and Wind Energy
10
Table 1.1: Break-up of installed capacity by Energy Source

Fuel MW % of Total
Total Thermal 2,22,693 64.80%
Coal 1,96,958 57.30%
Gas 24,897 7.20%
Oil 838 0.20%
Hydro (Renewable) 45,403 13.20%
Nuclear 6,780 2.00%
RES* (MNRE) 69,022 20.10%
Total 343,899
Electricity generation by fuel source is shown in Table 1.2 and Figure 1.13. India's electricity
sector is dominated by coal-based power plant for meeting about 76.2% of all electricity
needs.
Table 1.2: Power Generation by Fuel Source
Energy Natural Nuclear Hydro
Oil Coal Renewables Others Total
source Gas energy electric
Terawatt-
10.3 75.5 1141.4 37.4 135.6 96.4 0.3 1497
hours
% 0.7 5 76.2 2.5 9.1 6.4 0.02 100
Source: BP Statistical Review of World Energy
Total – 1497 Terawatt-hours
Figure 1.13: Electricity Generation by Fuel Source
The overall plant load factor (PLF) of all thermal power plants (central, state and private) is
only about 65%. The Government is undertaking Renovation & Modernization and Life
Extension of old existing power plants to effectively utilize existing capacity and improve
PLF.
Industry dominates electricity consumption (40%) followed by domestic (24%) and

agriculture (18%) as shown in Table 1.14.
11
Others Commercial
7% 9%
Traction & Railways
2%
Domestic
24%
Industry
40%
Agriculture
18%
Total Consumption - 1066268 GWh

Figure 1.14: Electricity Consumption by Sectors in India during 2016-17
(Source: Energy Statics 2018, CENTRAL STATISTICS OFFICE)
Final commerical energy consumption is dominated by industrial sector (52%), followed by

transport (24%), and by residential and commercial (17%) sectors (Figure 1.15).
Figure 1.15: Final Commercial Energy Consumption (MTOE)

By Various Sectors 2015-16
(Source: TERI Energy & Environment Data Dairy and Yearbook 2016/17)
Renewables are the fastest-growing energy source in the world today. It is expected to meet
at least 14% of the global energy mix by 2040. India is very active in renewable energy
development, especially solar and wind electricity generation. India had grid connected
installed capacity of about 69.02 GW renewable technologies as of 31 March 2018. The plan
is to achieve a total of 175 GW total installed capacity by 31 March 2022. The break-up of
installed capacity by type of (grid-connected) renewable is shown in Table 1.3 and breakup
of renewable energy installed capacity (%) is shown in Figure 1.16.
12
Table 1.3: Renewable Energy Installed Capacity in India (MNRE)

Type Capacity (in MW)
Grid Connected Power
Wind 34,046.00
Solar 21,651.48
Small Hydro Power Projects 4,485.81
Biomass Power & Gasification and Bagasse Cogeneration 8,700.80
Waste to Power 138.30
Total - Grid Connected Power ( as of 31 March 2018) 69,022.39
Figure 1.16: Renewable Energy Installed Capacity in India (%) (MNRE)
The effective implementation of Electricity Act 2003 contributed to remarkable achievements

during last ten years.
Electricity Act 2003: The objective of the act is to introduce competition, protect consumer’s
interests and provide power for all. The Act provides for National Electricity Policy, Rural
The demand-supply gap is reduced to a low 1.4% (-) in 2017-18. The gross electricity
Electrification, Open access in transmission, phased open access in distribution, mandatory SERCs,
consumption was 1,122
license free generation and kWh per capita
distribution, powerin the year
trading, 2016-17.
mandatory The and
metering per stringent
capita electricity
penalties
consumption is much
for theft of electricity. lower compared to many countries.
The various policy interventions proposed in power sector include the following:
 A strong push for renewable energy (mainly solar and wind power), with a target to
achieve 175 GW of installed capacity.
 Enhanced efforts on village electrification and connection of households lacking
electricity supply with the goal to reach universal electricity supply.
 Move towards mandatory use of supercritical technology in new coal-fired power
generation.
 Expanded efforts to strengthen the national grid and reduce T&D losses (target: 15 %.)
13
Policy Indicators
Per-capita electricity consumption and energy intensity are the most used policy indicators,
both at national and international levels.
Per-capita Electricity Consumption
All India per-capita electrical consumption has increased from 631.4 kWh (2005-2006) to
1075 (2015-16). All India Annual per Capita Consumption of Electricity since 2006 is shown
in the Table 1.4. The government is pursuing a Rs.16,320 crore project called Saubhagya to
give last-mile electricity connectivity to about 40 million households by end of 2018.
Table 1.4: Per Capita Electricity Consumption (CEA)

Year Per Capita Electricity
Consumption (kWh)
2005-06 631.4
2006-07 671.9
2007-08 717.1
2008-09 733.5
2010-11 818.8
2011-12 883.63
2012-13 914.41
2013-14 957
2015-2016 1122
Energy intensity
Energy intensity is an indication of how much energy is used to produce one unit of
economic output. Lower ratio indicates that less energy is used to produce one unit of
output. Unlike energy use per capita which describes only how much energy is being used,
and provides no details as to how that energy is used, energy intensity clarifies how well
energy infrastructure is performing and what it does for a person.
Energy Intensity is the ratio between energy supply and gross domestic product (GDP)
measured at purchasing power parity at constant prices of 2011. The unit is energy use (kg
of oil equivalent) per $1,000 GDP (constant 2011 PPP). The trend in energy intensity is
shown in Figure 1.17.
India stood at 0.122 koe/$2005p as against world average of 0.144 koe/$2005p (Enerdata
2017).
The energy intensity (at 2004/05 prices) decreased from 0.465 MJ per rupee in 2006/07 to
0.271 MJ per rupee in 2015/16 (MoSPI 2017).
14
180
Energy Intensity Trend
160
Energy use (kg of oil equivalent) per

140
120
100
$1,000 GDP
80
60
40
20
0
Figure 1.17 Energy Intensity Trend

1.9 Carbon-dioxide emissions
India’s CO2 emissions can be seen in two different perspectives. On per-capita basis,
emissions are very low 1.7 t CO2, which is 25% of China’s and 10% of United States and
even well below the global per capita average of 4.3 t CO2.
On volume basis, India is third largest country in terms of CO2 emissions. The carbon
dioxide emission in 2017 was 2344.2 Million tonnes of carbon dioxide which is 7% of world
total emissions. The trend in CO2 emissions over the last 15 years is shown in Figure 1.18.
Heavy use of coal and low power plants efficiencies are some of the reason for high carbon
intensity of 0.791 kg CO2/kWh as against world average of 0.533 kg CO2/kWh.
2500.0
CO2 Emissions- India
CO2 emission (Million Tonnes)
2000.0
1500.0
1000.0
500.0
-
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
Figure 1.18: CO2 Emissions Trend

15
1.10 Policy Interventions
Integrated Energy Policy
The Government of India has adopted an integrated energy policy which aims to provide
energy security to all its citizens through conventional as well as alternative sources of
energy. Some of the policies adopted by the Indian Government are as follows.
 The Electricity Act, 2003 has given a thrust to distributed generation particularly in the
context of rural electrification. The Act specifies distributed generation and supply
through stand-alone conventional and renewable energy systems.
 The National Electricity Policy notified in 2005 recommends providing reliable rural
electrification system; wherever conventional grid is not feasible, decentralized
distributed generation facilities (using conventional or non-conventional sources of
energy) together with local distribution network to be provided.
 Two specific schemes, the Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojna and the Remote
Village Electrification Scheme, provide up to 90% capital subsidy for rural electrification
projects using decentralized distributed generation options based on conventional and
non-conventional fuels.
Paris Agreement on Climatic Change
Conference of the Parties (COP 21) was held in Paris under the UN Body, UNFCCC in
2015. The agreement reaffirms the goal of keeping average warming below 2 degrees
Celsius. India has submitted its Intended Nationally Determined Contributions (INDC) with
plan, policies, measures, actions etc. to combat climatic change. Some of India’s INDC
commitments include the following:
 Propagate sustainable living

 Adopt climate friendly and cleaner path
 Reduce emission intensity of its GDP by 33 to 35 percent by 2030 from 2005 level.
 Generate 40 percent cumulative electric power generation from non-fossil fuel based
resources by 2030.
 Support environmental initiatives (annually, 220 billion rupees of CSR money is to be
spent.
 Voluntary carbon disclosure programme for private sector handled by Carbon Disclosure
Project, India.
 National Solar Mission20 GW to 100 GW by 2022.
 Nationwide Campaign for Energy Conservation―targets to save 10 % of energy
consumption by 2018-2019
 Smart Cities Mission―by building a clean and sustainable environment.
 Green Highways (Plantation & Maintenance) Policy 140,000 km long “tree-line” along
both sides of national highways.
16
 Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Hybrid & Electric Vehicles.
1.11 Renewable Energy Thrust
Currently renewables account for around 20% of India’s total installed capacity. With
abundant natural resources for solar power, wind power, bio-energy and hydro power, the
Government of India in 2015 set a target to achieve 175 GW of renewable energy by 2022).
This target comprises 100 GW solar power, 60 GW wind power, 10 GW bio-energy, and 5
GW small hydro power (Figure 1.19).
Figure 1.19: Break-up of Targeted Generation of 175 GW (MNRE)
The 100 GW break-up of solar power is shown in Figure 1.20. Of this, 40 GW has been
targeted through grid-connected rooftop solar.
Figure 1.20: Road Map for Solar Power by 2022 (MNRE)
Few of the most important terms relevant to renewable energy are as follows:
17
Renewable Purchase Obligation (‘RPO’)

Renewable Purchase Obligation (RPO) is the requirement set by the Central Electricity
Regulatory Commission (CERC) for an obligated entity to purchase electricity from
renewable energy sources or buy Renewable Energy Certificates.
Obligated entity generally means the distribution licensee, consumer owning the captive power
plant (other than fossil fuel based cogeneration) and open access consumers (1 MW and above)
who are mandated to fulfil the renewable power obligations under the respective State’s legislation.
If the distribution licensee is not able to produce renewable power or tie up procurement of
renewable energy to meet the RPO target, it may plan to purchase RECs to meet its RPO target.
Under Renewable Purchase Obligation mechanism, each State has to meet 3% of its energy
demand from solar sources, The Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE) is
planning to raise the mandatory RPO requirement to 10.5%.
Renewable Energy Certificate (REC)

It is a market based instrument created to promote renewable energy and facilitate
renewable purchase obligation (RPO).
1 REC = 1 MWh of renewable electricity generated and injected into the grid.
REC can be traded only in the CERC approved power exchanges namely Indian Energy
Exchange and Power Exchange of India. However, RE generators with existing PPAs are
not eligible for REC mechanism.
Power Purchase Agreement (PPA)

PPA is a legal contract between an electricity generator and a power purchaser. The power
purchaser agrees to off-take the power generated by generator for a specified number of
years (usually >10 years). The generator is thereby assured of getting the money back
within the PPA period. It is during this time the power purchaser buys power. Central and
State utility PPA contractual terms last for 25 years, whereas new Private PPAs are around
510 years.
Solar Developers are able to competitively price solar power for both public as well as
private customers under the terms of the PPA. PPAs usually include terms of agreement i.e.
details on interfacing and evacuation facilities, operation and maintenance, metering
arrangements, scheduling of solar power, rate of energy including escalation rates, dispute
settlement, billing and payment.
Feed-in Tariff
A feed-in tariff (FIT) is a policy designed to promote the renewable energy resources. A
feed-in tariff amounts to a guaranteed payment to homeowners (and other energy
developers) for the electricity they produce. Feed-in tariff payments are for a preset amount
18
determined by State Electricity Regulatory Commissions (SERCs). Generally FIT payments

are made over a period of 15 to 20 years.
The feed-in tariff mechanism is expected to apply towards solar projects with capacities less
than 5 MWs and wind projects with capacities below 25 MWs.
Open Access
Open Access enables heavy consumers with more than 1 MW connected load to buy cheap
power from the open market. The concept is to allow the consumer to choose from a number
of competitive power companies, rather than being forced to buy power from the local utility
monopoly. It not only helps the industrial & commercial consumers by ensuring regular
electricity supply at competitive rates but also enhances the business of power markets.
Open access helps consumers meet their Renewable Purchase Obligations (RPOs) as well.
A consumer with bulk load can avail the benefits of green solar power by either purchasing
through the rooftop solar installation in its premises or buying from an offsite solar farm
under open access.
Open Access will ease the power shortage since a number of power producers like Solar
energy companies can now transmit power from their solar parks to distant load centres.
Once the consumers are given the choice to purchase power from the open market, it will
automatically lead to competitive pricing of electricity making electricity price drop. Operators
under open access have to incur various charges for using the grid. These charges can vary
from state to state and are lower in states with stable grid and favourable regulatory regime.
Based on the location of the purchasing and selling entities, Open Access can be classified
as follows:
Inter-State Open Access: In this, the purchasing and selling entities belong to different
states and they have to follow Central Electricity Regulatory Commission (CERC)
regulations.
.
Intra-State Open Access: As evident from the name, the purchasing and selling entities, in
this case, belong to the same state. State Electricity Regulatory Commission (SERC)
regulations apply.
The buyer and seller of electricity can opt for either collective or bilateral transactions.
In collective transaction, the trading of electricity is facilitated through exchanges with a very
small fixed fee.
In case of bilateral transaction, a Power Purchase Agreement is signed between the seller
and the consumer for buying power at mutually agreed tariff for predetermined number of
years. Many of the leading solar players use such bilateral agreements for tariff
determination with commercial and industrial clients.
19
Open Access rights in India are governed by the Electricity Act 2003 which has laid down
regulations for competition in the power market.
Incentives and Support

There are many incentives provided to solar power development stated in both central and
state solar policies. Central government incentives include the following:
 Capital subsidy equivalent to 30% of the project cost for non-commercial rooftop PV
systems.
 Income tax holidays and accelerated depreciation for commercial projects
 Concessional custom duties on solar equipment
 Limited financial support for solar park projects
1.12 Distributed Generation
When energy is generated and distributed using small scale technologies closer to its end
users, it is termed as Distributed Generation. These generations are based on the
technologies, mainly renewable such as photovoltaic cells, wind turbines, micro hydro plants
(Figure 1.21). Onsite decentralized power generation has many benefits over the centralized
power generation systems, as it eliminates the costs associated with the transmission and
distribution of power over long distances. These small scale technologies can yield power
from 1 KW to as much as 100 MW.
When decentralized electricity generation takes place at local level using site specific energy
sources serving a limited number of consumers, it is called Micro Grid. The sources can be
individually connected to grid so that they can supply power to the grid when required or can
be totally independent of the grid. When a source supplies power to the grid when required,
the consumer becomes ‘prosumer’ i.e. a producer as well as consumer of electricity. This will
help utilities to reduce the need for massive investments in building new high-voltage
transmission lines to carry renewable power from far-off plants to towns and cities.
From customers view, micro grids is similar to traditional local voltage distribution networks
not only providing their electricity needs, but also enhancing reliability, improving power
quality by reducing voltage dips and resulting in lower cost of energy supply.
20
Figure 1.21: Distributed Generation
Micro energy grid (MEG) is a relatively small-scale localized energy network that includes load, a
control system, and a set of energy resources, such as generators and energy storage devices.
MEG can operate in a grid-connected mode where energy resources interact with the main
electrical grid, or in an islanding mode where an MEG feeds its local loads without the use of the
main electrical grid.
On-site decentralized power generation helps in reducing peak loads and hence better
system management of the central grid. In typical Indian rural areas, smart micro-grids can
provide clean, reliable, affordable, and scalable electrical power.
A key feature of a micro-grid is its ability to separate and isolate itself from the grid
seamlessly during a utility grid disturbance with little or no disruption to the loads within the
micro-grid. The micro-grid can automatically resynchronize itself when the utility grid returns
to normal functioning, and reconnects itself to the grid seamlessly.
Benefits of Distributed Generation
 No high peak load shortages

 Reduced transmission and distribution losses
 Linking remote and inaccessible areas
 Faster response to new power demands
 Improved supply reliability and power management
Technologies for Distributed Generation

A decentralized generation system can include renewable as well as non-renewable energy
sources. The decentralized generation technologies include, but are not limited to the
following:
 Reciprocating Engines
 Micro turbines
 Gas turbines
 Fuel cells
21
 Photovoltaic (PV) cells

 Wind Turbines
1.13 Smart Cities
In India, about 31% of population living in urban areas contribute 63% of GDP. It is projected
that by 2050, 70% of the population in India will be living in the cities. Cities are already
facing problems such as high population, migration from rural areas, poor air quality,
inadequate waste management, declining quality of life, power shortage, traffic jam,
overburdened transport system and so on. In June 2015 the government launched the Smart
City Mission, with the aim of developing 100 smart cities across India. Smart cities mission
was conceived to find smarter solution to make cities sustainable i.e. meet the needs of
future generation.
There is no agreed decision on what is a smart city. It is very specific to the city, for each city
needs are different and so also the solutions. There is no one size fits all. The focus of smart
cities depends upon the pressing needs of its citizens, and where greater opportunities for
improvement lie. It also depends upon economic growth and quality of life. Hence, there are
various definitions of a smart city. On such definition is as follows:
“A smart city uses information and communications technology to enhance its liveability,
workability, and sustainability.” ‐ Smart Cities Council
The main objective of a smart city is to provide a clean, safe and sustainable environment to
live and work, by ensuring modern urban infrastructure and efficient use of resources. A
smart city should be green, efficient and climate resilient. The pillars of a smart city are (a)
core infrastructure (b) quality of life (c) sustainable environment and (d) smart solution.
A smart city uses available technologies to improve living conditions through access to
information about parameters that affect its inhabitants. These parameters include energy
consumption, utilities, transportation, air quality, water quality, waste management, health-
related issues, education levels, employment and any other relevant information that could
potentially benefit the population. Thus reaching the status of a fully autonomous smart city
is a long-term goal.
A city aspiring to become smart has to formulate its unique vision, mission and plan
reflecting its needs and aspirations depending upon the local context, resources and
priorities of its citizens. These may include even basic needs for example open public
spaces, more transit options, clean water, E-Governance, transparency etc. Citizens should
be engaged in the process. Local leaders may also customize ideas from around the world
to harness technology.
Two types of cities are being proposed (1) green field project i.e. city built from scratch
(example is Dhlorea, Gujarat), and (2) exiting city retrofitted with latest technology.
22
Centre has allocated a fund of INR 48000 Crores for this purpose. Each city would be
funded INR 100 crores for 5 years. An equal matching amount is to be contributed jointly by
the State and Urban Local Governments. Other sources of funding include infrastructure
financing institutions, external commercial borrowing, financial institutions, banks lending
institutions, direct investments and even other countries.
Key energy management components of smart cities include the following:

 Distributed generation
 Smart grid
 Smart meters
 Demand response
 Energy storage
 Micro grid and virtual power plant
 Rooftop solar initiatives
 Smart LED
 Smart street lighting
 Energy harvesting
 Energy-efficient and adaptive construction designs, technologies and standards
 Smart equipment and appliances
 Advanced HVAC
 Building retrofits
One example of energy-related application in smart cities is the popular ‘Smart Street
Lighting’. Street lighting projects are popular because of their enormous potential to deliver a
quick return on investment. Smart street lights can save 50% to 70% of energy cost by
dimming lighting when activity is low. Networked LED lights can provide not only energy
savings but information about outages or other anomalies in the lighting network. These
lights are interconnected and also communicate with video cameras, parking sensors,
environmental sensors, weather sensors.
1.14 Smart Transportation
As per a World Bank study, by 2031, some 600 million people are expected to live in India's
cities. However, only about 20 Indian cities with populations over 500,000 have any kind of
organized public transport systems. In fact, the share of public transport in large Indian cities
is decreasing over the years. Furthermore, India's accident and fatality rates are among the
highest in the world, mainly affecting the poor and vulnerable who do not have their own
means of transportation.
Smart transportation includes the use of several technologies, such as car navigation; traffic
signal control systems; container management systems; automatic number plate recognition
or speed cameras to monitor vehicle activities, such as security CCTV systems; and to more
advanced applications that integrate live data and feedback from a number of sources.
23
Some of the technologies relevant for Smart Transportation include the following:
Bicycle sharing system: A bicycle sharing system, public bicycle system, or bike share
scheme, is a service in which bicycles are made available for shared use to individuals on a
very short-term basis. For many systems, smart phone mapping apps show nearby stations.
how many bikes and how many open docks are available at each station, increasing
convenience and green commuting for commuters.
Dynamic carpooling/car sharing: Carpooling applications link drivers and passengers in

real-time, thus enabling dynamic carpooling. Drivers wishing to profit from their journeys can
find people situated on the same route via a smartphone app and vice versa.
GPS-based tracking and route information of public transport: Advanced vehicle

tracking solutions enhance operations and optimise public transportation and ridership.
These solutions offer real-time GPS tracking from mobile devices thereby increasing the
reliability of public transportation.
Road user charging: Road user charges are direct charges levied for the use of roads,
including road tolls, distance or time-based fees, congestion charges and charges designed
to discourage use of certain classes of vehicles, fuel sources or more polluting vehicles.
These charges help to reduce peak hour travel and associated traffic congestion or other
social and environmental negative impacts associated with road travel such as air pollution,
greenhouse gas emissions.
Single fare card: Single fare card for fare payment for the various participating public
transportation systems. The cards can be recharged by mobile applications/internet/retail
outlets. The same cards could also be used for street parking.
Smart parking: A smart parking leverages parking sensors, cameras, smart parking solution
to provide efficient use of on street and off street parking spaces.
Smart toll: Smart toll leverages technology like number plate detection, RFID (Radio
Frequency Identification), etc. to charge toll fees to user account so that vehicles do not
have to wait at toll gates on national highway.
Smart traffic lights: Smart traffic lights leverages technology to sense traffic condition and
tune traffic lights which enable smooth flow of traffic.
Electric vehicles: Support electricity and renewable energy operated cars with the required
infrastructure, such as plug-in infrastructure for Electric Vehicles (EVs) and integration with
grid.
24
1.15 Smart Grid
India’s energy demand is expected to increase three times in the coming 10 years and two-
thirds of the energy would be carried by the grid. The traditional grid has been a centralized
unidirectional system with transmission, distribution, and demand-driven control as shown in
Figure 1.22. To meet ever-increasing demand, more power stations were installed. In some
places, the supply of electricity, especially at peak demand time, could not meet the
demand, resulting in poor quality of service. With increasing use of electronics and
communication equipment, customers are demanding higher quality and reliable power.
Therefore the existing grid is inadequate and the issues faced include power shortage, poor
access to electricity in rural areas, high T&D losses, insufficient power consumption, poor
reliability and power theft.
Figure 1.22: Conventional Grid
With increasing use of renewable energy sources, major shift from centralized grid topology
to a distributed grid with power being both generated and consumed in the same place is
taking place. There is a need for more sophisticated control systems to facilitate renewable
energy integration with the main electrical grid.
With increasing penetration of distributed generation, the direction of power flow is also
changing from unidirectional to bidirectional, which raises safety and reliability issues. In this
context, smart grid is being proposed as the solution to meet increasing demands for stable,
reliable and uninterrupted power supply. With the smart grid vision, generation, transmission,
and distribution infrastructure will be better able to handle bidirectional power flows and allow
for flexible network topology.
A Smart Grid is one that incorporates information and communication technology into
every aspect of electricity generation, delivery and consumption in order to minimize
environmental impact, enhance markets, improve reliability and service, reduce costs
and improve efficiency.
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI)
25
Smart Grid is a power system capable of two-way communication between all the entities of
the network: generation, transmission, distribution and the consumers. The aim of smart grid
is to provide real-time monitoring and control, and thus improving the overall efficiency of the
entire system apart from inclusion of distributed energy resources e.g. renewable energy into
the system.
Technologies for smart Grid

To build an SEG, several technologies need to be developed and implemented covering
generation, transmission, and distribution systems, as well as consumer appliances and
equipment. These include advanced sensing and measurement, advanced metering
infrastructure (AMI), Home Area Network (HAN) communication, and phasor measurement
units (PMU).
Benefits of Smart Grid

Utilities are able to anticipate, detect and respond to system problem faster with
technologies such as embedded sensors and automated controls. These technologies
facilitate self-healing and can automatically avoid or at least mitigate power outages, power
quality problems, and service disruptions, thereby providing consumers with a more reliable
energy system.
Power systems will be able to predict availability of renewable energy sources so as to utilize
them efficiently. New technologies will contribute to better demand response and load
control, allowing utilities to lower costs by shifting loads to less expensive generation during
peak demand. The schematic representation of smart grid with benefits is shown in Figure
1.23.
With smart grid, meters will evolve from just monitoring loads into smart meters, where
meters could store how electricity was used by customers at different times of the day. This
allows continuous communications to facilitate monitoring in real time. This will enable
consumers to better manage energy consumption by adjusting consumption and usage
patterns to reduce costs. With modern demand response-aware devices, such as modern
air conditioners and refrigerators, duty cycle can be automatically adjusted to avoid running
during grid peaking conditions.
The National Tariff Policy 2016 had mandated that consumers with monthly consumption
of over 500 units (or kilowatt hour) had to be switched to smart meters (internet-enabled
meters).
26
Figure 1.23: Schematic Representation of Smart Grid.
Government is investing highly in upgrading the existing grid to smart grid through various
programs like Revised Accelerated Power Development and Reform Program (RAPDRP)
and other schemes such as Jawaharlal Nehru National Solar Mission, Rajiv Gandhi
Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY).
1.16 Internet of Things (IoT)
Internet revolution began with connecting people to information and then people to people.
The next phase involves connecting devices to devices. Even if seven billion people in the
planet are connected, this will be insignificant compared with connecting 25 billion devices
as estimated by 2020. We are rapidly evolving from an Internet of people to a “The Internet
of Things”. The IoT is a technology digitizing the physical world.
In the most general form, the IoT is a world where everything and everyone is connected
together. Additionally, the physical objects may also make decisions about the collected,
processed, and exchanged information, as well as take actions to control the physical
objects and the environment in which they are embedded.
The Internet of Things (IoT) is defined as a collection of physical objects (i.e., “things”) and
their interconnected communication networks that allow the physical objects to gather, store,
27
process, and exchange information. The physical objects can be almost anything, from the
smallest devices or products to the largest systems.
The Internet of Things (IoTs) has been successfully adopted in many commercial
applications. We are already aware of wearable applications which can track and
display personalized data such as calories burnt, heart rate, sleep hours etc. that result
in improving one’s health and fitness.
The capabilities that enable the physical objects to participate in the IoT are usually
composed of an assemblage of different types of advanced technologies including
electronics, sensors, actuators, and software. These capabilities are either connected to or
integrated into conventional products and systems such commercial building control, HVAC
appliances, vehicles, power generators etc.
There are several important elements that are needed in the implementation of the IoT. The
first is the communication networks that enable devices, perhaps using different operating
systems, to communicate with one another. The second is the large and inexpensive
information storage and processing power available in modern integrated circuits. The third
is the inexpensive and unobtrusive devices that can sense and actuate to control the things
and/or environment in which the things are embedded.
Micro miniature devices that can sense and actuate are commonly called “MEMS” in the
semiconductor industry, which is an acronym for “Micro-Electro-Mechanical Systems.”
MEMS is an emerging technology that is an important enabler for the IoT.
Few potential applications for using IoT technology include the following:
Smart Homes or Buildings: Sensors and actuators can monitor the energy consumption and
take appropriate action such as switching on/off lighting and cooling tasks. The smart home
appliances are available with connectivity features that allow them to be automated to
benefit from smart metering and variable tariffs.
Transportation: Sensors in vehicles can monitor various aspects related to the efficiency of
the transport: tire pressure, fuel consumption, location, and speed. Another example is smart
traffic light sensors which could stop or slow down approaching traffic to avoid traffic jams or
accidents when multiple braking vehicles are detected.
Smart grid: Smart meters will collect and relay information on electricity consumption,
enabling dynamic pricing based on actual electricity supply and demand. Based on
current price and local energy needs, the system can switch on or off appliances
that need a lot of power, or it could switch them automatically to different power
sources such as solar and wind.
28
Industrial Applications: An IoTbased real-time monitoring system helps to achieve optimum

use of energy. Pumping Flow and pressure can be regulated and controlled using sensors
and software in real-time to optimize performance and efficiency. IoTbased monitoring can
also be setup for the following:
 Motors
 Fans
 Chillers
 Air compressors
 Boilers
 DG sets
1.17 Industry 4.0
A typical industry as part of its operation generates lot of data which it does not use. Since
energy management is not normally part of core business process, energy related data is
not effectively used. From the technology point of view, the growth of sensor networks and
Internet of Things has given us the tools to effectively monitor and adjust all aspects of data
in real time.
With Industry (Energy) 4.0 projects, energy data is incorporated into factory management.
Energy consumption along with production and costs can be tracked down to the level of
individual batches for specific energy consumption and analysis of data can be performed
and reports can be generated. Data analytics can be performed to optimize production,
increase efficiency, flexibility and enhance quality in real-time.
The fourth Industrial revolution or Industry 4.0 as it is well-known is broader than the IoT,
encompassing technologies such as big data analytics, machine learning, and additive
manufacturing (3-D printing).
Industry 4.0 is enabled by following technologies that integrate the digital and real worlds:
 The Internet of Things (IoT): Connecting more and more systems, devices, sensors,
assets and people through networks ranging from wireless, low-power wide-area
networks to wired high-capacity networks
 Mobile solutions: Including smartphones, tablets, wearable sensors and smart glasses
 Cloud computing: Including low-cost processing and data storage solutions
 Cyber-physical systems (CPS): Monitoring and controlling physical processes using
sensors, actuators and processors, based on digital models of the physical world
 Big data analytics and business intelligence: Turning data into actionable insights, which
include early warning algorithms, predictive models, decision support, workflows and
dashboards
 Advanced manufacturing technologies: robotics and 3D printing.
29
2. PERFORM, ACHIEVE AND TRADE (PAT)
2.1 PAT Genesis
National Mission on Enhanced Energy Efficiency (NMEEE) is one of the eight missions
which formed India’s National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC). The objective of
NMEEE is to trigger energy efficiency opportunities through market based approach using
various instruments as shown in Figure 2.1. One of the key instruments of NMEEE is
Perform, Achieve and Trade (PAT). PAT is a regulatory instrument to reduce specific energy
consumption in energy intensive industries, with market based approach to enhance the cost
effectiveness through certification of excess energy saving that can be traded.
Objectives of NMEEE
The National Mission on Enhanced Energy Efficiency mandates following objectives;
 A market based mechanism to

enhance cost effectiveness of
improvements in energy efficiency
in energy-intensive large industries
and facilities, through certification
of energy savings that could be
traded. (Perform Achieve and
Trade)
 Accelerating the shift to energy

efficient appliances in designated
sectors through innovative
measures to make the products
more affordable. (Market
Transformation for Energy
Efficiency)
Figure 2.1: Components of NMEEE

 Creation of mechanisms that would
help finance demand side management programmes in all sectors by capturing future
energy savings. (Energy Efficiency Financing Platform)
 Developing fiscal instruments to promote energy efficiency (Framework for Energy

Efficient Economic Development) Market-based approaches to unlock energy efficiency
opportunities, estimated to be about Rs. 74,000 crores
India has submitted its Intended Nationally Determined Contribution (INDC) to the United
Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) targets to lower the emission
30
intensity of its GDP by 33% to 35% by 2030 below 2005 levels. The goal is to reduce energy
intensity by 7% between 2016 and 2019. PAT is one of the most effective ways to achieve
and meet India’s INDC commitments.
2.2 Overview of PAT
PAT mandates specific energy efficiency improvements for the most energy intensive
industries. The scheme is based on the wide variations in specific energy consumptions
(baseline SECs) of different units in each notified sector. The units in terms of SECs range
from among the best in the world to some of the most inefficient units.
The scheme proposes improvements in the specific energy consumption of each unit. The
specific energy consumption reduction (target SEC) is prescribed for each unit depending
upon its current energy efficiency level; more efficient unit will have a lower reduction target
than less efficient unit in the same sector.
The first cycle of PAT (PATI) was completed in March 2015 covering eight energy
intensive sectors namely thermal power stations, iron and steel plants, cement, fertilizer,
textile, pulp and paper, chlor alkali and aluminium. After rigorous verification of energy
performances, the units surpassing their targets were identified for award of Energy Saving
Certificates (1 ESCerts = 1 MTOE (Metric Tonne of Oil Equivalent) based on their achieved
SEC. On the other hand, those units that have not met their target SECs are required to
purchase ESCerts for meeting compliance besides paying a penalty for not meeting the
target. The concept of target, compliance, ESCerts, and penalty is illustrated in Figure 2.2.
ESCert can be traded in two exchanges namely Indian Energy Exchange (IEX) and Power
Exchange of India (PXIL).
Figure 2.2: Concept of Target, Compliance, ESCerts and Penalty

31
2.3 PAT Concept
The concept of PAT scheme for a complete cycle is presented in the Figure 2.3.
Figure 2.3: PAT Concept
2.4 Baseline Assessment
Once a unit is identified as a Designated Consumer (DC) based on its threshold energy
consumption, PAT study begins with assessment of baseline specific energy consumption
(SEC) using Form-1. SEC is calculated on a Gate-to-Gate (GtG) concept after determining
the plant boundary as shown in the Figure 2.4.
Energy consumption and production details are collected in sector specific pro-forma from
DCs. The baseline is reviewed and evaluated by BEE in consultation with relevant sector-
pecific technical committee, and target SEC along with target year is notified and
communicated to DCs. This information is gazetted and released in BEE website.
32
Figure 2.4: SEC Assessment Using Gate-to-Gate Approach
Within three months of the issue of notification of target SEC, the concerned DC shall
submit a scheme to State Designated Agency (SDA) with a copy to BEE which shall include
action plan proposing brief description of energy saving measures to comply with energy
consumption norms and standard by the target year, estimated cost of each identified
energy saving measure and implementation plan to achieve energy consumption Norms
and Standards. A PAT cycle is three years and at end of the third year, target SEC will be
verified by accredited energy auditors and reported for reduction in specific energy
consumption as shown in Figure 2.5.
Figure 2.5: Reductions in SEC
2.5 Monitoring and Verification
Monitoring, reporting and verification is carried out to ensure effective and credible
assessment of energy efficiency achieved by DCs. Specific energy consumption in the
baseline and assessment year is verified. The verification involves independent evaluation of
each activity a DC had taken to comply with energy reduction targets. The accredited energy
auditing firm empanelled with BEE shall perform the Monitoring and Verification of the DCs
and shall submit a report on the same to SDA with a copy to BEE
Normalization
Normalization is a process of rationalization of the energy and production data considering

the impact of quantifiable external variables that are beyond the control of the DCs. This is
33
to ensure that DCs are not placed in a position of advantage or disadvantage when target
scenario is compared to baseline scenario. Authentic and relevant documents should be
submitted by DC to support normalization. Data used for normalization should be available
for baseline as well as target (assessment) year. A list of typical normalization factors
(internal and external factors) are listed as follows:
Internal Factors for Normalization

 Capacity utilization
 Product mix & intermediary product
 Fuel mix (e.g. Pet coke utilization in kiln)
 Power mix (imported & exported from/ to the grid and self-generation from the captive
power plant)
 Fuel quality in CPP
 Low PLF in CPP
 Raw material quality
 Biomass/Alternate fuel unavailability
 Addition of new line/Unit (In process & power generation)
 Renewable energy
External Factors for Normalization

 Grid failure/Breakdown (Grid not synchronized with CPP)
 Natural disaster (flood, earthquake etc.)
 Major change in Government policy (affecting plant process system)
 Environmental concerns (additional environmental equipment requirement due to
major change in government policy on environmental requirements)
 Unforeseen circumstances (labour strike/lockouts/social unrest/riots)
Normalization Documents and M&V Guidelines

Normalization document for each sector is available with BEE for free reference and
downloads in BEE website for the benefit of DCs.
Process of verification
The verification involves review of Sector Specific Pro-forma, Form 1 and Summary Sheet.
The following forms are to be submitted by the concerned DC and EmAEA.
 Sector Specific Pro-Forma and Form I by DC

 Performance Assessment Documents (Form A) by DC
 Certificate of Verification (Form B) by EmEA
 Compliance of Energy Consumption Norms Document (Form D) by DC
Sector Specific Pro-forma

The Sector Specific Pro-forma covers following aspects of GtG information:
 Production and capacity utilisation details

 Section-wise details of various products
34
 Electricity and renewable energy consumption

 Power generation (DG/GG/GT/STG/Cogeneration/WHR)
 Fuel consumption (Solid/Liquid/Gas/Biomass, and others)
 Heat rate of different power sources and coal quality
 Miscellaneous data for normalisation
 Installation of additional equipment to protect the environment
 Project activity details
 Summary sheet
 Normalisation calculation sheets
DC enters production, energy, and normalization factors under equivalent conditions for
baseline and assessment years. GtG SEC is automatically calculated and displayed in a
summary sheet.
Form 1
Form 1 contains details of Information regarding total energy consumed, production, and
specific energy consumption per unit of production. The Designated Consumers themselves
have to update the information on the PATNet portal maintained by BEE. Form 1 is to be
submitted annually within 3 months before the completion of the financial year (i.e. 31st
March).
Form A
Form A is the Performance Assessment Document (PAD) prepared by the DCs in the
assessment year for monitoring and verification.
Form B
Form B is the certification of verification by EmAEA on completion of M&V study in the
assessment year.
Form C
Form C is the certification of cross-verification by EmAEA.
Other Forms to be submitted by DC under EC Act
Form2: Details of energy savings measures recommended in mandatory energy audit

report. This will be submitted to the SDA with a copy to BEE within specified period of time.
Form3: Details of energy efficiency improvement measures implemented, investment

made and savings in energy achieved and progress made. This will be will be submitted to
SDA with a copy to BEE within specified period of time.
Verification Report
The DC shall submit final verification report prepared by EmAEA enclosing verified annually
submitted Form 1, Sector Specific Pro-forma, Form A (Performance Assessment
35
Document), Form B, along with related authentic supporting documents.
Timelines and activities for a PAT cycle are shown in the Table 2.1
Table 2.1: Timelines and Activities for a PAT Cycle

Activity Time Description Activity Where
Line by
Action plan submission 3 months Within 3 month from Notification DC SDA/BEE
Form 1 submission 3 months Yearly submission of Form 1 within DC SDA/BEE

3 months from last financial year
Form A, Form B along 4 months Within 4 month from conclusion of DC SDA/BEE

with others documents target year
Submission of Form A, 45 days Within 45 days of the last date of SDA BEE
Form B with SDA submission of Form A
comments
Recommendation of Two Within two months from the date of BEE MoP
Issuance /entitlement months the receipt of the comments from
to purchase ESCerts SDA
to MoP, GOI
Issuance of ESCerts by 45 Days Within 45 days from the date of the MoP
MoP recommendation of Escerts from
BEE
Form D Submission One After 1 month from the completion DC SDA/BEE

month of trading
Check-points for EmAEA
The EmAEA shall carryout the following as part of monitoring and verification activities:
 Whether baseline production and energy related data are entered correctly in sector
specific Pro-Forma as per approved baseline report.
 Whether authentic supporting primary and secondary sources of data are available
 Whether site visits, interviews with relevant personnel are supporting the documented
findings
 Whether formulas and calculations are correctly applied in determining energy savings.
 Whether same boundary is considered for the entire PAT cycle including target year as
finalized for baseline year in the final baseline report (the plant boundary in the target
year should be same as established in the baseline year).
The SEC calculation methodology as devised in the sector specific Pro-Forma shall be
considered. For computing gate-to-gate SEC, the plant boundary is defined such that total
36
energy input and defined product output is fully represented. Typically, entire plant is
included excepting housing colony, residential complex, and transportation systems outside
the boundary. Similarly, mining operations in the case of iron and steel, aluminium, and
cement sectors are not considered under the plant boundary.
The baseline verified data shall be considered as the final data to be filled in the Sector
Specific Pro-forma. In case of any typographical or factual error in the baseline data, the
same shall be taken into account for preparing corrected versions during the verification,
subject to availability of authentic data made available by the DC. The corrected data is
taken into account while preparing verification certificate.
The various energy saving projects in quarterly, yearly, and end-of-cycle internal data
reports prepared by the designated consumer is verified. The review covers measures
adopted for energy conservation, quantum of energy saved, and investment made by the
designated consumer during the relevant PAT cycle.
The data submitted for verification and other figure for SEC calculation should match with
the plants’ declared production and consumption figures as per the statutory financial audit
declared in the statutory annual report.
Finally verification report containing summary of verification process, results of assessment

and unbiased opinion along with supporting documents is prepared.
2.6 Certification of Energy Savings
It is the process of certifying the verification report or the check-verification report by the
Empanelled Accredited Energy Auditor (EmEA) to the effect that the entitlement of energy
saving certificate is quantified accurately in relation to compliance with energy consumption
norms and standards by the designated consumer during the target year. The report is
reviewed by BEE before recommending the energy savings. The procedure for issuing of
EScerts is as follows:
• Central Government―after receiving recommendation from Bureau (BEE)  issue ESCerts

of desired value to DC within 45 days.
• ESCerts are issued in electronic form
• ESCerts issued in current cycle is valid till compliance period of next cycle.
• DCs who have been issued energy savings certificates may sell them through the power
exchange.
• ESCerts purchased by DC for compliance shall after their submission to Bureau stand
expired.
ESCerts Determination
ESCerts is issued to the eligible DC based on the following criteria:
No. of ESCerts = Production in Baseline Year x (SEC Base Year- SEC Target Year)
37
Sample Calculation:
Baseline year: 2014-15

Baseline SEC = 10 toe/unit of production
Baseline production = 10000 units
Target = 4% reduction in baseline SEC
Baseline SEC = 9.6 toe/unit of production
If achieved SEC = 9.8 toe/unit (unit has to buy 2000 EsCerts equivalent to 2000 (-) toe
If achieved SEC – 9.4 toe/unit (unit is awarded 2000 EsCerts equivalent to 2000 toe
2.7 Trading of ESCerts
For the trading of ESCerts, Central Electricity Regulatory Commission (CERC) is the Market
Regulator and BEE is the Administrator. Power System Operation Corporation Limited
(POSOCO) has been designated the role of Registry for Trading of ESCerts. Trading of
ESCerts takes place in two Power Exchanges i.e. IEX and PXIL.
The energy savings certificates (ESCerts) are being issued only in electronic form. The
value of one energy savings certificate shall be equal to one metric tonne of oil equivalent of
energy consumed. For trading of ESCerts no floor price or forbearance price has been
defined as the price of ESCerts is left to be discovered at the power exchanges.
Floor prices are lower bounds on price which can guarantee a minimum rate of return
while Forbearance prices are upper bounds which can lead to prices going very high and
consequently may burden consumers.
ESCerts shall be bought by DCs for compliance only, and after submission to BEE for
meeting the compliance it will stand expired. DCs can buy the ESCerts upto or more than
their compliance whereas seller DCs cannot buy ESCerts. DCs to whom the ESCerts are
issued can sell them at Power exchanges and balance ESCerts can be used for meeting
their compliance of next PAT cycle or be sold to any other DC for the compliance within the
validity period. The validity period for ESCerts issued during current cycle is till the
completion of the compliance period of respective DC’s next cycle.
Banking of ESCerts is allowed; ESCerts issued in any PAT Cycle remain valid till
the compliance period of the next immediate cycle.
CERC has issued the Procedure for Transaction of Energy Savings Certificates (ESCerts).
The key points are as follows:
a) Roles & responsibilities of Administrator, Registry, CERC and Power exchanges are
defined.
38
b) Market price of ESCerts shall be discovered through bidding at power exchanges i.e.
through closed double-sided uniform price auction.
c) Interested DCs to whom ESCerts have been either issued or are entitled to purchase by
Ministry of Power (MoP) have to first register themselves with ‘Registry’ i.e. POSOCO
to become eligible entity.
d) For trading in Power exchanges, DCs have to get themselves registered with any of the
Power exchanges.
The process flow for trading of ESCerts is illustrated in Figure 2.6.
Figure 2.6: Process Flow for ESCerts Trading
For trading of ESCerts, CERC approved the following fee structure:
 One time registration fee of Rs.15000/- for eligible entity

 ESCerts fee at the rate of Rs.5/- per ESCert for DCs issued with ESCerts
 Taxes and duties as applicable (GST @ 18%)
Stakeholders for EScerts Trading
Registry
Registry is the agency designated by Government of India in the Ministry of Power to
perform such functions as defined in these regulations with respect to ESCerts. National
Load Despatch Centre (NLDC) operating under Power System Operation Corporation
Limited (POSOCO) is the Registry for ESCerts. The roles of Registry include the following:
 Assistance in registrations process of ESCerts including crediting of ESCerts to DCs.

 Collection of fees and charges, as approved by the commission in consultation with
Bureau for the purpose of meeting the cost and expense towards the management of
Registry and software platform.
39
 Management of ESCerts trading/exchange.

 Coordination and information dissemination with DCs, Power Exchanges, BEE and
Commission.
 Assistance in development of IT platform along with guidance on hardware infrastructure
for maintaining database of ESCerts and records of trading of ESCerts.
Power Exchanges
The roles of Power Exchanges include the following:
 Formulate Rules and Bye Laws for Transaction of ESCerts on PX .

 Develop IT Platform compatible with the PAT-Net portal and D-
CRM for online transaction (trading of ESCerts).
 Permit trading of ESCerts only to the Eligible Entities.
 Send reports for Transaction confirmation pay-in and payout for Executed
Transaction.
 Issue Purchase Certificate to the Buyers.
 Display ESCerts demand supply curves on the website
Exchange of ESCerts shall be in compliance with the rules and bye laws of respective Power
Exchanges. Before trading, all eligible entities who intend to participate in the exchange of
ESCerts shallregister themselves with the Power Exchange.Eligibility Entity can exchange
the ESCerts either directly on a Power Exchange or through a Member of a Power
Exchange.
The various stakeholders’ roles in dealing of ESCerts are summarised as follows:

 Issuance of ESCerts  Ministry of Power
 Registration of DCs  Registry (NLDC, POSOCO)
 Trading of ESCerts – Power Exchanges
 Facilitation of trading of ESCerts  Registry
 Updation of accounts of DCs  Registry
 DC submit ESCerts for compliance – Bureau of Energy Efficiency
 Extinguishment of ESCerts- Registry
 Database of ESCerts / Banked ESCerts  Registry
2.8 Check Verification
The BEE may on its own or on receipt of a complaint within one year from the date of
submission of compliance report (Form D) shall initiate check-verification of any DC.
The process of check verification is illustrated in Figure 2.7.

40
Figure 2.7: Process of Check Verification

Obligations of the Empanelled Accredited Energy Auditor:
1. For verification or check verification, the accredited energy auditor shall constitute a
team comprising a team leader and other members including Process Experts:
 Provided that a person, who was in the employment of a designated consumer
within the previous four years, shall not be eligible to perform the work of
verification or check-verification for such a designated consumer;
 Provided that any person or firm or company or other legal entity, who was
involved in undertaking energy audit in any of the designated consumer within
the previous four years, shall not be eligible to perform the work of verification
or check-verification for such a designated consumer
2. The accredited energy auditor shall ensure that persons selected as team leader
and team members must be independent, impartial and free of potential conflict of
interest in relation to activities likely to be assigned to them for verification or check-
verification.
3. The accredited energy auditor shall have formal contractual conditions to ensure
that each team member of verification and check-verification teams and technical
experts act in an impartial and independent manner and free of potential conflict of
interest.
4. The accredited energy auditor shall ensure that the team leader, team members and
experts prior to accepting the assignment inform him/her about any known, existing,
former or envisaged link to the activities likely to be undertaken by them regarding
verification and check verification.
41
5. The accredited energy auditor must have documented system for determining the
technical or financial competence needed to carry out the functions of verification
and check-verification and in determining the capability of the persons, the
accredited energy auditor shall consider and record among other things the
following:
a) complexity of the activities likely to be undertaken;
b) risks associated with each project activity;
c) technological and regulatory aspects;
d) size and location of the designated consumer;
e) type and amount of field work necessary for the verification or check-
verification.
6. The accredited energy auditor shall have a documented system for preparing the
plan for verification or check-verification functions and that plan shall contain all the
tasks required to be carried out for each type of activity, in terms of man days in
respect of designated consumers for the purpose of verification and check-
verification.
7. The accredited energy auditor shall provide in advance the names of the verification
or check-verification team members and their biodata to the designated consumer
concerned.
8. The accredited energy auditor shall provide the verification or check-verification

team with the relevant working documents indicating their full responsibilities with
intimation to the designated consumer.
9. The accredited energy auditor shall have documented procedures for the following:
a) to integrate all aspects of verification or check-verification functions;
b) for dealing with the situations in which an activity undertaken for the purpose of
compliance with the energy consumption norms and standards or issue of
energy savings certificate shall not be acceptable as an activity for the said
purposes.
10. The accredited energy auditor shall conduct independent review of the opinion of
verification or check-verification team and shall form an independent opinion and
give necessary directions to the said team if required.
11. In preparing the verification and check-verification reports, the accredited energy
auditor shall ensure transparency, independence and safeguard against conflict of
interest.
12. The accredited energy auditor shall ensure the confidentiality of all information and
data obtained or created during the verification or check verification report.
42
13. In assessing compliance with energy consumption norms and standards and issue
of energy saving certificates, the accredited energy auditor shall follow the
provisions of the Act, rules and regulations made thereunder.
14. After completion of the verification or check-verification, the accredited energy

auditor shall submit the verification (in Form-“B”) or check-verification report,
together with the certificate in Form-‘C’, to the Bureau.
2.9 Enforcement of Compliance to PAT
Enforcement under PAT is spelled in under the Section 26 (1A). The guiding clause states:
“If any person fails to comply with the provisions of the clause (n) of section 14, he shall be
liable to a penalty which shall not exceed ten lakh rupees and, in the case of continuing
failure, with an additional penalty which shall not be less than the price of every metric ton
of oil equivalent of energy, prescribed under this Act, that is I excess of the prescribed
norms.” The development of adjudication framework is under progress.
2.10 PAT Development
PAT-1 Achievement
PAT Cycle-I (201215) was envisaged to reduce the SEC of 478 designated consumers
(DCs) from eight energy intensive sectors viz. Aluminium, Cement, Chlor Alkali, Fertilizer,
Iron & Steel, Paper & Pulp, Thermal Power Plant and Textile. The baseline period was
considered as average of three years namely 200708, 200809, 200910. The
Assessment year was 201415 and M&V period was from AprilJune, 2015.
The first cycle of PAT was completed in March 2015. Subsequently, verification of the
performance of DCs with regard to energy savings took place and based on
recommendations made by BEE, the Ministry of Power issued 38.24 lakhs ESCerts to 309
DCs in Feb 2017. DCs (110 nos) have been entitled to purchase 14.23 lakhs ESCerts to
meet the shortfall to meet energy saving targets.
PAT-I cycle has achieved an energy saving of 8.67 million tonne of oil equivalent (MTOE)
against the targeted energy saving of 6.886 MTOE which is about 30% more than the
target.
All the sectors except thermal power plant surpassed the targets. The energy saving is
equivalent to 31 million tonnes of CO2 emission reduction and monetary savings of INR
95.09 billion which encouraged investment of INR 261 billion for energy efficient
technologies were the highlights. The foundation for PAT-1 was laid with capacity building
of 13718 certified energy Auditors and Managers which include 219 accredited energy
43
auditors and 53 Empanelled Accredited Energy Auditors The Table 2.2 summarizes the
achievements of PATI.
Table 2.2: PAT Cycle-I (2012-13 to 2014-15)

S. No. of Target Reduction Savings
Sectors % Increase
No. DCs (MTOE) (MTOE)
1 Aluminium 10 0.46 0.73 59%
2 Cement 75 0.82 1.44 76
3 Chlor- Alkali 22 0.05 0.13 100
4 Fertilizer 29 0.48 0.83 73
5 Iron & Steel 60 1.49 2.10 41
6 Paper & Pulp 26 0.12 0.26 117
7 Textile 82 0.07 0.12 71

Thermal
8 123 3.21 3.06 -5%
Power Plant
Total 427 6.69 8.67 29%
PAT Cycle II Update

After completion of PAT Cycle –I, PAT Scheme was expanded by carrying out Widening
and Deepening study.
Widening of PAT
PAT scheme was widened by including three new sectors i.e. Railways, Refinery and
DISCOMs. A total of 84 DCs were notified in PAT cycle –II as a result of widening of the
scheme. .
Deepening of PAT
Deepening of PAT scheme was carried out by identifying new DCs from existing sectors of
PAT scheme. As a result of deepening of PAT, 89 DCs were notified under PAT cycle –II.
PAT Cycle –II has been notified in March 2016 in which 621 DCs from 11 sectors have
been notified with a target reduction of 8.869 MTOE. . The breakup of 621 DCs notified in
PAT cycle –II is as follows:
1. Existing DCs of PAT Cycle –I : 448

2. New DCs from existing 8 sectors of PAT: 89
3. DCs from new sectors i.e. Railway, Refinery and DISCOM: 84
44
The details of DCs in each sector with widening and deepening of PAT are shown in the
Table 2.3.
Table 2.3: Details of DCs in PAT-II (2016-2019)
S. Sector No. of DCs in Additional DC Total no. of

No PAT I in PAT Cycle-II DCs PAT -2
1 Aluminium 10 2 12
2 Chlor-Alkali 22 3 24
3 Textile 90 14 99
4 Pulp & Paper 31 4 29
5 Iron & Steel 67 9 71
6 Fertilizer 29 8 37
7 Cement 85 27 111
8 Thermal Power Plants 144 22 154
9 Refinery NA 18 18
10 DISCOMS NA 44 44
11 Railway NA 22 22
Total 621
Railways
All zonal railways with annual energy consumption for traction of 70,000 TOE per year and
above and Workshop/Production units with annual energy consumption of 30,000 TOE or above
are included as DCs. The specific energy/fuel consumption norms of electric & diesel traction
have been considered for setting up the target for reduction as shown in Table 2.4.
Zonal Railways: Each zonal railway provides transport services for both passenger and
goods. The energy input for the mentioned services is in the form of diesel or electricity.
Specific fuel consumption or specific energy consumption for a specific service (passenger
or goods), is calculated by dividing the total amount of fuel input in liters or kWh by the total
gross tonne kilometrage for the respective service.
Table 2.4: SEC Norms for Electric /Diesel Traction of Zonal Railways
Diesel Electrical
Passenger Goods Passenger Goods
Litres/1000GTkm Litres/1000GTkm kWh/1000GTkm kWh/1000GTkm
GTkm- Gross Tonne kilometres
Production Units/Workshops: Production units of Indian Railways manufacture a variety of

products like locomotives, coaches, wheels axles etc. If more than one variety of product is
45
manufactured under the same category (say AC coach and non AC coach), equalized
number of units will be considered to calculate SEC.
For Production Units, metric considered is energy consumption per unit of production
(locomotives, coaches, wheels etc.). All the energy consumption will be converted into
toe and metric will be KgOE /unit of production.
Electricity Distribution Companies (DISCOMs)

Energy losses occur in the process of supplying electricity to consumers due to technical
and commercial reasons. Technical losses are due to energy dissipated in the conductors,
transformers and other equipment used for transmission, transformation, sub-transmission
and distribution of power. Although, inherent in the system, technical losses can be reduced
to a certain level.
Pilferage of electricity by hooking, bypassing meters, defective meters, errors in meter

reading and in estimating un-metered supply of electricity are included as Commercial
losses. When Commercial losses are added to Technical losses, it is called Transmission &
Distribution (T&D) losses
T&D losses across India average about 25% and they can reach up to 50% in some
areas This means that half of electricity being generated either never reaches an end-
user or is used but never paid for.
There is another component of Commercial losses, which is attributable to non-recovery of

the billed amount, which is reflected in collection efficiency. This loss represents shortage
due to non-realization of billed amount.
T&D losses together with loss in collection are called Aggregate Technical & Commercial
(AT&C) losses.
T&D loss is the parameter chosen for reduction; DISCOMs with annual AT&C
losses of 1000 MU/86000 TOE and above are included as DCs.
Refinery
Petroleum refinery is a vital industry which assumes significant strategic importance in Indian
economy. India is one of the largest consumer of oil and petroleum products in the world. To
meet the growing demand of petroleum products, the refining capacity in the country has
gradually increased over the years by setting up of new refineries in the country as well as
by expanding the refining capacity of the existing refineries. There are a total of 23 refineries
in the country comprising 18 in the Public Sector, 3 in the Private Sector and 2 as joint
ventures. The total refinery capacity as on 1st April 2015 was 215.066 MMTPA.
46
Petroleum Refinery sector is one of the important energy intensive sector covered in PAT
cycle-II. In order to induce the energy conservation in the refinery sector, refineries having
energy consumption of 90,000 Metric Tonne of Oil Equivalent (MTOE) and above are
notified as Designated Consumers and included in PAT Cycle-II. Total 18 refinery units are
notified as Designated Consumers under PAT cycle-II with an overall sectoral energy
reduction target of 5.97%. The target for Petroleum Refinery sector is 1.10 Million Metric
Tonne of Oil Equivalent.
In Petroleum Refinery sector, the process includes up gradation of undesirable components

of the crude oil into more valuable products, such as gasoline, diesel, and jet fuel and other
low value by-products, such as fuel oils and lubricants. Specific energy consumption is not
an appropriate indicator of the energy performance of the refineries as it does not account
for differences in complexities, output slates, or type of crude processed. Thus, the energy
performance of refineries is expressed in terms of specific energy consumption, measured in
thousand British Thermal Units (BTU) per barrel per Energy Factor (MTBU/BBL/NRGF). This
unit, commonly referred to as MBN, was developed by the Centre for High Technology,
Ministry of Petroleum & Natural Gas to provide a basis for comparing energy performance of
refineries of different configurations and accounting of the throughput of secondary units.
The NRG factor (NRGF) is the indicator of the level of complexity of a refinery.
PAT Cycle III
Rolling Cycle
From PAT III (1st April, 2017 onwards), PAT scheme is being implemented on a rolling cycle
basis and new DCs/sectors are being included every year.
PAT III seeks to achieve overall energy consumption reduction of 1.06 MTOE for which SEC
reduction targets have been assigned to 116 Designated Consumers from six sectors viz.
Thermal Power Plant, Cement, Aluminium, Pulp & Paper, Iron & Steel and Textile. The
energy consumption of these DCs is 34.17 MTOE (Table 2.5).
47
Table 2.5: Targets for PAT-III (2017-2020)
S. Sector No of DCs Energy Consumption Energy Savings

No (MTOE) Target (MTOE)
1 Thermal Power Plant 37 23.82 0.402
2 Cement 14 1.74 0.096
3 Aluminium 1 1.02 0.061
4 Pulp & Paper 1 0.06 0.003
5 Iron & Steel 29 6.860 0.409
6 Textile 34 0.668 0.040
Total 116 34.17 1.06
PAT Cycle IV
The Notification for PAT cycle -IV was issued in March, 2018 and commenced from 1st April,
2018 onwards and it included two new sectors namely commercial buildings (Hotels37
nos), Petrochemical sector (8 nos) in addition to new DCs in existing sectors. The duration of
PAT cycle–IV will be from 2018-19 to 2020-21. With PAT IV, number of DCs covered under
all PAT cycles has increased to 846 with additional 109 as shown in Table 2.6.
Table 2.6: No. of DCs Covered in PAT Cycles II, III, and IV
Sector DCs in PAT DCs in PAT DCs in PAT Total

Cycle II Cycle III Cycle IV DCs
(2016-19) (2017-20) (2018-21)
Aluminium 12 1 - 13
Cement 111 14 1 126
Chlor-alkali 24 - 2 26
Fertiliser 37 - - 37
Iron and Steel 71 29 35 135
Pulp and paper 29 1 2 32
Textile 99 34 7 140
Thermal power 154 37 17 208
Zonal railways 22 - - 22
Refineries 18 - - 18
Discoms 44 - - 44
Commercial buildings 1 - 37 37
(hotels)
Petrochemicals 1 - 8 8
Total 621 116 109 846
Source: BEE
48
For petrochemical sector, the metric proposed is

toe/ton of product.
For commercial building, buildings used around the clock (24 hours) are being considered.
The PAT cycle IV is from 2018-19 to 2020-21. GtG for building excludes basement parking
area (Figure 2.8). The metric proposed for commercial building is as follows:
For commercial building, the metric proposed is

Net Input Energy in toe
Net Built-up area excluding basement parking area in (‘000 m2)
Input Net Energy: Fuel and Power in tonnes of oil equivalent
Figure 2.8: GtG for Building

49
3. KEY THRUST AREAS OF ENERGY CONSERVATION ACT, 2001
3.1 Introduction
The various provisions of Energy Conservation Act, 2001 are discussed in detail in BEE
guide books. It may be noted that Perform, Achieve and Trade (PAT) is covered in Chapter-
2.The coverage in this chapter is limited to other key areas of The Energy Conservation Act,
2011 namely Standard & Labelling, Star Rating for Buildings, and the Energy Conservation
Building Code (ECBC).
3.2 Standard & Labelling
There is a wide variation in energy consumption of the same products by different

manufacturers. Information on energy consumption is often not easily available nor sufficient
or easy to understand from the nameplate affixed on product leading to continued
manufacture and purchase of inefficient appliances and equipment. For example, a
consumer may be aware of choosing 18 W compact fluorescent light bulbs over 60 W
incandescent bulbs. But wattage is no substitute for the information that an energy label can
provide namely lumen output and product life. Such information is not readily available to
consumers unless it is included on a product label.
Consumer’s purchase decisions are largely driven by the cost of owning the appliance
(paid at the time of purchase) and they tend to overlook the cost of using the appliance
(paid over its lifetime through the electricity bill). Once consumers are informed about the
future benefits, they are more likely to take more rational decision.
In order to provide consumer with this information, Bureau of Energy Efficiency introduced
the Standards and Labelling (S&L) Program in 2006 to provide the consumer an informed
choice about the energy saving and thereby cost saving potential of the marketed product.
Energy ‘labelling’ is one of the most cost effective policy tools for improving energy efficiency
and lowering energy cost of appliances/equipment for the consumers. The energy efficiency
labelling programs under BEE are intended to reduce the energy consumption of appliance
without affecting the services it provides to consumers.
Implementation of S&L is expected to produce large energy savings, limiting energy growth
of the country without affecting economic growthreduced Investment in energy supply
infrastructure. Such energy savings are generally assured and verified. Low energy-
efficiency products are excluded from the market and consumers are benefitted in terms of
cost savings as well as getting better quality products.
50
3.2.1 Standard
Energy-efficiency standards are procedures and regulations that prescribe limits on the
energy consumption (or minimum levels of the energy efficiency) of manufactured products.
Intention is to prohibit the sale of products that are less energy efficient than the minimum
prescribed standards, called as Minimum Energy Performance Standards (MEPS). Well-
defined test protocols ensures sufficiently accurate estimate of MEPS.
By setting minimum energy performance levels or minimum required levels of quality,

benefits are as follows:
 Increased average efficiency or quality of products on the market

 Reduced energy costs
 Reduced greenhouse gas emissions
 Protected consumers
 Improved market efficacy & competition
3.2.2 Label
Energy-efficiency labels are information affixed to manufactured products and usually

communicate the product energy performance (usually in terms of efficiency as compared to
similar products, energy cost to run the appliance, emissions etc.). Labels inform smart
choices on the best products to consumers. They also make it easier for utility companies,
government energy agencies, and others to procure in bulk or offer consumers incentives to
buy energy-efficient and high quality products. To help the best products stand out, labels:
 Recognize best products

 Describe product performance & quality
 Promote competition & innovation
The labels provide visually information about EE standards to the consumers. EE labels can
either give detailed information about a product’s energy performance, or simply indicate that
a product has met certain energy performance.
Endorsement Labels
The purpose of endorsement labelling is to indicate clearly to
the consumer that the labelled product saves energy compared
to other similar products in the market. They are essentially
seals of approval given according to specified criteria (Figure
3.1).
This helps customer to make wise decision to choose most

efficient products. Such labels also encourage industries to
develop and produce high efficiency and quality products. The
Figure 3.1: Endorsement
products having endorsement label will have stronger Label (Laptops)
51
competiveness in the market. Endorsement labelling programs are inherently voluntary since
they do not seek to eliminate the least efficient products from the market.
Comparative Labels
Comparative labels allow consumers to compare performance among similar products using
either discrete categories of performance or a continuous scale. The use of comparative
labels can motivate manufacturers to build products that are more efficient or of a higher
quality than those already on the market. Examples of comparative labels for air
conditioners, LED lamps, and colour television are shown in Figure 3.2.
Endorsement Labels Comparative Labels

Provide ‘certification’ to inform prospective Allow consumers to compare the energy
purchasers that the product is highly energy consumption of similar products, and factor
efficient for its category. lifetime running cost into their purchasing
decision.
Endorsement labels can be standalone or Show relative energy use of a product compared
integrated and shown on comparative labels. to other models available in the market.
Sample Label for Air Conditioners Sample Label for LED lamps
Sample Label for Colour Television

Figure 3.2: Examples of Comparative Labels
52
Taken together, standards and labels shift global markets to the highest quality, and lowest
impact appliances. Standards drive inappropriate products from the market, protect
consumers and provides level playing field for manufacturers, distributors, and procurers.
Labels draw consumers and other buyers to the best and most innovative products.
The energy efficiency labelling programs under BEE are intended to reduce the energy
consumption of appliance without affecting the services it provides to consumers. The BEE
S&L scheme is invoked for 21 equipment/appliances including 10 for which it is mandatory.
The other appliances are presently under voluntary labelling phase. The star labelling
program for 22nd appliance i.e. Chillers has been launched on voluntary basis recently in the
month of September, 2018.
Products notified under mandatory labelling

As of September 2018, the following products have been notified under mandatory labelling:
1. Frost Free (no-Frost) Refrigerators 6. Direct Cool Refrigerators

2. Tubular Fluorescent Lamps 7. Electric Geysers
3. Room Air Conditioners 8. Color TV
4. Distribution Transformers 9. Room Air Conditioners (Inverter type)
5. Room Air Conditioners (Cassette, Floor 10. LED lamps
Standing Tower, Ceiling, Corner AC)
For example, label information for a refrigerator contains the following information (Figure
3.3):
Figure 3.3: Label Information for a Refrigerator

53
Products under voluntary labelling

As on September 2018, the following products have been notified under voluntary labelling:
1. Induction Motors 7. Ballast (Electronic/Magnetic)

2. Agricultural pump sets 8. Office equipment's (Printer, Copier,
3. Ceiling fans Scanner)
4. Domestic Liquefied Petroleum Gas 9. Diesel Engine Driven Monoset Pumps for
(LPG) Stoves Agricultural Purposes
5. Washing machine (Presently BEE is in 10. Solid State Inventor
process of revising the program) 11. Diesel Generator
6. Computer (Notebook/Laptops) 12. Chillers
Future – Equipment/appliances proposed for Standards & Labelling
1. Microwave Ovens 6. DC based Lighting

2. Set top boxes 7. DC based Fans
3. Solar Photo Voltaic 8. DC based Television
4. Solar Water Heater 9. Mobile Phone Chargers
5. Solar Pumps
3.2.3 Energy Saving Calculation for Submersible Pump Set
Example:
Head 73 m
Discharge 6.67 lps, Stage= 7, Rating = 7.5 kW
BIS efficiency (i.e. 1 star efficiency) 43.66%
Power consumption (Baseline) (73 x 6.67 x 9.81)/ (1000 x (43.66/100)) = 11 kW
5 Star efficiency 1.2 x 43.66 = 52.39%
(Performance factor for 5 star rating = 1.2)
Power consumed by 5 star energy (73 x 6.67 x 9.81)/ (1000 x (52.39/100)) = 9 kW
efficient pump
Energy Saving (11-9) x 4 x 200 = 1600 kWh/year
Cost Saving (INR 5/unit) 1600 x 5 = INR 8000/year
54
Head Discharge Rating Power Power Energy

(meter) (lps) (kW) Consumption Consumption Saving
for 1 Star (kW) for 5 Star (kW) (kWh/year)
73 6.67 7.5 11 9 1600
122 6.6 13 17.5 14.5 2400
98 3.6 5.6 8.7 7.3 1120
Informed customers are likely to be motivated to buy products with 23 years payback
periods. Labeling seldom works if payback period for the product is more than 45 years
3.2.4 Star-label Upgradation
Star labelling program gets updated every year as the technology improves and more and
more efficient products are made available, the labels will accordingly adjust (Figure 3.4).
For example, an appliance manufactured in 2018 and rated five star will more efficient than a
five star rated similar appliance in 2017.
Figure 3.4: Example of Star level Upgradation under Star Labelling program
of Variable Speed Room Air Conditioners
3.3 Star Rating of Building
Energy audit studies in buildings have shown large potential for energy savings both in
government and commercial office buildings. The Bureau of Energy Efficiency has
developed a scheme for energy efficiency labeling of Buildings, in February 2009. The star
rating of building is aimed at accelerating energy efficiency activities in commercial buildings
across the country. The Star rating Programme would provide public recognition to energy
efficient buildings, thus creating a market demand for such buildings. This programme would
rate buildings on a 1-5 Star scale with 5 Star labelled buildings being the most efficient.
BEE Star Rating Scheme is based on actual performance of the building in terms of
specific energy usage termed as Energy Performance Indicator (EPI).
55
 Ratings apply to buildings with a connected load of 100 kW or a contract demand of 120
KVA, whichever is greater and are intended to be used for commercial purposes.
 The programme covers five categories of commercial buildingsoffice buildings, hotels,

hospitals, retail malls, and IT parks in four climate zones across the country.
 Buildings in climatic zones namely Warm and Humid, Composite, Hot and Dry,
Temperate regions are being currently rated.
 Criteria indicating EPI value and corresponding Star Label under the various climatic
zones (for buildings having air conditioned area greater than 50% of their built up area &
for buildings having air conditioned area less than 50% of their built up area) are referred
for assigning Star Label.
Office Building BPO

 EPI shall be kWh/sq.m/year in terms of EPI shall be Average Annual hourly
Purchased & Generated Electricity Energy Performance Index (AAhEPI) in
divided by Built up Area in sq.m. (Wh/hr/sq.m), which is Purchased &
Generated Electricity divided by Built up
 The total electricity should not include Area in sq.m and Total Annual Hours of
electricity generated from on-site Operation.
renewable sources such as solar
photovoltaic etc. The total electricity should not include
electricity generated from on-site renewable
sources such as solar photovoltaic etc.
Case study
A BPO building owner had applied for 5 star rating for its building having air conditioned area
greater than 50% located in warm & humid region. The verified Building Information and
Energy Data and Actual Average Annual hourly EPI (AAhEPI) in (Wh/hr/sq.m) was 34.18
(Table 3.1). The calculated value falls within bandwidth 3630 under Warm & Humid
category (Table 3.2) and the corresponding rating is 4 star. Therefore, The BPO building is
eligible for only 4 star rating.
56
Table 3.1: Verified Building Information and Energy Data for the BPO
Name of the Building: XXX City: Chennai
Building Information and Energy Data

Primary Data Year: 2018
No
Item Value
.
1 Connected Load (kW) or Contract Demand (kVA) 16000 KVA
2 Installed capacity: DG/ GG Sets (kVA or kW) 27200 kVA
a) Annual Electricity Consumption, purchased from Utilities (kWh) 57981450
b) Annual Electricity Consumption, through Diesel Generating (DG)/Gas
913482
Generating (GG) Set(s) ( kWh)
3
c) Annual Solar Consumption (Kwh) 1445224
58894932
d) Total Annual Electricity Consumption, Utilities + DG/GG Sets (kWh)*
a) Annual Cost of Electricity, purchased from Utilities (Rs.) 438775023
4 b) Annual Cost of Electricity generated through DG/GG Sets (Rs.) 12951964
c)Total Annual Electricity Cost, Utilities + DG/GG Sets (Rs.) 451726987
Area of the a) Built Up Area (sqm)(excluding Basement Area) 196646.29
building
5 (exclude o Conditioned Area(in s.qm.) 16980029
parking, lawn,
o Conditioned Area(as % of built up area) 86%
roads, etc.)
6 Working hours (e.g. day working /24 hour working) 24 hrs
7 Working days/week (e.g. 5/6/7 days per week) 7 days
Total no. of Employees 19827
8 a) Office Average .no. of Persons at any time in office during
16800
office hours
9 a) Installed capacity of Air Conditioning System (TR) 7550
10 Installed lighting load (kW) ( if available) 710
12 HSD (or any other fuel oil used, specify)/Gas Consumption in 277761 Lts.
DG/GG Sets (liters/cu. meters) in the year
13 Fuel (e.g. FO, LDO,LPG, NG) used for generating steam/water heating Nil
in the year (in appropriate units)
Average Annual hourly EPI (AAhEPI) in (Wh/hr/sqm) Energy includes
14 electricity purchased and generated ( excluding electricity generated 34.18
from on-site renewable resources)
15. Climate Zone Warm & Humid
16 Star Label applicable 4
 Excludes annual solar solar power consumption
I hereby declare that the building is fully occupied for the last one year and all the above
furnished information is true in all respect
-SD-
Signature of the BPO building owner or
Authorized representative
57
Table 3.2: Bandwidths for BPO Buildings for 4 Climatic Zones*
Average Annual hourly EPI (AAhEPI)

For buildings having air conditioned area greater than 50%)
Climatic Average Annual hourly EPI Star Rating

Zone AAhEPI
(Wh/hr/sq.m)
52 – 46 1 Star
46 – 40 2 Star
COMPOSITE 40 – 34 3 Star
34 – 28 4 Star
Below 28 5 Star

Zone AAhEPI
(Wh/hr/sq.m)
54 – 48 1 Star
48 – 42 2 Star
WARM &
42 – 36 3 Star
HUMID
36 – 30 4 Star
Below 30 5 Star

Zone AAhEPI
(Wh/hr/sq.m)
37 – 31 1 Star
31 – 25 2 Star
HOT &
25 – 19 3 Star
DRY
19 – 13 4 Star
Below 13 5 Star
Climatic Average Annual hourly EPI Star

Zone AAhEPI Rating
(Wh/hr/sq.m)
47 – 41 1 Star
41 – 35 2 Star
TEMPERATE 35 – 29 3 Star
29 – 23 4 Star
Below 23 5 Star
* Due to insufficient number of BPO buildings located in the cold climatic zone, the above table does
not include the cold region.
58
3.4 Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) for Non-Residential (Commercial)

Buildings
The building sector in India consumes over 30% of the total electricity consumed in the
country annually and is second only to the industrial sector as the largest emitter of
greenhouse gases. Building energy codes for new buildings are an important regulatory
measure for ushering energy efficiency in the building sector. They are particularly relevant
for countries like India where the building constructions are rising rapidly.
Considering the energy intensive nature of buildings, Ministry of Power, Bureau of Energy
Efficiency launched the ‘Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC)’ code in 2007. The
purpose of the Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) is to encourage energy efficient
design or retrofit of buildings so without affecting the building function, comfort, health, or the
productivity of the occupants with appropriate regard for economic considerations. ECBC
also addresses local design conditions and helps improve existing construction practices.
The emphasis of BEE is on Integrated Building Design approach. ECBC is also easy to use
and encourages continuous improvisations. The code was revised and updated in 2017 to
match with the technology developments to set higher benchmarks for energy efficiency.
ECBC has the potential to transform the way buildings are being constructed. Although
ECBC is applicable for buildings all over India, States have the authority to adapt and
mandate ECBC according to local requirements. ECBC is being adapted with minor
additions in different States and ECBC compliance is now mandatory. ECBC is also being
incorporated into local bye-laws and added to Urban Local Bodies (ULBs) building approval
process.
3.4.1 Impact of ECBC Compliance
Few of the benefits of ECBC are:

 Lower HVAC loads  reduced energy consumption and operational cost
 Lesser addition of power generation capacity better building performance
 Climate oriented design practice
 Improved lighting and extensive use of day lighting
 Use of natural ventilation/free-cooling systems
 Market demand for energy efficient products like glass, insulation, HVAC equipment etc.
3.4.2 Scope of ECBC (Commercial Buildings)
This code is now mandatory and applicable to buildings or building complexes that have a
connected load of 100 KW or a contract demand of 120 KVA, whichever is greater and are
intended to be used for commercial purposes.
ECBC also applies to addition and major renovation:

59
 Where the new connected load demand of the addition plus the existing building exceeds
100 kW or 120 kVA.
 When addition + existing building area > 1000 m2
 Renovated portions and systems of a 1000 m2 or larger building
The additions shall comply with the provisions of section 4 through 7 as per ECBC guideline.
Compliance may be demonstrated in either of the following ways:
1. The addition shall comply with the applicable requirements, or

2. The addition, together with the entire existing building, shall comply with the
requirements of this Code that shall apply to the entire building, as if it were a new
building.
3.4.3 Applicable Building Systems
This code addresses the minimum performance requirements in a commercial building

covering the following:
a) Building envelope refers to exterior façade, and is comprised of walls, windows,

roof, skylights, doors and other openings, The design
features of the envelope affects the visual and thermal
comfort of the occupants, as well as energy consumption of
the building.
b) Mechanical systems and Refers to Heating, Ventilation (natural, mechanical), Air
equipment, including Conditioning (cooling, dehumidification, humidification)
heating, ventilating, and
air conditioning, service
hot water heating
c) Interior and exterior Refers to Day Lighting, Glazing, Energy Efficient Lighting,
lighting Lighting Controls, Interior/Exterior lighting power
d) Electrical power and Refer to Efficient Transformers, High Efficiency Motors,
motors, and Renewable Power Factor controls, Power Distribution Losses (minimum)
energy systems Service Hot Water and Pumping
The provisions of this code do not apply to plug loads, and equipment and parts of buildings
that use energy for manufacturing processes, unless otherwise specified in the Code.
3.4.4 Building Classification
The following are the classifications of building as per ECBC:
 Hospitality: Star/non Star Hotels, Resorts

 Healthcare
 Assembly: Religious, Recreation, Social, Picture hall, Bus/Rail/Airports
 Business: Large >30000 sq.m, Medium:<30000-10000 Sq.m, small<10000 Sq.m
 Educational
60
 Shopping Complexes
 Mixed Building
3.4.5 Levels of Energy Efficiency Performance
The ECBC 2017 has incorporated advanced technologies and additional parameters related
to renewable energy integration, inclusion of passive design strategies, flexibility for the
designers and ease of compliance. The revised ECBC is one of the first building energy
codes to recognize beyond code performance. The code prescribes the following three
levels of energy efficiency: ECBC Buildings, ECBC+ Building, and SuperECBC Building.
The adherence to the minimum requirements stipulated for ECBC level of efficiency would
demonstrate compliance with the code. Other two efficiency levels namely ECBC+ and
SuperECBC are of voluntary nature. This feature was added to prepare the building industry
for meeting energy efficiency standards in coming years and give sufficient time to the
market to adapt.
ECBC Buildings shall demonstrate compliance by adopting the mandatory and prescriptive
requirements listed under ECBC Compliant Building requirements, or by following the
provisions of the Whole Building Performance (WBP) Method. An ECBC compliant new
building should be able to demonstrate minimum energy savings of 25% compared to a
conventional building.
ECBC+ Buildings shall demonstrate compliance by adopting the mandatory and

prescriptive requirements listed under ECBC+ Compliant Building requirements, or by
following the provisions of the Whole Building Performance (WBP) Method. ECBC+
Buildings should be able to demonstrate energy savings of 35% compared to a conventional
building.
SuperECBC Buildings shall demonstrate compliance by adopting the mandatory and

prescriptive requirements listed under SuperECBC Compliant Building requirements, or by
following the provisions of the Whole Building Performance (WBP) Method. SuperECBC
Buildings should be able to demonstrate energy savings of 50% compared to a conventional
building.
3.4.6 Energy Performance
Energy Performance Index

The Energy Performance Index (EPI) of a building is its annual energy consumption in
kilowatt-hours per square meter of the building. While calculating the EPI of a building, the
area of unconditioned basements is excluded.
61
EPI Ratio
The EPI Ratio of a building is the ratio of the EPI of the Proposed Building to the EPI of the
Standard Building:
Where,
Proposed Building is consistent with the actual design of the building, and complies with all
the mandatory requirements of ECBC.
Standard Building is a standardized building that has the same building floor area, gross wall
area and gross roof area as the Proposed Building, complies with the mandatory
requirements, and minimally complies with prescriptive requirements for ECBC Buildings.
3.4.7 ECBC Compliance Approaches & Methods
Two approaches towards ECBC compliance are (a) Prescriptive Method, and (b) Whole
Building Performance Method are illustrated in Figure 3.5.
Figure 3.5: ECBC-Compliance Approach
(a) Prescriptive Method

A building complies with the Code using the Prescriptive Method if it meets the prescribed
minimum (or maximum) values for envelope components, comfort systems and controls, and
lighting and controls, in addition to meeting all the mandatory requirements.
62
Under Prescriptive Approach, each building/system component should have specific

performance value. This approach requires little energy expertise; provides minimum
performance requirements and allows no flexibility.
ECBC Buildings that demonstrate compliance through Prescriptive Method shall be

considered to have an EPI equal to the Standard Building EPI, and therefore an EPI Ratio of
1.
It shall also comply with mandatory measures (Sections 4.2, 5.2, 6.2, 7.2 and 8.2) as well as
prescriptive requirement (Section 4.3 or 4.4, 5.3 & 7.3)
The EPI Ratio for ECBC+ and SuperECBC Buildings shall be equal to or less than the EPI
ratios listed under the applicable climate zone in the Code.
(b) Trade-off Method (for Building Envelope ONLY)

Building Envelope Trade-off Method may be used in place of the prescriptive criteria of the
code. A building complies with the Code using the Building Envelope Trade-off Method if the
Envelope Performance Factor (EPF) of the Proposed Building is less than or equal to the
EPF of the Standard Building, in addition to meeting the prescriptive requirements for
comfort systems and controls, and lighting and controls, and all the mandatory requirements.
Under Trade Off method, component performance value can be less but overall
performance of the envelope complies with ECBC. It allows some flexibility through the
balance of some high efficiency components with other lower efficiency components
• Allows some flexibility through the balance of some high efficiency components with
(c) Whole Building Performance Method
other lower efficiency components
A building complies with the Code using the Whole Building Performance (WBP) Method
when the estimated annual energy use of the Proposed Design is less than that of the
Standard Design, even though it may not comply with the specific provisions of the
prescriptive requirements. However, the mandatory requirements of the code (Sections 4.2,
5.2, 6.2, 7.2 and 8.2 of the ECBC) and specific requirements stated in section 10 shall have
to be met.
This approach allows flexibility in meeting or exceeding energy efficiency requirements

by optimizing system interactions. It requires component and systems modelling:
envelope, lighting, HVAC and for physical processes such as day lighting, heat-flow,
airflow.
The EPI of buildings that demonstrate compliance through Whole Building Performance
Method shall be calculated using the compliance path defined in the code. The EPI Ratio of
a building that uses the Whole Building Performance Method to show compliance, should be
less than or equal to the EPI Ratio for the applicable building type and climate zone of the
63
code. A building following this approach shall show compliance through a whole building
energy simulation software that has been approved by BEE.
Whole Building Energy Simulation involves predicting energy consumption using

software taking into consideration building shape, climate, heat loads, equipment
efficiencies etc. Based on hourly calculation of energy consumption, annual energy
consumption is determined.
3.4.8 Case Study of an ECBC-compliant Building
Project function: Hospitality sector (162 regular rooms and 40 VIP rooms)
Built-up area: 19,875 m2
Number of storeys: Ground + 7 storeys and one basement for parking
Conditioned area: 9,405 m2 (48% of the built-up area)
Energy Performance Index (EPI) 97 kWh/m2/year
before adopting ECBC:
EPI after adopting ECBC: 62 kWh/m2/year
ECBC-compliant strategies considered:
 Building Envelope: Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) cavity wall, Overdeck Extruded
Polystyrene (XPS) insulation, Heat reflective tiles, Recessed windows, High performance
glazing, Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) window frame
 Lighting: Daylight integration, LED lighting fixtures for interior and exterior lighting
 HVAC: Air-cooled Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system
 Electric Power: BEE star rated oil based transformer, Automatic Power factor correction
panel
 Service hot water: 25% of the hot water requirement is met by Solar Water Heaters
Cost Details:
 Overall Project Construction  Additional Cost: INR 2,28,86,125
Cost : INR 80 crores  Meeting ECBC Mandatory Provisions: INR
60,00,000
 Building Envelope: INR 47,64,045
 Lighting: INR 1,09,00,555
 HVAC: INR 10,000
 Service Hot Water: INR 9,61,525
 Electrical Power: INR 2,50,000
 Reduced cost due to optimised design and reduced sizing for lighting, HVAC, transformer
and power back-up, etc.: INR 68,70,000
 Incremental Cost: INR 1,60,16,125 (2% of the project construction cost)
 Payback Period: 3.8 years [INR 1,60,16,125/[(35 kWh/m2.year*19,875 m2 * INR 6/kWh)]
 570 tCO2 per year.
64
Remarks:
 A significant part of the incremental cost in implementation of ECBC-compliant building
gets compensated against the optimized design and reduced sizing for lighting, HVAC,
transformer and power, back-up etc.
 ECBC-compliant demonstration projects also show 30–40% energy savings compared to
conventional buildings and through energy savings during operation, the incremental cost
can be recovered within 3–4 years.
3.5 Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) for Residential Buildings
ECBC for residential buildings is being launched to help reduce domestic energy
consumption. Energy Conservation Building Code (Part I: Building Envelope Design) has
been prepared to set minimum building envelope performance standards to limit heat gains
(for hot climates) and to limit heat loss (for cold climate) as well as for ensuring adequate
natural ventilation and day lighting. The code is applicable to all residential use building
projects built on plot area ≥ 250 m2.
The Part I – Building Envelope Design, is the first component of the Energy Conservation
Building Code for Residential Buildings to be launched. Its introduction is to improve the
construction and design of new residential building stock, as it is being built currently and in
the near future, to significantly curtail the anticipated energy demand for comfort cooling in
times to come. This critical investment in envelope construction and design made today will
reap benefits in terms of reduced energy consumption and thereby operational costs for
owners and tenants during the lifetime of the buildings.
The code is designed in a simple-to-apply format, requiring only arithmetic tabulation based
on the architectural design drawings of the residential buildings. This will be usable by
architects as well as engineers and will not require any specialized skills or simulation
softwares. This also enables the Code to be readily adopted in the Building Byelaws and
regulatory instruments such as Environmental Clearance for Large Projects.
In the coming years, new components will be added to the Energy Conservation Building
Code for Residential Buildings, which will address other aspects such as, Energy Efficiency
in Electro-Mechanical Equipment for Building Operation, Renewable Energy Generation,
Embodied Energy of Walling Materials and Structural Systems.
3.5.1 Scope of the ECBC (Residential)
The code aims at limiting heat gains/loss from building envelope and for ensuring adequate
natural ventilation and day lighting.
To limit the heat gain/loss from the building envelope, the code specifies:
65
• Maximum value of Residential Envelope Transmittance Value (RETV) for building

envelope (except roof) applicable for four climate zones, viz. Composite Climate, Hot
and dry Climate, Warm-humid Climate and Temperate Climate.
• Maximum value of thermal transmittance of building envelope (except roof) for Cold
Climate zone (UEnvelope,cold)
• Maximum value of thermal transmittance of roof (U ) for all climate zones
To ensure adequate natural ventilation, the code specifies
• Minimum Openable window-to-floor area ratio (WFRop)
To ensure adequate day-lighting, the code specifies
• Minimum Visible Light Transmittance (VLT) for the non-opaque building envelope
components
The code is applicable to all residential use building projects built on plot area ≥ 250 m2. The
type of building projects includes, but not limited to:
• Group housing projects: Building unit or units constructed or to be constructed with one
or more floors having more than two dwelling units having common service facilities
where land is shared and commonly used by the dwelling units, and the construction is
undertaken by one agency.
• Mixed Land Use Building projects: With buildings partly used for non-residential uses
and partly for residential use.
• Multi-dwelling unit building on residential plots

66
4. ENERGY EFFICIENCY DATA ANALYTICS
4.1 Purpose and Background
This chapter serves as an introduction to the concept and principles of Energy Efficiency
Data Analytics and its implementation in Indian industry. With potential energy savings
ranging from 1530% in a typical industrial plant, the chapter presents the tools to inform the
design of a plant level energy efficiency program based on realistic energy saving targets.
Specifically it outlines the importance of data analytics to benchmark performance to enable
the design and implementation of industrial energy efficiency programs.
The application of GAP analysis for the key energy intensive industries and comparisons
between specific energy consumption (SEC) of Indian industries with global averages and
best available technology (BAT) is examined. However, the application of energy efficiency
data mining (e.g. Big Data), data modelling and advanced metering infrastructure is beyond
the scope of this introductory chapter.
4.2 Energy Productivity Indicators
Energy efficiency indicators are key requirement for setting targets and supporting decision
makers in establishing energy policies and strategies that are essential in tracking progress.
The International Energy Agency (IEA) uses a pyramid of energy productivity (EP) indicators
ranging from Economic Scale indicators (GDP/TFC), through sector, sub-sector and industry
(specific energy consumption). These indicators can be classified under various levels as
shown in Figure 4.1
Level 1: Economy level aggregate EP indicators defined as the ratio of GDP to National
Energy Consumption (defined as domestic energy production + energy imports – energy
exports).
Level 2: Sector level EP disaggregated indicators defined as the ratio of sector value
addition to energy consumed by the sector
Level 3: Sub-sector level disaggregated EP indicators defined as the sub sector value
addition to energy consumed by the sub-sector.
Level 4: Plant level energy efficiency indicators defined as the plant energy consumption
divided by the plant output. EE indicators can be further disaggregated to define specific
energy consumption by a department or system or equipment in the plant.
67
Figure 4.1: Energy Productivity Indicators

Source: Adapted from IEA energy indicators pyramid
4.3 Energy Efficiency Performance Indicators for Industries
The industrial sector is complex and heterogeneous and covers wide range from
manufacture of finished goods and products, mining of raw materials, and construction. For
the purpose of developing energy efficiency indicators in this chapter, industry refers to the
manufacturing sectors covering iron & steel, chemicals & petrochemicals, and cement. The
various levels of EE performance indicators for industries are illustrated in Figure 4.2 and
details are given in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1: Energy Efficiency Performance Indicators1 for Indian Industry
Sector/sub- Coverage Typical Energy Data Output Data EE Performance

sector Process Indicator
Energy End-
Use
All Industry Sub-sectors Heating Total industry Industry value Level 1

Iron & Steel Lighting sector energy added Total industry energy
Fertilizers Cooling consumption consumption per total
Chemicals & Motive power industry value added
Petrochemic (pumps, fans,
als blowers, Total sub- Sub-sectoral Level 2
Cement dryers, sector energy economic Sub-sectoral energy
Aluminum compressors, consumption consumption per unit of
conveyors etc) (value added) sub-sectoral physical
or physical output
Electrolysis
output
Iron & Steel Basic Heating Plant energy Plant Level 3

Oxygen Motive power consumption manufactured Process/product energy
Process output consumption per unit of
1
Also referred to as energy intensity or specific energy consumption (SEC) in industry.
68
(BOF) Lighting physical output

Electric Arc
Furnace
(EAF) Dept. or Dept/section Level 4
section or physical output Plant specific energy
equipment consumption at a
Direct energy department/section/equi
Reduction consumption pment level
Iron (DRI)
Chemicals & Ethylene Heating Plant energy Plant Level 3

Benzene, (distillation, consumption manufactured Process/product energy
Petrochemicals
Toluene, drying, output consumption per unit of
Xylene evaporation) physical output
(BTX) Motive power
Ammonia Lighting Dept. or Dept/section Level 4
Methanol Chillers section or Plant specific energy
physical output
Butadiene equipment consumption at a
energy department/section/equi
consumption pment level
Cement Clinker (wet Heating Plant energy Plant Level 3

(calcination, consumption manufactured Process/product energy
and dry);
drying) output consumption per unit of
Motive power physical output
Lighting
Dept. or Dept/section Level 4

section or physical output Plant specific energy
equipment consumption at a
energy department/section/
consumption equipment level
Figure 4.2: Pyramid of Energy Efficiency Performance Indicators for Industries
4.4 Benchmarking of Sectoral Energy Efficiency
Benchmarking is the process of accounting for and comparing a metered industrial facility’s
current energy performance with its energy baseline or with the energy performance of
similar types of industry. The United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO)
69
benchmarked the energy efficiency potential for 26 industrial sub-sectors globally by looking
at sector specific indicators of performance in terms of energy per unit of output (UNIDO
2010) (Table 4.2).
The study broke down the results in developing and developed countries and also presented
figures for the global average, the lowest found in the sample and the achievable
performance using Best Available Technology (BAT).
Table 4.2: Specific Energy Consumption in Industry – India and the World
Sectors Units Industrialized Developing Global Best Available India

Countries Countries Average Technology
Petroleum refineries Energy 0.7-0.8 1.3-3.8 1.25 1 0.9

(2003) Efficiency
Index (EEI)
High value(HVC) Gj/t HVC 12.6-18.3 17.1-18.3 16.9 10.6 17.1
Ammonia(2007) Gj/t NH3 33.2-36.2 35.9-46.5 41 23.5 37.5
Methanol(2006) GJ/tMeOH
33.7-35.8 33.6-40.2 35.1 28.8 40.2
Aluminium smelting MWh/t 14.8-15.8 14.6-15 15.5 13.4 16

(2007)
Alumina Production Gj/t alumina 10.9-15.5 10.5-24.5 16 7.4
Iron &steel (2005) EEI 1.16-1.4 1.4-2.2 1.45 1 1.55
Clinker (2007) Gj/t clinker 3.3-4.2 3.1-6.2 3.5 2.9 3.1

Cement (2 007) Gj/t cement 109-134 92-121 109 56 92
Lime Gj/t lime 3.6-13 5-13 - - 5.6
Glass (2005) Gj/t melt 4-10 6.8-7.8 6.5 3.4 6.8
Brickmaking (2000s) Mj/kg fired 1.5-3 0.75-11 - - 3-11
brick
Pulp and Paper EEI (heat & 0.93-1.73 0.43-2.29 1.31 1

electricity)
Textiles Ring yarn: Ring yarn: Ring yarn:

Spinning Gj/t yarn 3.5-3.6 3.5-3.6 - - 3.57
Open end: Other:
2.57 0.5-7.5 - - 2.5
Weaving Gj/t cloth 11-65 5-43 - - 27-32.4
Cast iron kWh/t melt Cupola:

950 780-850 520 780-900
Electric:
525-715
Cast/alloy steel kWh/t melt Electric:
525-715
Cast aluminium kWh/t melt Fuel-fired: 735
600-1250 735 500
Electric:
440-590 590 570
Cast copper kWh/t melt Electric:
400-1100 590 400 590
Source: Data drawn from Global Industrial Energy Efficiency Benchmarking – An Energy Policy Tool: Working Paper, UNIDO, Nov.
2010
70
4.5 Plant Energy Efficiency Data Analytics
Energy Performance Indicators (EnPIs) are an important tool for measuring the energy
efficiency of industrial processes and services. They provide inputs for developing energy
efficiency policies, establishing targets, assessing and calculating potential for energy
savings, and understanding past trends in energy use. In addition, they can also be used to
model and forecast future energy demand. A sound systemic approach to metering,
measurement, collecting, recording and analysing data is the foundation on which industrial
energy efficiency policies and target setting are established.
Energy efficiency data analytics performs a vital task of placing “facts on the table” which
enable industry corporates to design and implement energy savings programs and for policy
makers to formulate realistic plans. At the plant level these indicators are developed through
the deployment of Energy Information Management and Analytics System (EIMAS). At the
industry sub-sector level, they require the establishment of a cloud-based centralized energy
efficiency data repository (CEEDR) that integrates the EIMAS of participating companies to
provide EnPI-driven dashboard that could be used by government to formulate industrial
energy productivity policies and design programs. It is therefore necessary to prioritize the
development of energy efficiency indicators to support policy formulation and its
implementation. In this context GAP analysis is the first step towards prioritization and
selection of the most cost-effective strategy.
Prioritisation through GAP analysis
Priorities need to be set for both country level energy efficiency policies and plant level
programmes. Within most countries, and industries, a small number of enterprises account
for a large proportion of total industrial or sector consumption. The priorities should be to
focus on improving the performance of inefficient and large energy consuming industries
whilst not forgetting that even the most efficient industries and firms can continually improve.
A starting point for setting priorities is the current level of performance as demonstrated by
national and international benchmarking using gap analysis. Gap analysis is a benchmarking
process that accounts for and compares a plant’s current energy performance with that
deploying Best Available Technologies (BAT).
A plant’s Specific Energy Consumption (SEC) is typically the performance indicator used in
comparing an industry’s energy efficiency performance and also in laying down unit/sector
specific energy performance targets. GAP analysis begins with first collating information
from public sources on the pattern of sub-sectoral energy consumption at the regional,
country and local levels. This is further augmented and refined by measured plant level
energy performance data including plant design data as shown in Figure 4.3. The Figure 4.4
outlines the steps involved in performing GAP analysis.
71
Indicators and
Information
data from
available in the
country
public domain
experience
Measured plant
Qualitative and
energy
plant design
consumption
name plate data
data
GAP analysis
Figure 4.3 Data Sources for GAP analysis
Step 1
Indexing industry units on SEC; high-low analysis to identify GAPs
Step 2
Application of sensitivity analysis to contrast units from BAT
performance
Step 3
Determining overall potential for improvement
Figure 4.4: GAP Analysis Steps
The GAP analysis of SEC among industrial units in a region, country or cluster sets the
stage developing a system of prioritization and setting benchmarks and targets.
For illustration purposes SEC of 5 industrial plants or units of any particular sub-sector have
been computed as % of the SEC (BAT). This is shown in Figure 4.5.
72
SEC compared to SEC (BAT)

160%
143% 133% 139%
140% 127% 118%
120%
SEC as % of BAT
100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
0%
Plant A Plant B Plant C Plant D Plant E
Figure 4.5 : SECs Compared with SEC (BAT)
As one can see from Figure 4.5 the best performing industrial unit (E) is 18% higher than
SEC (BAT), whereas the worst unit (A) has an SEC of 43% higher than the SEC (BAT). The
SEC for the particular sector (average of all units), is around 32% higher than the SEC
(BAT).
The gap analysis sets the stage for establishing energy reduction targets (Figure 4.6). It is
therefore important to note that the stipulation of energy savings targets for any particular
sub-sector and/or industrial plant is derived from the energy savings potential that the sub-
sector or plant has with regard to BAT.
It follows logically that the formulation of effective energy productivity policies and programs
and related performance targets is critically dependent upon the availability of quality data
sets pertaining to unit performance in terms of SEC.
SEC GAP Analysis

50%
43%
45%
40%
SEC % greater than BAT
35% 32%
30%
25%
20% 18%
15%
10%
5%
0%
Worst Plant Av.for Sector Best Plant
Figure 4.6 : Prioritization through GAP analysis

73
Target setting
Once the GAP analysis is completed the subsequent step is to lay down reduction targets for
each unit and the associated timelines for each reduction phase. This is shown in Figure 4.7
below.
• Past trends in SEC reduction within industrial units as

Historic SEC reduction well as the average performance of the sub-sector as
a whole as a result of implementation of energy
trend efficiency measures. This acts as a reference for future
phase wise reduction targets.
• Unit specifc targets to be provided relative to the

Target setting with current positioning of the unit within the sub-sector.
respect to relative Unit with highest SEC gets largest target and vice-
versa. SECs need to be normalized to address
performance extraneous factors, if applicable.
• Based on historic data on SEC reductions and gap

Timelines for energy analysis ( ie.SEC deviation from SEC- BAT) realistic
reduction targets timeline for achievement of energy reduction targets
could be taken.
Figure 4.7: Steps for Target Setting
Setting Realistic Targets

Target setting, timelines and fiscal incentives are all interdependent and each needs to be
defined in respect to the other. The key is to ensure that the targets set are neither too low
nor thus too easy to meet nor too stringent; both can have a negative impact on the success
of the energy efficiency policy of the government.
To ensure realistic target setting is to assess four key factors that influence the growth and
deployment of efficiency measures in industry. The graphic below (Figure 4.8) provides the
key factors and their influence in driving the EE market.
Past Energy Efficiency Investments GAP in respect to Best Available

(Industry Trends) Technologies.
Realistic Target
Setting
Maturity and cost of deployment of Best
Phase wise reduction targets timelines,
Available Technology (Process and
instead of annual targets.
Equipments); Normalization factors
Figure 4.8: Realistic Target Setting

74
Normalization
There are several factors that affect the SEC of a unit which are sometimes beyond the
control of the company. Such causes need to be assessed and a correction factor needs to
be assigned on a unit by unit basis using sub-sector specific normalization values to adjust
the SEC targets and determine the level of compliance. Normalization is essential to ensure
a level playing field when establishing SEC targets. The indicative normalization factors to
be considered for adjustment of SEC targets are represented in Figure 4.9.
Figure 4.9 Normalization Factors for Adjusting SEC Targets
Example of Target Setting

Data given below is for a group of Textile Spinning Units in Northern India manufacturing
synthetic yarns. Gap between average SEC and the BATSEC is around 23.1%. At
increased SEC reduction (to be facilitated by the government policy and internal industry
targets) of 2% annually the group is expected to take around 8 years to come to the level of
BAT, as per its current standards. Only 35%-40% of the gap could be covered by retrofits,
equipment efficiency improvements etc, that was financed through internal resources.
Majority of the gap had to be filled by deployment of BAT which is capital intensive and
needs fiscal incentives.
Description Values
Industry average SEC 0.9
Industry average SEC (after normalization) 0.825
SEC Best Available Technology (SEC-BAT) 0.67
SEC GAP 23.1%
Average annual SEC reduction 2%
Timeline to reach BAT levels of SEC 8 years
Suggested annual increase in SEC 50%
Revised timeline to reach BAT levels of SEC 4 years

75
4.6 Importance of “Data” in conducting Gap Analysis
Allocation of energy saving targets for any particular sub-sector could typically be derived
from the energy saving potential that the sub-sector has with respect to Best Available
Technology. For that to happen an effective Industrial Energy Efficiency Policy has to have
access to quality data sets pertaining to a unit’s specific Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
for that particular sector.
Figure 4.10 shows the plot of SEC for Aluminum Refinery units, we can see 200% difference
between the best and worst SEC. However that is not a true indication of the energy
efficiency improvement potential. Technologies used in all these units is not the same which
means that even though they are from the same sector, it is inappropriate to use the SEC
figures without normalization of KPIs.
SEC (Toe/Ton)
0.8 0.674
0.6
0.4 0.322 0.325

0.241
0.2
0
A B C D
Figure 4.10: Variation of SEC for Alumina Refinery Units
It is important to look at bandwidth of the data and not just the yearly average figures, which
might not be the true reflection of the plant performance and hence lead to incorrect
benchmarking and target setting.
1
Figure 4.11 Importance of Normalizing data before Gap Analysis
76
Target Setting
Once the GAP analysis is done, the second step is to lay down reduction targets for each
unit and subsequently the timelines for each reduction.
Institutionalizing Data Analytics

Energy productivity performance data management requires the establishment of plant or
unit level Energy Information Management Analytic System (EIMAS) that meters, measures,
records and analyzes key performance indicators such as SEC of production departments
and/or entire plants. Furthermore the EIMAS in an individual unit could also be linked to a
Centralized Energy Efficiency Data Repository (CEEDR) operated through a web-based
cloud portal providing policy makers and corporates with salient, actionable information on a
real time basis on the energy productivity performance of the industry.
4.7 Energy Information Management and Analytical Systems (EIMAS)
EIMAS could be a powerful tool to measure and compute energy performance indicators
(EnPIs) that drive industrial energy efficiency projects and programs and should be a key
focus area for industrial companies to establish. The EIMAS offers the following benefits to
its users:
 Access to centralized data, and strengthened and effective management information
system.
 EnPI-driven information and performance analysis.
 Useful insights and predictive analysis to serve as metrics that improve shop floor
energy performance and productivity.
 Real-time management and optimized use and control of end-use energy in utilities
and process departments.
 Easy, quick, and timely reporting of energy performance.
EIMAS can be designed and implemented in an industry sub-sector (i.e. cement or steel)
and can be extended to other energy-intensive sectors, such as fertilizers, chemicals, and
petrochemicals.
4.8 Centralized Energy Efficiency Data Repository
While the EIMAS is an organisation or plant level energy management structure, its
relevance extends well beyond the facilities under its purview. It could serve as a building
block for policy makers to design and implement sector and sub-sector level energy savings
targets, monitor and verify their progress and provide strategic support and regulatory
oversight. The consolidation of company level EIMAS data and its analysis could serve as
the basis and foundation of a centralized energy efficiency data repository (CEEDR). The
CEEDR in key industry sub-sectors managed by respective industry associations or any
other acceptable arrangement that guarantees security of data could serve as a key
resource and platform for a data driven national industrial EE program. The CEEDR offers
the following benefits:
77
 An integrated assessment of the energy performance of the sector.

 An effective tool for monitoring and verification of energy performance trends (for
example, a specific energy consumption metric, such as a unit (kilowatt-hour) per
kilogram of production) at the sector, subsector, unit, department, process, and
equipment levels.
 Based on normalized EnPIs, different units are ranked and compared, and gaps in
specific energy consumption are identified.
 Useful in planning future policies to improve the energy efficiency of the sector as a
whole.
Regulation to mandate monthly EnPI filings through the use of EIMAS, linked to the
CEEDR, is recommended. Figure 4.11 provides the linking of plant level EIMAS with
CEEDR.
Figure 4.12: EIMAS and CEEDR Linkinge
4.9 Policies to Support Industrial Energy Efficiency
Since industry accounts for a high proportion of energy use in India, having effective policies
that assist industrial enterprises to improve levels of energy efficiency (and hence energy
productivity) should be a priority. Over the past few decades industrial energy efficiency
policy formulation has evolved considerably with program designs reflecting analytical
practices that reflect increasing methodological sophistication. A number of inter-related
factors need to be considered by policy makers and a step-by-step program employing
78
analytical and system planning tools and methods are presented in Table 4.3 as the policy
map towards advancing industrial energy productivity in India.
Table 4.3: Energy Efficiency Policy & Program Pathway in Indian Industry Sector
Phases Steps Actions Tools

Policy Definition Introduce industrial EP  Analyze legislative  GAP analysis
regulations in legislative framework and regulatory  SEC norms
framework drivers
Program Define policy framework  Analyze policy framework
Planning and industrial context
Design program  Define scope and objectives  ISO 50001:
 Define Energy Management Energy
System (EnMS) Management.
Establish Action Plans  Establish Energy Information System
Management Analytic
System (EIMAS)
 Create Centralized Energy
Efficiency Data Repository
(CEEDR)
Program Provide Institutional  Conduct energy audits;  Energy audit

Implementation support Energy performance tools & practices
contracting (ESCO)
 Develop training strategy
:institutional and human
capacity
 Follow-up with companies
and assist in implementation
Monitoring & Establish M&E protocols  Establish verifiable indicators  Benchmarking

Evaluation and data sources  BAT/BPT
 Setup meter & sub-meter analysis
facilities
 Establish baselines
 List best practice
technologies
 Develop and monitor plant
energy performance
indicators
Assess compliance;  Use transparent & predefined
feedback correction criteria
 Establish rewards or penalty
mechanisms
Evaluate program  Define evaluation objectives
 Select evaluation approach
and indicators
Reporting Promote program  Address challenges and
failures
Revise and adapt  Adjust program design and
program. consider up-scaling
79
Program Planning
The Figure 4.12 shows the overview of industrial energy productivity policy planning and
implementation process. An important point to note is that policy directives in the form of
energy target reduction or mandating energy audits and reporting is a consequence of and
derived from the findings of the gap analysis and target setting exercise at the sectoral, sub-
sector and unit levels. Once the policies have been formulated, governments need to
provide the enabling climate that assist industries in adhering to the policy requirements and
plan for sustained energy efficiency/productivity improvements. The implementation plan
needs to be technology, market and business driven and draws upon EnMS systems (e.g.
ISO 50001) that require data analytics and includes institutional development and capacity
building as well. Industrial Energy Efficiency: Policy Research & Data Analytics
Benchmarking BAT, SEC
Gap Analysis Gap Analysis

precedes
target setting
Measurement &
Verification
Ta rget setting
Magnitude of
Gap
determines
the target
Implementation
Timelines
plans
Policy
Policy guidelines
formulation framed after
ISO 50001, EnmS
gap analysis
Figure 4.13: Industrial Energy Productivity Policy Planning and Implementation Process
80
5. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EnMS): ISO 50001: 2018
5.1 Introduction
Energy management makes good business sense as energy costs is a significant portion in
an organisation's budget. Individual organization cannot control energy prices, government
policies or the global economy, but they can very well improve the way they manage energy
in their organizations.
A systematic focus on energy management, through optimum use of resources and

reduction in wastes, is expected to reduce cost. It can also lead to increased production,
improved energy performance, higher profits, and reduced impacts due to rising energy
prices. A reduction in energy consumption will also lower CO2 emissions to the environment,
and the organisation thereby contributes its part to addressing the climatic change objectives
of the country.
Despite these opportunities for energy savings and efficiency improvements, organisations
hesitate implementing measures and reaping the benefits of potential reduction in operation
costs. Most companies do not understand how much energy they currently use and how
much they potentially save by implementing an Energy Management System. Another barrier
in achieving energy savings is the lack of commitment at all levels, especially top
management in the organization, to make changes necessary to achieve these
improvements.
In order to manage energy well, an organization requires an effective Energy Management

System (EnMS) to be established, implemented, maintained and continually improved. There
are two ways to doing it; they can develop and implement their own Energy Management
System or they can implement Energy Management System conforming to ISO 50001.
5.2 Why ISO 50001 to Manage Energy Effectively?
It is in the interest of the organizations to implement ISO 50001 since it is based on the
management system model that is already well-understood and implemented by
organizations worldwide. It can make a positive difference for organizations of all types
immediately even without any investment, while supporting longer term efforts for capital
intensive energy-efficient technologies.
In order to spur interest in energy efficiency and help organisation take appropriate actions to
overcome barriers in implementing practical energy saving measures, International
Organisation for Standardisation (ISO) had released the first version of ‘ISO 50001 Energy
Management Systems (EnMS)–Requirements with guidance for use’ in June 2011 and
revised version of ISO 50001:2018 in August, 2018.
81
5.2.1 Energy Performance Approach
The standard provides requirements for a systematic, data-driven and facts-based process,
focused on continually improving energy performance. Energy performance is a key element
integrated within the concepts introduced in the standard in order to ensure effective and
measurable results over time. Energy performance is a concept which is related to energy
efficiency, energy use and energy consumption.
ISO 50001 has made a major leap in 'raising the bar' by requiring an organization to
demonstrate improved energy performance. There are no quantitative targets specified; an
organization can choose its own targets and create an action plan to meet the targets. With
this structured approach, an organization is more likely to see tangible financial benefits.
Energy Performance Indicators (EnPIs) and energy baselines (EnBs) are two interrelated
elements addressed in the standard to enable organizations to demonstrate energy
performance improvement.
5.2.2 Relationship between Energy Performance and the EnMS
The ISO 50001 standard addresses both energy performance improvement and
management system approach to manage energy. The standard requires continual
improvement of EnMS as well as energy performance to achieve intended outcomes.
Accordingly, the EnMS promotes, supports and sustains the Energy Perfomance
Improvement, achievement of other intended outcomes, and its continual improvement of
EnMS as illustated in Figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1 – Relationship between EnMS and Energy Performance

82
5.2.3 Plan-Do-Check-Act (PDCA) cycle
The EnMS described in the standard is based on the Plan-Do-Check-Act (PDCA) continual
improvement framework and incorporates energy management into existing organizational
practices as illustrated in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2 – PDCA cycle
The PDCA Approach to EnMS
Plan: understand the context of the organization, establish an energy policy and an energy
management team, consider actions to address risks and opportunities, conduct an energy
review, identify significant energy uses (SEUs) and establish energy performance
indicators (EnPIs), energy baseline(s) (EnBs), objectives and energy targets, and action
plans necessary to deliver results that will improve energy performance in accordance with
the organization's energy policy.
Do: implement the action plans, operational and maintenance controls, and
communication, ensure competence and consider energy performance in design and
procurement.
Check: monitor, measure, analyse, evaluate, audit and conduct management review(s) of
energy performance and the EnMS.
Act: take actions to address nonconformities and continually improve energy performance
and the EnMS.
83
5.3. Benefits of Implementing ISO 50001
The implementation of ISO 50001 will provide the following benefits:

a) provide organizations with a well-recognized framework for integrating energy
efficiency into their management/business practices,
b) provide a logical and consistent methodology for identifying and implementing
improvements that can contribute to a continual increase in energy efficiency across
the facilities,
c) assist organizations to better utilize existing energy consuming assets, thus reducing
costs and/or avoiding expanding capacity,
d) offer guidance on benchmarking, measuring, documenting, and reporting energy
efficiency improvements
e) lead organizations to meet overall climate change mitigations goals by reducing their
energy related greenhouse gas emissions,
f) assist facilities in evaluating and prioritizing implementation of state-of-the-art energy-
efficient technologies,
g) provide an approach for organizations to encourage suppliers to better manage their
energy, thus promoting energy efficiency throughout the supply chain.
5.4 Why a New ISO 50001 Version?
It is a part of continual improvement that every management standard is periodically

reviewed. This version change is driven by high-level structure (HLS) implementation. The
purpose of HLS is to make ISO 50001 comparable and compatible to other standards such
as ISO 9001:2015 and ISO 14001:2015. This will help organization implementing or
maintaining Integrated Management System (IMS).
The new version is targeted to build energy culture in an organization. Adoption of HLS is
expected to make process owner more responsible for all systems rather than a single
management system. Salient feature of HLS:
 A common structure for all Standards (ISO 9001, ISO 14001) etc
 10 clauses in all
 HLS structure + energy management specific clauses
All ISO Standards will henceforth follow ten clauses recommended by HLS and few
additional clauses which are specific to that particular standard.
The new version also brings risk management approach―risk management, risk analysis―
in energy management system.
The main changes compared to the previous version of ISO 50001:2011 are as follows:
(i) adoption of ISO’s requirements for management system standards, including a high-
level structure, identical core text, and common terms and definitions, to ensure a high
level of compatibility with other management system standards;
(ii) better integration with strategic management processes;
84
(iii) clarification of language and document structure;

(iv) stronger emphasis on the role of top management;
(v) inclusion of new definitions, including energy performance improvement;
(vi) clarification on exclusions of energy types;
(vii) clarification of “energy review”;
(viii) introduction of the concept of normalization of energy performance indicators [EnPI(s)]
and associated energy baselines [(EnB(s)];
(ix) addition of details on the energy data collection plan and related requirements
(previously energy management plan): and
(x) clarification of text related to energy performance indicators [EnPI(s)] and energy
baselines [EnB(s)].
The chapter numbers from here onwards are revised to match with Clause Numbers of ISO
50001:2018 standard to avoid any confusion. This chapter clarifies the requirements of the
standard and how to meet those. To know the exact requirements under each clause, ISO
50001:2018 standard should be referred.
Interpretation of key words used in the standard
In the new standard, “shall” indicates a requirement; “should” indicates a recommendation;

“can” indicates a possibility or a capability; and “may” indicates permission.
Besides, it should be remembered that
(i) the use of the word “any” implies selection or choice,
(ii) the words “appropriate” and “applicable” are not interchangeable. “Appropriate” means
suitable (for, to) and implies some degree of freedom, while “applicable” means relevant or
possible to apply and implies that if it can be done, it needs to be done,
(iii) the word “consider” means it is necessary to think about the topic but it can be excluded,
whereas “take into account” means it is necessary to think about the topic but it cannot be
excluded, and
(iv) the word “ensure” means the responsibility can be delegated, but not the accountability.
Requirements of ISO 50001:2018
1 Scope – Gives scope of the standard.
2 Normative references – There are no normative references in this document.
3 Terms and definitions – Gives definitions of various terms used. In new version,
definitions have been divided into five categories and in place of 28 definitions in the
old version; there are 41 definitions in new version.
85
4 Context of organization
4.1 Understanding the organization and its context
The organization is required to determine external and internal issues that are relevant to its
purpose and that affect its ability to achieve the intended outcome(s) of its EnMS and
improve its energy performance. The analysis of organizational context will provide a
high‐level conceptual understanding of the external and internal issues that can affect, either
positively or negatively, energy performance and the EnMS of the organization.
External issues could be related to interested parties such as existing national or sector
objectives, requirements or standards; restrictions or limitations on energy supply, security
and reliability; energy costs or the availability of types of energy; effects of weather; effects
of climate change; effect on greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions etc.
Internal issues could include core business objectives and strategy; asset management
plans; financial resource (labour, financial, etc.) affecting the organization; energy
management maturity and culture; sustainability considerations; contingency plans for
interruptions in energy supply; maturity of existing technology etc.
4.2 Understanding the needs and expectations of interested parties
Under this clause, the organization is supposed to identify the interested parties that are
relevant to energy performance and the EnMS; the relevant requirements of these interested
parties; and which of the identified needs and expectations need to be addressed by the
organization through its EnMS.
Interested parties (stakeholders) can include Suppliers, Customers, Partners, Employees,
Investors, Owners, Bankers/financial bodies, Regulatory bodies, Unions, Competitors,
Society, Opposing pressure groups, government, shareholders etc.
Organization is also required to ensure that it has access to the applicable legal
requirements and other requirements related to its energy efficiency, energy use and energy
consumption; determine how these requirements apply to its energy efficiency, energy use
and energy consumption; ensure that these requirements are taken into account and
reviewed at defined intervals.
Legal requirements are laws and acts that apply to an organisation's energy use,
consumption, and efficiency. These may include Energy Conservation Act, 2001, Perform,
Achieve Trade (PAT), Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC), Boiler Act, Water
Pollution Act, Air Pollution Act, Electricity Act, Factory Act etc. as applicable to the
organization. Besides these, there may be some regional, national, or international laws that
may apply to an organisation.
Other requirements that may apply to the organization include voluntary agreements,
corporate agreements/targets, agreements with customers and suppliers, requirements of
trade associations, agreements with community groups or NGOs etc.
86
A list of all applicable legal and other requirements relevant to energy should be developed,
and the organisation needs to decide how these requirements apply to its activities and how
compliance can be effectively ensured as shown in Figure 5.3. The entire process of
identification and evaluation should be clear and include a description of how compliance is
assessed. Best method would be to establish the responsibility for identification, compliance
and monitoring and reviewing compliance.
Figure 5.3: Addressing Legal and Other Requirements

The ISO 50001 standard requires organization to review legal requirements and other
requirements at defined intervals. However, in addition to this interval, there might be some
occasions when organization need to review these requirements and such occasions could
be changes to applicable legal and other requirements as well as changes in organization’s
operations that might affect applicability of these requirements. For example, under PAT, a
textile mill will become a designated consumer as soon as its total energy consumption
exceeds 3000 MTOE per annum and this has to be checked by the textile mill from time to
time. Similarly, more and more sectors are being added under PAT jurisdiction every three
years with beginning of new PAT cycle.
4.3 Determining the scope of energy management system
The organization is required to determine and document the scope and boundaries to be
covered in its EnMS to establish its scope. While determining the EnMS scope, the
87
organization is required to consider the external and internal issues referred to in 4.1 as well
as the requirements referred to in 4.2.
Scope covers facilities, operations, products and activities whereas boundaries cover parts
of the site on which it has the authority to control its energy efficiency, energy use and
energy consumption. In the new version, the organization cannot exclude an energy type
within the scope and boundaries of EnMS.
4.4 Energy management system
The organization is required to establish, implement, maintain and continually improve an

EnMS, including the processes needed and their interactions, and continually improve
energy performance. The processes needed will depend on the size of organization and its
type of activities, processes, products and services; the complexity of processes and their
interactions; and competence of personnel.
5 Leadership
5.1 Leadership and commitment
New version of the standard has put stronger emphasis on the role of top management
wherein it is required to demonstrate its leadership and commitment with respect to continual
improvement of its energy performance and effectiveness of the EnMS by way of fulfilling a
number of responsibilities mentioned therein. Top management can delegate some of those
responsibilities but the overall accountability will still lie with top management.
Top management support is a prerequisite to the successful implementation of an energy

management system. Top management should provide the necessary resources such as
time, manpower, money, materials for effective implementation of the EnMS. Energy-saving
opportunities are to be given same priority as part of normal daily activities and decision-
making of the organisation. Top management commitment must be communicated and
made visible to the entire organisation through employee involvement activities such as
empowerment, motivation, recognition, training, rewards and participation.
5.2 Energy Policy
Energy policy is a high-level statement conveying the overall intentions and directions of the
organisation aligned with its long-term goals. It is established and documented by the top
management. It shows top management commitment and support to energy performance
improvement and serves as a guideline for setting targets, making decisions, and providing
framework for actions.
The energy policy should clearly state organisation's energy priorities. ISO 50001 requires
that the energy policy must demonstrate the commitments at least for (i) continual
improvement of energy performance and the EnMS, (ii) availability of information and
88
necessary resources to achieve its objectives and energy targets, and (iii) satisfy applicable
legal and other requirements related to energy efficiency, energy use and energy
consumption.
An energy policy is the foundation for developing an organization's EnMS through all phases
of planning, implementation, operation, performance evaluation and improvement. It
provides a framework for setting and reviewing objectives and targets. Policy document
should be a brief statement so that members of the organization can readily understand and
apply to their work activities. The energy policy dissemination can be used as a means to
manage organizational behaviour. The policy is required to be well communicated within the
organization, be available to interested parties and be periodically reviewed and updated as
necessary. Every word used in energy policy is important and therefore, organization should
avoid overcommitting and inclusion of those points in the energy policy which it cannot meet.
A model energy policy is shown in Figure 5.4.
Model Energy Policy
As an energy intense manufacturer of specialty glass, ABC Company strives to reduce its
energy consumption and costs and promote the long-term environmental and economic
sustainability of its operations. We are committed to:
 Reduce energy use per unit of production in our manufacturing operations.

 Ensure continual improvement in plant energy performance.
 Deploy information and resources to achieve energy objectives and targets.
 Uphold legal and other requirements regarding energy.
 Consider energy performance improvements in design and modification of facilities,
equipment, system, and processes
 Effectively procure and utilize energy-efficient products and services.
Managing Director: _____________ Date: __________
Figure 5.4: Model Energy Policy
5.3 Organizational roles, responsibilities and authorities
Top management is required to form an Energy Management Team which will have the
responsibility and authority to ensure effective implementation of the EnMS and for
delivering energy performance improvement. It is also required to ensure that the
responsibilities and authorities for relevant roles are assigned and communicated within the
organization.
The team approach takes advantage of the diversity of skills and knowledge of individuals.
Good practice is to have a cross-functional teams from all sections of the organizations that
89
can affect energy performance. This approach provides an effective mechanism to engage
different parts of the organization in the planning, implementation, maintenance and
improvement of the EnMS as well as of energy performance. Members of the team may
change from time to time and should be based on defined roles (designations) rather than
named individuals.
For smaller organizations, a single person might be enough, whereas large organizations will
require this cross-functional team for effective planning and implementation of EnMS in
different parts of the organization. Size of this team will depend on size and nature of the
organization and available resources.
6 Planning
6.1 Actions to address risks and responsibilities
6.1.1 The organization is required to determine the risks and opportunities that need to be
addressed to give assurance that the EnMS can achieve its intended outcome(s), including
energy performance improvement; prevent or reduce undesired effects; and achieve
continual improvement of the EnMS and energy performance.
By identifying risks and opportunities when planning the EnMS, an organization can
anticipate potential scenarios and consequences so that undesired effects can be addressed
before they occur. Similarly, favourable considerations and circumstances that can offer
potential advantages or beneficial outcomes can be identified and pursued.
6.1.2 Under this clause, the organization is required to plan actions to address these risks
and opportunities and how to integrate and implement the actions into its EnMS and energy
performance processes as well as evaluate the effectiveness of these actions.
A concept diagram illustrating the strategic planning is shown in Figure 5.5.
Figure 5.5 Strategic Planning to address risk and responsibilities

90
6.2 Objectives, energy targets and planning to achieve them
6.2.1 The data analysis and other information outputs from Energy Review are used in
developing objectives and energy targets. Setting objectives and targets provides the means
for transforming policy into action. These are to be established for all relevant functions and
levels of the organization.
6.2.2 Objectives are broader and normally covers whole of the

organization/department/section and directly relevant to organization’s energy policy. They
could be quantifiable as well as qualitative.
Quantifiable objectives have targets for performance improvement (e.g. reduce electricity
consumption by 3 % by the end of the year). Qualitative objectives relate to energy
behaviour, cultural change etc. It is often possible to provide some quantitative values for
qualitative objectives, through surveys or other similar mechanisms.
Similarly, energy targets are consistent with objectives as they emerge from them and have
more details. Targets should be SMART (specific, measurable if practical, achievable,
relevant and time-based). It can be expressed in terms of the percentage improvement in
energy performance or improvement in energy consumption or the EnPI with appropriate
baseline period reference.
Factors which need to be considered while establishing and reviewing objectives and energy
targets include legal requirements and other requirements, significant energy uses,
opportunities to improve energy performance, financial, operational and business conditions,
technological options and the views of interested parties.
6.2.3 Actions which are required to be taken to achieve the targets are known as Action
Plans. The energy management action plans are the road map to what is needed to achieve
the objectives and energy targets. These typically arise from the energy performance
improvement opportunities that were identified and prioritised as part of the energy review.
Top management is supposed to provide required resources for successful implementation

of action plans. Action plans are required to show allocation of responsibility, resources
required, time frame for completion, how to verify the improvement in energy performance
(measurement method and other relevant details) and how to verify the result etc. An
example showing consistency relationship between Energy Policy, Objective, Target and
Action plan is shown in Table 5.1.
91
Table 5.1: Consistency Relationship between Policy, Objective, Target and Action Plan
Action Plan
Relevant Method of
portion in Energy Energy Details of
verification for Time Method of
Energy Objective Target action plan Resources
By whom energy frame for verifying
Policy on what is to required
performance completion results
be done
improvement
A.M. Finance for

(i) All Power drawn by
(Purchase) procuring all
remaining each type of
to procure remaining
inefficient existing lighting
and inefficient Dec, 2018
lighting to be and of
Maintenance lighting and
replaced with corresponding
Inch. to manpower for
LED lighting replacement
install doing it
Electrical
A.M. Finance and
(ii) Replace submeter
(Purchase) manpower for
pneumatic readings
Reduction to procure No compressed Tendering,
packing installed on
of 10% in and air is required by procuring,
machines with July, 2019 lighting
Reduction in units Maintenance packaging installation and
mechanical feeder &
We shall specific consumed In-charge to machines commissioning
packing compressed
improve our electrical per MT of install and of mechanical
machines air section
energy Energy production commission machines
and
performance Consumptio as Manpower and
(iii) Set screw Power drawn by electricity
continually n by end of compared skill for
air compressor each compressor bill stating
July, 2019 to 2017-18 resetting the
pressure Maintenance during load total
by end of pressures for Dec, 2018
settings at In-charge before and after energy
July, 2019 load and unload
optimum level resetting of consumptio
on all air
to save power pressures n for the
compressors
month
A.M. Finance and
(iv) Install
(Purchase) manpower for
VFDs at
to procure Air compressor Tendering,
identified
and does not run in procuring, April, 2019
equipment
Maintenance unload mode installation and
having
In-charge to commissioning
variable loads
install of VFDs
6.3 Energy review
To improve energy performance, it is necessary to understand how, why, and where energy
is being consumed and to identify where opportunities to improve exist.
The energy review is the analytical part of tactical energy planning process. The purpose of
the energy review is to obtain an overall picture of an organisation's energy use, patterns of
use of each energy source, consumption trends, energy performance, variables affecting
energy consumption (say production), opportunities for savings, and the resources required
in terms of manpower, time and investments.
One of the important activities of energy review is to identify significant energy uses (SEUs)
so that areas using more energy and/or having more potential for energy saving and/or both
can be focused and planned accordingly. SEUs can be defined depending on the needs of
the organization, such as by facility (e.g. warehouse, factory, office), by process or system
(e.g. lighting, steam, transport, electrolysis, motor-driven) or equipment (e.g. motor, boiler).
Once identified, the management and control of SEUs are an integral part of the EnMS.
Energy review is required to be updated at defined interval (at least annually) or when there
92
are major changes in the energy scenario of the organization. The various steps involved in
carrying out energy review are illustrated in Figure 5.6.
Figure 5.6: Energy Review
Steps in conducting Energy Review

1. Collect data on energy use for past 12/24 months
2. Analyse past and current energy use with relevant drivers (e.g. production)
3. Identify and challenge each SEUs (based on energy use and consumption)
(If measured data on energy consumption are not available, then, estimate using actual
power drawn and hours of operation)
4. Identify variables affecting energy consumption and effect on SEUs
5. Determine current performance and baseline of identified SEUs
6. Identify and prioritize opportunities for improvement
7. Estimate future energy used based on projected production and expected energy saving
which may result from implementation of energy conservation measures.
8. Agree objectives, energy targets and action plans.
6.4 Energy Performance Indicators
Energy review provides the information and data needed to establish EnPIs. EnPI is a “ruler”
that is used to compare energy performance before (reference EnPI value) and after
(resultant or current EnPI value) after implementation of action plans. The difference
between the reference value and the resultant value is a measure of a change in energy
performance.
93
EnPI helps turn energy data into useful information for top management. Types and
examples of EnPIs are as follows:
- Simple energy consumption in kWh or kCal (in total or breakdown by energy use or by
facility or by equipment)
- Simple ratios like energy consumption per time, or per unit of floor area or per unit of
production
- Statistical model including linear or non-linear regression
The methodolgy the organization is going to adpot on this matter and updating of EnPIs
needs to be maintained as documented information. EnPI value(s) shall be reviewed and
compared to their respective baseline value(s) (EnB) to assess energy performance and
improvements, and need to be retained as documented information.
The Figure 5.7 illustrates the simple case where direct measurement of energy consumption
is used as EnPI and the energy performance is compared between the baseline period and
the reporting period. It also shows whether target (in case it was set) has been achieved or
not.
Figure 5.7: Energy Performance Indicator
With passage of time and maturity of EnMS, there should be increase in the number of
EnPIs through indepth penetration (from whole organization level to facility to
process/system-wise to individual equipment-wise).
6.5 Energy baseline
One of the main requirements of the ISO 50001 standard is to have continual improvement
in energy performance of the organization, and to find out improvement, one has to have
some base to compare with. This is what is known as “Energy Baseline” which is defined as
the quantitative reference or references providing a basis of comparison of energy
94
performance. Energy Review provides the information and data needed to establish the
energy baseline.
The energy baseline is the reference for measuring energy performance over time. The type
of energy baseline will depend on specific purpose of the Energy Performance Indicator
(EnPI) and can be established at the facility, system, process, or equipment level. The
energy baseline can be expressed as a mathematical relationship of energy performance as
a function of relevant variables; an engineering model; a simple ratio; or simple consumption
data (if there are no relevant variables).
Baseline is always pertaining to a period which is known as baseline period. This period
should be representative of one complete cycle of the variations in the organizational
operation like seasonal fluctuations in production in case of industries; occupancy in case of
hotels; temperature & humidity in case of air conditioning in buildings etc. In all such cases,
the baseline could be considered as one year. When determining energy performance
improvement, the data needs to represent the same period as the baseline.
In almost all the cases, energy consumption is affected by relevant variables and these
variables will be different in baseline period and the reporting period for which improvement
is to be determined. Where the organization has data indicating that relevant variables
significantly affect energy performance, the organization shall carry out normalization of the
EnPI value(s) and corresponding EnB(s). Depending on the nature of the activities,
normalization can be a simple adjustment, or a more complex procedure.
In order to do “apple to apple comparison” and to correctly assess the improvement made in
energy performance, some adjustments in baseline may be required in certain cases. These
cases could be one or more of the followings:
a) where current EnPIs, the organizational boundaries and the energy baselines are no
longer appropriate and effective to reflect organizations energy use and consumption, or
b) there have been major changes to the process, operational patterns, or energy systems,
(for example steam turbine is installed to generate electricity between baseline period
and reporting period which will change the entire energy including fuel scenario of the
organization) or
c) according to a predetermined method like ‘normalization’ in PAT, where adjustment is

made in the reporting period energy consumption due to changes in relevant variables
or Static factors.
6.6 Planning for collection of energy data
Data are critically important in monitoring and analyzing key characteristics. Planning for
which data to collect, how to collect, and how often to collect, form Energy Data Collection
Plan. This plan will depend upon the size and complexity of organization, its resources and
its monitoring and measurement equipment. The plan needs to be reviewed at defined
95
intervals and updated as appropriate. The measuring equipment used for monitoring energy
consumption and performance for operational decisions should be accurate, consistent and
periodically calibrated.
7 Support
7.1 Resources
The organization is required to determine and provide the resources needed for the
establishment, implementation which can include human resources, financial resources.
specialized skills, technology, data collection infrastructure etc.
7.2 Competence
This is the responsibility of organization to ensure that all people working under its control
and which can affect its energy performance are competent on the basis of appropriate
education, training, skills and experience and takes necessary action like the provision of
training to, the mentoring of, or the reassignment of currently employed persons; or the
hiring or contracting of competent persons etc to acquire the necessary competence and
evaluate the effectiveness of action taken as well as retain appropriate documented
information as evidence of competence.
Training is one of the many methods for achieving competency. EnMS team members
should be encouraged to continually develop, maintain and improve their knowledge, skills
and expertise. Organization can also consider certification course like BEE’s course for
Certified Energy Auditor/Manager or Lead Auditor course for ISO 50001 etc to improve their
competence level.
Competence requirements need to be appropriate to the function, level and role of persons
(including top management) doing work, which affects energy performance and the EnMS.
Competence requirements are determined by the organization.
7.3 Awareness
Organization needs to ensure that every one working for it (regular employees, contract
workers, security staff, helpers etc.) is aware of importance of conformity to energy policy
and EnMS requirements; his/her roles, responsibilities and authorities in achieving the
requirements of EnMS; benefits of improved energy performance as well as impact of their
activities in achieving the same etc. Table 5.2 shows a sample training plan.
96
Table 5.2: Sample Training Plan

Type of Training Participants
EnMS Awareness All who are working under the control of
organization
EnMS Implementation Training Middle Management /Energy Management Team
EnMS Internal Auditor (IA) Training Energy Management Team/Anyone interested in

conducting Internal Audit (However, their
competency needs to be ensured before they are
allowed to conduct IA)
Training related to control of SEU All personnel related to SEUs
7.4 Communication
Good internal and external communication is essential to managing change. It keeps

personnel informed of energy management activities, incentives, and successes, which
strengthens commitment and participation. Multiple channels of communication, whether
verbal or nonverbal can be used such as meetings, videos, briefings, e-mails, posters,
memos, circulars etc. The organization is required to determine the internal and external
communications relevant to the EnMS, including on what it will communicate; when to
communicate; with whom to communicate, how to communicate and who communicates.
Organization is required to implement a suggestion scheme with incentives and rewards for
good suggestions that can be implemented to stimulate interest and participation of all those
who are working under the control of the organization.
7.5 Documented information
7.5.1 General
Documented information is defined as the information required to be controlled and

maintained by an organization and the medium on which it is contained. It can be in any
format and media, and from any source. Also, it can refer to the management system,
including related processes; information created in order for the organization to operate
(documentation): and evidence of results achieved. Thus, in the new ISO version, the term
documented information includes document(s), and records.
Documentation enables communication of intent and consistency of action. Its use

contributes to achievement of conformity to requirements of the standard and provides
objective evidence thereof. However, generation of documentation should not be an end in
itself, but it should be a value-adding activity.
97
A certain amount of documented information is required in the EnMS. Minimum (mandatory)

documented information) as required by the standard under various clauses (clause
numbers are mentioned in the bracket) are as follows:
 Scope and Boundaries of the EnMS (4.3);

 Energy Policy (5.2);
 Objective and Targets (6.2.2);
 Action Plans for achieving energy objectives and targets (6.2.3);
 Methodology and criteria used to develop the energy review (6.3);
 Energy review results (6.3);
 Method for determining and updating EnPIs (6.4);
 EnPIs Values (6.4);
 EnB(s), relevant variable data and modifications to EnB(s) (6.5);
 Data to be collected and retained (6.6);
 Details on measurement, monitoring and other means of establishing accuracy and
repeatability (6.6);
 Evidence of competence (7.2);
 External origin (7.5.3);
 Operational planning and control (8.1);
 Design activities (8.2);
 Results of the investigation and response to significant deviation (9.1.1);
 Results from monitoring and measurements (9.1.1);
 Results of the evaluation of compliance and any action taken (9.1.2);
 Evidence of the implementation of the audit programs and the audit results (9.2.2);
 Evidence of the results of management reviews (9.3.4); and
 Nature of nonconformities and subsequent action taken as well as on results of any
corrective action (10.1).
7.5.2 Creating and Updating
This clause required organizations to take appropriate action while creating and updating
documented information with respect to their identification and description (e.g. a title, date,
author or reference number); format (e.g. language, software version, graphics) and media
(e.g. paper, electronic) as well as review and approval for suitability and adequacy.
7.5.3 Control of documented information
There is no mandatory procedure that needs to be developed as documented information as

per the standard. However, organization can still develop certain procedures as documented
information for the convenience of all, especially if ISO management systems are new to the
organization. Procedures which can be developed by organization in such a situation can
include procedure on Documented Information Control, Internal Audit, Management Review,
Nonconformity and Corrective Action, Communication, Identification of Competency, Skill &
Training, and Significant Deviation.
98
Correct identification of the EnMS documents is crucial to ensure that the most up-to-date
documents are in use, that they can be easily located, and that obsolete documents are
removed from the points of use. Documented information required by the EnMS and by this
document shall be controlled to ensure that it is available and suitable for use, where and
when it is needed; is adequately protected (e.g. from loss of confidentiality, improper use,
loss of integrity).
Any documented information, once developed for the EnMS (including technical documents
wherever appropriate) as well as external documents which have been generated outside of
the organization, need to be controlled. Some examples of documents of external origin are
laws/acts like Energy Conservation Act, 2001; ECBC 2007; Electricity Act, 2003; various
standards being used by organization including ISO 50001, important technical documents
including equipment manuals prepared by OEMs etc.
8. Operation
8.1 Operational planning & control
This involves examination of how significant energy uses are operated and maintained in
comparison with energy-efficient practices. Best practices or criteria for operation and
maintenance are developed, ensured that these practices are routinely followed, people
responsible for following these practices are well communicated about these, and keeping
documented information to the extent necessary to have confidence that the processes have
been carried out as planned.
Under this clause, the organization is required to control planned changes and review the
consequences of unintended changes, taking actions to mitigate any adverse effects, as
necessary. The organization is also required to ensure that outsourced SEUs or processes
related to SEUs are controlled.
Although not mandatory, it is a good practice to have documented information on operation

and maintenance practices related to energy. These include work instructions, standard
operating procedures (SOPs), work flow diagrams etc.
8.2 Design
The design activity associated with energy-saving and operation control presents one of the
best opportunities to improve energy performance of new facilities, extensions to existing
facilities, new or modified production process, upgrades, refurbishment, change of use and
design. While doing so, organization should consider improved technologies, alternative
energy such as renewables or less polluting types of energy options, best available energy
efficient techniques, practices and emerging trends.
It is much better to design and implement these projects properly the first time round rather
than to carry out upgrades or retrofits later. The costs of incorporating energy efficiency
99
measures during the design stages are much lower and the benefits of doing so are greater
than implementing as changes later during the operation stage. This approach can avoid
frequent barriers to appropriate energy performances such as oversized equipment, over
specified systems, and the use of inefficient technologies. Where applicable, the results of
the energy performance consideration shall be incorporated into specification, design and
procurement activities.
It is possible that equipment and systems may operate at partial or variable load for
significant periods of time and therefore, it should be considered during the design,
procurement and commissioning phases of the project.
8.3 Procurement
Procurement is an opportunity to improve energy performance through the use of more

efficient products and services. It is also an opportunity to work with the supply chain and
influence its energy behaviour.
Procurement policy of the organization should always consider energy implications while
purchasing energy services, products, equipment and even purchase of energy itself. Also,
while purchasing these, one should consider all costs for their expected life cycle. These
costs include capital cost including taxes and duties, installation and commissioning cost,
energy cost, maintenance cost, lubricant cost, operating manpower cost, disposal cost etc.
This clause of the standard calls organization to establish and implement the criteria for
assessing energy use, consumption and efficiency over planned or expected operating
lifetime when procuring energy using products, equipment and services which are expected
to have a significant impact on the organization's energy performance. This can include life
cycle costs as mentioned above; expected impact on the overall system energy performance
(e.g. the energy efficiency of a pumping system at the planned system operating conditions);
performance at part load and under fluctuating loads; energy efficiency rating such as BEE
labelling program; certification from reputed agencies or from other third parties. For
example, a Five Star A.C. or inverter air conditioner will cost more compared to lower star
A.C. but energy savings over time will exceed the additional buying cost due to higher
efficiency of Five Star or inverter AC as compared to lower star air conditioners.
Even while purchasing energy, organization should consider the opportunities for reducing
cost in purchasing electricity and fuels. Factors which can be considered while evaluating
purchase of energy should include quantity (to check for bulk discounts for more quantity or
penalty for less quantity), quality (voltage fluctuation, harmonic quality etc), price or rates,
contract period, reliability, flexibility etc.
Examples of Energy Service providers are energy consultants, energy service companies
(ESCOs), energy service providers, energy auditors, energy related trainers etc. Energy
services can include annual maintenance services (AMC) and contracts; equipment and
technology advice; project design, construction and commissioning; vehicle and transport
services and energy or utility suppliers.
100
Many times, energy performance of an equipment or system is adversely affected due to

fact that the organization had not defined and documented energy purchasing
specifications while placing the purchase order and hence, wherever applicable, the
organization shall define and communicate specifications for ensuring the energy
performance of procured equipment and services as well as for the purchase of energy.
9. Performance evaluation
9.1 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation of energy performance and

the EnMS
9.1.1 General
There are a number of key characteristics that an organisation should monitor, measure and
analyse to be aware of its energy performance at regular intervals. To know whether
performance is improving as planned, organisation needs to monitor minimum of the key
characteristics mentioned in the standard. Organization is also required to determine the
methods for monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation, as applicable, to ensure
valid results; when the monitoring and measurement shall be performed; and when the
results from monitoring and measurement shall be analysed and evaluated.
The organization is supposed to evaluate its energy performance and the effectiveness of
the EnMS as well as improvement in energy performance by comparing EnPI value(s)
against the corresponding energy baselines.
The organization is also required to investigate and take appropriate actions to significant
deviations in energy performance which could be on negative side i.e. adverse, or positive
side. It is important to investigate deviations on the positive side also so as to ensure their
repetition every time.
9.1.2 Evaluation of Compliance with legal requirements and other requirements
The organization should determine if processes for evaluating compliance with legal and
other requirements (which have already been identified and planned under clause 4.2 of the
standard) are in place and whether they can be adapted to address the needs of the EnMS.
This process is supposed to be carried out at planned frequency and documented
information are to be retained.
9.2 Internal audit
9.2.1 An internal audit of an EnMS is an objective, systematic review of all or part of an

organization’s EnMS which is carried out at planned intervals. It must be remembered that
internal audit of EnMS is a ‘fact finding’ exercise and not a ‘fault finding’ exercise and
therefore, auditor should not look out for only finding faults. The facts which need to be found
out through Internal Audit are whether the EnMS improves energy performance; conforms to
the organization’s own requirements for its EnMS as well as to its energy policy, objectives
101
and energy targets established by the organization, the requirements of the ISO 50001
standard and is effectively implemented and maintained. Of course, during this fact-finding
exercise, auditor may come across certain non-conformities which are required to be
highlighted in the internal audit reporting.
During an internal audit, the auditors’ interview relevant personnel, observe operational
activities, review documents, and examine records and data.
9.2.2 Under this clause, organization is required to plan, establish, implement and maintain
(an) audit programme(s) as per the details mentioned in the standard.
Internal audit can be carried out more frequently for areas (i) that influence energy
performance substantially, (ii) where important nonconformities (NCs) have been identified in
previous audits, (iii) that have experienced important changes and (iv) areas where
important changes are being planned. Similarly, EnMS internal audits can be conducted less
frequently for those areas that do not significantly impact energy performance or for
processes that have fewer Nonconformities from previous audits. However, it is suggested
that all areas and processes should undergo internal audits annually for at least first two
years of EnMS implementation.
9.3 Management review
9.3.1 This is the key responsibility of top management focused on ensuring the ongoing
suitability, adequacy, effectiveness and alignment with the strategic direction of the
organization. Management review highlights the top management on the positive outcomes
as well as the weaknesses, in order to provide effective recommendations for improvements.
Management review is conducted at planned frequency, which should be at least once a

year, within which corrective action can be taken and appropriate systems adjustments can
be made. All records pertaining to management review meetings are required to be
maintained.
9.3.2 Minimum Agenda for the management review meeting include the following:
 Status regarding action from previous management review,

 Changes in internal and external issues and associated risks opportunities relevant to
EnMS,
 Internal as well as external audit results,
 Existing energy policy appropriateness in the present circumstances,
 Review of the compliance of legal and other requirements,
 Opportunities for continual improvement,
 Monitoring and measurement results,
 Status of nonconformities and corrective actions etc.
9.3.3 Management review is also supposed to review the extent to which objectives and
102
energy targets have been met; energy performance and energy performance improvement
based on monitoring and measurement results including the EnPI(s) and status of the action
plans.
9.3.4 It is subsequently the task of top management to take decision related to continual
improvement opportunities and need for changes in the EnMS which will indicate the
organization’s energy performance in complete and best possible manner, how improvement
in energy performance is progressing, any changes in the energy policy, EnPIs, EnB(s),
objectives, targets and action plans, allocation of resources, the improvement of
competence, awareness and communication etc.
10 Improvement
10.1 Nonconformity and corrective action
Nonfulfillment of a requirement is a Nonconformity. This requirement could be of ISO 50001

standard of the EnMS which organization has prepared, or of its operation control etc. In
simple words any deviation from specified norms is Nonconformity.
When nonconformity is detected, the first step is to take appropriate action to resolve the
immediate situation and it is known as correction. For example, In a compressed air system,
reduction in air pressure to a level affecting the plant operation due to dirty filter in an air
compressor is a nonconformity and cleaning or replacing the filter which will restore the
correct air pressure is the correction.
However, taking correction may not be enough and nonconformity may reoccur until and
unless, investigation is carried out to find out its root cause and then, action is taken to
eliminate the root cause of the problem. This is known as the corrective action. In other
words, action taken to prevent reoccurrence of a detected nonconformity is corrective action.
In the above example of compressed air, corrective action would be to determine why filter
got dirty and to address the root cause to prevent its reoccurrence. For example, filter might
have become dirty because of its location in a dusty room and relocating the compressor in a
cleaner room or outside the room will be the corrective action.
Taking correction and corrective action should not be confined to internal or external audits
only as normally perceived and carried out. Several other sources like results of evaluations
of compliance reviews, failure to reach specified targets in monitoring and measurement
processes, failure to comply with operational control procedures, repeated significant
deviations, routine inspection of the plant etc should also be considered for raising non-
conformities. In other words, any activity not happening as per norms in day to day activity of
the organization is also nonconformity and hence, a Nonconformity can be raised on it calling
for correction and corrective action to take place.
Addressing NCs should be seen as a part of continual improvement process and these give
the opportunities to an organization for making improvement. Corrective actions are so
103
important for the organization that their status is reviewed by top management in every
Management Review Meeting.
10.2 Continual improvement
As committed in the energy policy, the organization is required to continually improve the
suitability, adequacy and effectiveness of the EnMS and also continually improve its energy
performance. Demonstrating continual energy performance improvement across the scope
and within the boundaries of the EnMS does not mean all EnPI values improve. Some EnPI
values improve, and others do not; but across the scope of the EnMS, the organization
demonstrates energy performance improvement.
Summary
From time to time, organization needs to review its entire EnMS journey as to where it
wanted to be, what was the situation, what was planned, what needed to be done, whether it
has reached there and ultimately what next to improve continually as shown in Figure 5.8.
review
Figure 5.8: EnMS Journey Review
104
6. MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION OF ENERGY

PERFORMANCE OF ORGANIZATION
6.1 Introduction
When facility owners/managers invest in energy efficiency projects, they would like to know
how much they have saved, how much they will save, and how long the savings will last.
Energy savings cannot be measured directly by meters or instruments, since they represent
the absence of energy use. Instead, energy savings are determined by comparing measured
energy use before and after implementation of an energy saving project with appropriate
adjustments for changes in conditions.
Actual energy use can be measured directly before the retrofit (pre-retrofit measurements)
and then after the retrofit (post-retrofit measurements). A number of factors, such as
weather, occupancy and production levels, influence measured variation of energy use over
time, irrespective of whether an Energy Efficiency Measure (EEM) has or has not been
implemented. The changes between pre-retrofit and post-retrofit measurements can be
declared as the energy savings caused by the EEM. The Measurement and Verification
(M&V) is the process of using measurements to reliably determine actual savings achieved
within an individual facility by an energy efficiency program.
When there is no doubt about the outcome of a project or there is no need to prove results to
third party, M&V may not be necessary. However, it is still useful to verify whether the
installed equipment is able to produce the expected savings. Verification of the potential to
achieve savings involves regular inspection and commissioning of equipment. However,
such verification of the potential to generate savings is not a measurement of savings.
M&V can be used for all types of energy, for any size of organization, for entire organisation
or part of it, for a process or product by M&V practitioners, energy auditors, regulatory
bodies or any other interested bodies for reporting energy performance results.
This chapter covers the general and basic M&V concepts and techniques and participants
may refer the mentioned standards, protocols and guidelines for deeper understanding
about M&V techniques.
6.2 Standards, Protocols and Guidelines
The International Standards Organization (ISO) released ISO 50001 in 2011 and updated it
in 2018 to help organizations reduce energy use and cost. ISO 50001 provides a framework
for anyone wanting to adopt energy management best practices. Subsequently, the
standards such as 50004, 50006 and 50015 were released to address the requirements for
setting up baseline and measuring progress towards successfully implementing 50001.
105
ISO 50004 (Energy management systems — Guidance for the implementation, maintenance
and improvement of an energy management system) on proper understanding for meeting
the requirements of ISO 50001.
ISO 50006:2014, Energy management systems -- Measuring energy performance using

energy baselines (EnB) and energy performance indicators (EnPI) -- General principles and
guidance provides practical guidance on how to meet the requirements of ISO 50001, and
thereby help manage their energy performance.
ISO 50015:2014, Energy management systems -- Measurement and verification of energy

performance of organizations -- General principles and guidance provides a set of principles
and guidelines for Measurement and Verification, thereby increasing the credibility of energy
performance.
The standard ISO 50015 does not specify calculation methods to be used; rather it
establishes a common understanding of M&V and how M&V could be applied to different
calculation methods. Thus, one has to refer to some other guidelines/protocols to learn
calculation methods and other technicalities involved.
A wide range of protocols and guidelines are used world over and most important amongst
those are: International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP);
ASHRAE Guideline 14-2002 Measurement of Energy and Demand Savings; M&V
Guidelines: Measurement and Veriﬁcation for Federal Energy Projects by FEMP of U.S.
Department of Energy; A Best Practice Guide to Measurement and Verification of Energy
Savings produced by the Australasian Energy Performance Contracting Association etc.
However, most widely used guideline/protocol worldwide by ESCO industry is IPMVP.
6.3 Purpose of M&V
M&V adds value by increasing the acceptability of energy performance and energy
performance improvement results. The credibility of results can encourage organisation to
improve energy performance even more. M&V techniques can be used by facility owners or
energy efficiency project investors for the following purposes:
Increase Energy Savings. Accurate determination of energy savings gives facility owners
and managers valuable feedback on implemented energy efficiency measures (EEMs). This
feedback helps them to adjust EEM design or operations to improve savings, achieve
greater persistence of savings over time and lower variability in savings.
Document Financial Transactions. For some projects, the energy efficiency savings are
the basis for performance-based financial incentives and/or a guarantee in a performance
contract. A well-defined and implemented M&V Plan can be the basis for documenting
performance for independent verification.
`
106
Enhance Financing for Efficiency Projects. A good M&V Plan increases the credibility of
projections on the outcome of efficiency investments. The project is more likely to be funded
if the confidence of investors and sponsors in energy efficiency project is improved.
Improve Engineering Design and Facility Operations and Maintenance. A good M&V
Plan encourages comprehensive project design by including all M&V costs in the project’s
economics. It also helps managers identify and reduce maintenance and operating problems
and also provides feedback for future project designs.
Manage Energy Budgets. Even where savings are not planned, M&V techniques can be
used to adjust for changing facility operating conditions in order to set proper budgets and
account for budget variances.
6.4 M&V Applications
Application of M&V is unique to each project depending upon its need. Some of the
important applications are being discussed here:
6.4.1 Energy Performance Contracts
Energy Performance Contract is an arrangement that allows organisation to make

improvements in energy efficiency without any investment upfront. The energy-performance
contractor or ESCO not only takes the responsibility for purchasing and installing the
equipment, but also maintenance throughout the contract. The contractor is paid based on
the performance of the installed equipment and only after the equipment actually reduces
the energy cost.
The ESCO bears the technical and financial risks during the contract period. Once the EEMs
are commissioned, the ESCO continues to measure or monitor energy use and costs of the
project for the contract term. Actual energy costs are compared with baseline costs to
determine total savings and the payments to the ESCO are subject to level of energy
savings achieved. The ESCO is usually required to repay shortfall in cost savings, or carry
out additional work over the contact period. At the end of the contract period, the full benefit
of cost savings is passed on to the facility owner. Without adequate M&V, there is no basis
for determining the amount of energy saved.
Typical contract period is between 410 yearsa relatively long period, but necessary to be
able to structure the contract so the guaranteed savings cover the capital repayment and on-
going costs to ensure a positive cash flow to the organization.
For industrial energy performance contract, the primary purpose of M&V is to demonstrate
short-term performance of a retrofit project. After demonstration, the plant management
takes over responsibility for operation, and usually does not seek an ongoing relationship
with an ESCO. The M&V Plan becomes part of the energy performance contract terms and
defines the measurements and computations to determine payments or demonstrate
`
107
compliance with guaranteed level of performance. Where a facility owner or manager does
not have the capability to review an M&V Plan or savings report, it may hire a third-party
verifier, separate from the energy-performance contractor.
6.4.2 Use of M&V in PAT Scheme
PAT requires specific energy efficiency improvements for the most energy intensive
industries. The scheme proposes improvements in energy intensity in each unit. The energy
intensity target is mandated for each unit depending upon its current efficiency with more
efficient units having lower targets than less efficient units.
The PAT framework has been developed considering the legal requirement under EC Act,
2001, energy performance of designated consumers, specific targets to be achieved,
effective monitoring and measurement, and sustenance of the energy savings. The scheme
aims at reduction of specific energy consumption, called ‘Gate to Gate Specific Energy
Consumption (GtG SEC)’ by individual designated consumers (DC). Target for reduction has
been set for individual DC.
The design intent of the PAT process is to insulate the DC from variability in SEC due to
changes in the uncontrollable factors. The baseline conditions are defined so that the impact
of uncontrollable variables can be neutralised by application of suitable adjustment factors
(‘Normalisation’ factors in PAT). The normalisation process for each sector has been
developed and templates to be filled have built-in provision for all possible variation for each
category covered under PAT. Thus, need to develop and implement a robust M&V
protocol for driving the normalisation process has already been achieved and
implemented in the documentation required to be filled by DCs.
With application of M&V in monitoring and verification of energy efficiency programme,

achievement of energy savings against reduction target can be credibly verified thereby
strengthening monitoring and verification of PAT scheme. For instance, the credibility of
ECerts in the PAT programme will depend upon transparent and reliable energy savings
achieved.
6.4.3 M&V for Effective ISO 50001 implementation
Organisation implementing ISO 50001 certification will find Measurement part of M&V and
data analysis very helpful in meeting some of the specific requirements of the standard.
For example, requirement on baseline talks about ‘adjustments’ to be made to the

baseline(s). There is another requirement on “Monitoring, measurement, analysis and
evaluation of energy performance and the EnMS” where organizations have been asked to
ensure that the key characteristics of its operations that determine energy performance are
monitored, measured and analysed at planned interval which again will require use of M&V
concepts. M&V also helps in preparing Energy Data Collection Plan which is one of the
requirements under ISO 50001. Thus, M&V is helpful in number of ways in meeting ISO
50001 requirements.
`
108
The other applications include facility managers wanting to properly account for energy
budget variances; organizations/energy users implementing energy conservation measures
and wanting to account for savings; Utility designing and implementing effective demand
side management; and new building designers seeking recognition for the sustainability of
their designs, e.g. LEED or GRIHA ratings.
6.5 Fundamental Principles of M&V
The fundamental principles of good M&V practice are described as follows:
ACCURATE. M&V reports should be as accurate as the M&V budget will allow. M&V costs
should normally be small relative to the monetary value of the savings being evaluated. M&V
cost should also be consistent with the financial implications of over- or under-reporting of a
project’s performance. Accuracy tradeoffs should be accompanied by increased
conservativeness in any estimates and judgements.
COMPLETE. The reporting of energy savings should consider all effects of a project. M&V
activities should use measurements to quantify the significant effects, while estimating all
others.
CONFIDENTIAL. All the parties involved in performing M&V should ensure that
confidentiality is maintained. In case any information necessary to perform M&V cannot be
shared with M&V practitioner, it should be mentioned in M&V Plan as it may affect the
results.
CONSERVATIVE. Where judgements are made about uncertain quantities, M&V

procedures should be designed to underestimate savings.
CONSISTENT. The reporting of a project’s energy effectiveness should be consistent

between different types of energy efficiency projects; different energy management
professionals for any one project; different periods of time for the same project; and energy
efficiency projects and new energy supply projects. ‘Consistent’ does not mean ‘identical,’
since it is recognized that any empirically derived report involves judgements which may not
be prepared identically by all M&V practitioners.
IMPARTIAL. In order to have confidence in reported results, it is essential that all stake
holders show impartial approach. Conflict of interest, if any, should be disclosed before
starting M&V process or as they arise during the course of M&V implementation.
RELEVANT. The determination of savings should measure the performance parameters of

concern, or least well known, while other less critical or predictable parameters may be
estimated.
`
109
TRANSPARENT & REPRODUCABLE. All M&V activities should be clearly and fully
disclosed to ensure transparency and reproducibility to which will contribute to confidence in
M&V reports.
6.6 The M&V Process
The complete M&V process involves the following six steps:
1. DEVELOP AN M&V PLAN. The preparation of an M&V Plan is the single most important
M&V activity in an energy savings project. It is central to proper savings determination, and
is the basis of verification. The first step in the M&V process is the identification of the
proposed energy efficiency measures (EEMs), which are typically identified during a detailed
energy audit or investment grade audit. In this step the client, ESCO and the M&V agent
need to all agree on the EEMs to be considered in the M&V plan and prepare a description
of the energy efficiency project, where it will be implemented, how and why. The expected
outcome including estimated energy and demand savings should be defined as these will
form the basis for M&V planning.
Advance planning ensures that all data needed for savings determination will be available
after implementation of the EEM(s) within an acceptable budget. The M&V Plan should be
developed while EEMs are being designed in order to include the cost of M&V when
deciding project economics; recording baseline data and methodology for savings
calculations while baseline conditions are still measurable and before any savings happen
and lastly before completing the design of any new metering equipment.
The recommended contents of an M&V plan are listed in Annexure-6-i. Each topic listed
therein should be considered in the M&V design, and be reported upon in an M&V plan that
is kept available for future reference. This activity may require installation of special meters
or other measurement devices to obtain baseline data. Any special meters added should be
carefully selected, calibrated, installed and commissioned.
2. VERIFY EEM INSTALLATION. After the EEM is installed, inspect the installed equipment
and prepare operating procedures to ensure that they conform to the design intent of the
EEM.
3. DATA GATHERING. Gather energy and operating data from the reporting period, as
defined in the M&V plan.
4. COMPUTE SAVINGS. Compute savings in energy and monetary units in accordance with
the M&V plan.
5. REPORT SAVINGS. The final step consists of the preparation of the energy savings
report in accordance with the M&V plan. The report describes the savings result, as well as
baseline and post-installation data, any adjustments made to the baseline, and the
justification. To the extent possible the report should also include comments on the precision
`
110
and confidence level of the results. Depending on the M&V plan, the reporting may be one-
off or on an ongoing basis over a period of time. Contents to be covered in report are
mentioned at Annexure-6-ii of this chapter.
6. REVIEW THE NEED TO REPEAT PROCESS. There may be a need to review and repeat
a part of or complete M&V process due to some factors such as measurement frequency
adopted is not the same as mentioned in M&V plan or measurement frequency other than
mentioned in M&V Plan is to be followed; results achieved are not accepted to any or all
stakeholders; complete effect of some issues or challenges encountered during M&V
process have not been considered etc.
The complete M&V Process can be understood with Figure 6.1:
Figure 6.1: Steps involved in M&V Process
6.7 Factors driving Energy Savings
There are two

fundamental factors that
drive energy savings:
performance and usage
(Figure 6.2). Performance
describes how much
energy is used for a
specific task; usage
describes how much of
the task is required, such
as the number of
operating hours during
which a piece of
equipment operates. For
example, in the simple
case of lighting,
performance is the power
Figure 6.2: Energy Savings Depend upon Performance and Usage
required to provide a
`
111
specific amount of light, and usage is the operating hours per year. For a chiller (which is a
more complex system), performance is defined as the energy required to provide a specific
amount of cooling (which varies with load), whereas usage is defined by the cooling load
profile and the total amount of cooling required. Both performance and usage are needed to
determine savings.
The area of the large box shown in the figure represents the total energy used in the
baseline case. Reduction in the rate of energy use (increase in performance) or reductions in
usage (decrease in operating hours) lead to reduced total energy use, which is represented
by the smaller box. The difference between the two boxes—the shaded area—represents
the energy savings.
6.8 Measuring Energy Savings and Examples
Energy or demand
savings cannot be
directly measured,
since savings
represent the
absence of energy
use or demand.
Instead, savings are
determined by
comparing measured
use or demand
before and after
implementation of a
program, making
suitable adjustments
for changes in
conditions. Figure 6.3: Energy Use of Industrial Boiler before and after ECM
As an example of an energy savings determination process, Figure 6.3 shows the energy
usage history of an industrial boiler before and after the addition of an energy efficiency
measure (EEM) to recover heat from its flue gases. At about the time of EEM installation,
plant production also increased.
To properly document the impact of the EEM (heat recovery), its energy effect must be
separated from the energy effect of the increased plant production. The ‘‘baseline energy’’
use pattern before EEM installation was studied to determine the relationship between
energy use and production. Following EEM installation, this baseline relationship was used
to estimate how much energy the plant would have used each month if there had been no
EEM (called the ‘‘adjusted baseline energy’’). The savings, or ‘avoided energy use’ is the
difference between the adjusted baseline energy and the energy that was actually measured
during the reporting period.
`
112
Without the adjustment for the change in production, the difference between baseline
energy and reporting period energy would have been much lower, under-reporting the
effect of the heat recovery.
It is necessary to segregate the energy effects of a savings program from the effects of other
simultaneous changes affecting the energy using systems. The comparison of before and
after energy use or demand should be made on a consistent basis, using the following
general Equation:
SAVINGS = (Baseline Energy Use – Post-Installation Energy Use) ± Adjustments
Baseline measurement period

Normally, this period spans a full operating cycle from maximum energy use to minimum so
as to represents all operating conditions of a normal operating cycle, unless, it is defined
differently for legal requirementsfor the first PAT cycle, the baseline period was considered
as three years. The baseline period should coincide with the period immediately before
implementation of the energy savings measures to provide a proper baseline for measuring
the effect of only the energy savings measure.
Reporting measurement period

The reporting measurement period shall have at least one normal operating cycle of the
equipment or facility, in order to fully represent the savings effectiveness in all normal
operating modes. The length of any reporting period shall be determined considering the life
of the EEM and the likelihood of degradation of originally achieved savings over time. The
reporting measurement period may also depend on legal or other compliance requirements.
Adjustments
The ‘‘Adjustments’’ term in this general equation is used to restate the energy use of the
baseline and reporting periods under a common set of conditions. This adjustments term
distinguishes proper savings reports from a simple comparison of usage or cost before and
after implementation of an EEM. Simple comparisons of utility costs without such
adjustments report only cost changes and fail to report the true performance of a project or
facility. To properly report savings, adjustments must account for the differences in
conditions between the baseline and reporting periods.
The following are two simplified examples of the need to use “adjustments”.
Lighting Retrofit: The energy savings guaranteed for a Call Centre lighting retrofit project
was based on a weekday two-shift operation. A separate sub-meter had been installed for
lighting circuits. Six months after the retrofit implementation, the Call Centre expanded its
services and moved to a 7-day three-shift operation.
At first, the annual energy savings calculation, ignoring the increased number of operational
hours in the post-retrofit period, did not show any energy savings.
`
113
Subsequently, the baseline energy consumption (12-month base year consumption for 5
days/2-shift operation) was adjusted to the increased operational hours (for 7 days/3-shift
operation) in the post-retrofit period showed the expected energy savings.
Additional Hospital Building: The energy savings for a hospital retrofit project was based
on using continuous monthly billing data from the utility meters measuring the entire site
consumption. During the second 12-months of the post-retrofit period, a new building
became operational. The additional energy consumption from this new building would have
negated the achieved energy savings. The consumption measured by a sub-meter installed
for the new building was used to adjust the post-retrofit energy measured by the utility
meters (which now included the new building’s consumption) back to only the buildings
within the original measurement boundary for the project.
Savings are commonly computed in the Equation by adjusting baseline energy use to the
conditions of the reporting period. Using this form of adjustment, savings can be thought of
as ‘‘avoided energy (or cost).’’ This common form of expression of savings is the amount of
energy (or rupees) not expended during the reporting period, as a result of the project.
6.9 The Four Basic Options or Methods for Conducting M&V
Four basic Options or Methods are available for evaluating avoided energy use. Figure 6.4
illustrates these options. Options A & B are called retrofit isolation methods and Options C
& D are called whole-facility methods and difference between them is where measurement
boundaries are drawn. Table 6.1 summarizes applications of different options. The
subsequent subsections provide the overview of each method, along with examples of its
applications for the energy conservation measures (EEMs).
Figure 6.4: Illustrations of M&V Options
`
114
Table 6.1 Four Basic Options or Methods for Evaluating Avoided Energy Use
Option Important Features EEM Examples

A Retrofit Isolation: Possible reduction in  Simple Lighting retrofits
Key Parameter measurement cost, but  Motor replacement
Measurement introduces some uncertainty in  Steam trap replacement
the estimated saving.
B Retrofit Isolation: More accurate results due to  Complex lighting retrofits
All Parameter measurements of all parameters  Motor Replacement
Measurement  Variable Speed Drive
 Renewable energy generation
C Whole Facility Need baseline as well as  Whole facility/building retrofits
Analysis reporting period data (involving lighting, HVAC and
other EEMs)
D Whole Facility: When there is no meter in the  New Building
Calibrated Simulation baseline, baseline data can be  Building Envelope improvement
‘manufactured’ under controlled  Energy management control
circumstances (simulation) system
 Variable air volume conversion
6.9.1 Measurement Boundary
Savings can be determined for an entire facility or for a portion of it, depending upon the
purposes of the reporting.
If the purpose of reporting is to help manage only the equipment affected by the savings
program, measurement boundary should be drawn around that equipment and all significant
energy requirements of the equipment within the boundary can be determined. This
approach is used in the Retrofit Isolation Options.
If the purpose of reporting is to manage total facility energy performance, the meter
measuring the supply of energy to the entire facility should be used to assess performance
and savings. The measurement boundary in this case involves the entire facility.
Options A and B are used if EEM is about improving the efficiency of operation of end-use
equipment, such as a lighting installation, chiller, pump or boiler etc. Options C & D are
concerned with the entire facility.
6.9.2 Option A  Retrofit Isolation: Key Parameter Measurement
This is the simplest method and involves the lowest cost. When savings measurement is
concerned with a single EEM, ‘‘isolation’’ meter is installed to measure the energy use of the
system affected by the EEM, separate from the energy use for the rest of the facility. Saving
is determined by field measurement of the key performance parameter which defines the
energy use of the EEM’s affected system and the success of the project.
`
115
Meter location (i.e. the measurement boundary) should include as many of the significant
energy impacts of the EEM as the M&V budget can allow. The frequency of measurement
ranges from short term to continuous, depending on the expected variations in the measured
parameter, and the length of the reporting period.
Parameters not selected for field measurement are estimated. Estimations can be based on
historical data, manufacturer’s specifications, or engineering judgment. Justification for
estimating the parameters should be documented.
The savings are verified by engineering calculations using short term or continuous post-
retrofit measurements and stipulations. The possible error in savings arising from
stipulations rather than measurement is also evaluated and documented.
Energy impacts which are not measured (i.e. which are outside the measurement boundary)
are called interactive effects and should be estimated.
Example: The type of lamp fitting in a lighting installation is changed to more efficient type,
while maintaining the same quality of light. The energy used by the old and new lighting
system can be measured, and savings can be calculated. The number of hours of use is
stipulated, if the lights are controlled manually.
Savings kWh = (Old energy use kW – New energy use kW)

X Stipulated hours of operation
In the above case, measurement boundary should include power to the light. However,
lowering lighting energy may also lower any cooling (air-conditioning) requirements. Such
cooling energy attributed to lights cannot be easily measured. They are interactive effects
which may have to be estimated, rather than included within the measurement boundary.
6.9.3 Option B – Retrofit Isolation: All Parameter Measurement
Option B is similar to Option A in that it draws a measurement boundary around the EEM,
smaller than the entire facility. However, it differs from Option A in requiring measurement of
all EEM parameters used to compute energy, or measurement of energy use itself.
Savings are determined by field measurement of the energy use of the EEM-affected
system. Measurement frequency ranges from short term to continuous, depending on the
expected variations in the savings and the length of the reporting period.
Savings are calculated by short term or continuous measurements of baseline and reporting
period energy, and/or engineering computations using measurements of proxies of energy
use.
In the earlier example given in 6.9.2, if automatic lighting control is included in the EEM,
operating hours cannot be stipulated. Savings from the lighting retrofit project should be
reported by measuring both operating periods and load change.
`
116
Operating periods might be measured by lighting loggers inserted in randomly selected

fixtures to record. The lighting system energy use is then computed by multiplying the
measured load change by the measured operating periods for both the baseline and
reporting periods.
Alternatively, electricity consumption (kWh) with electrical energy meter(s) before and after
ECM at lighting panel can be measured for both the baseline and reporting periods.
Savings kWh = Old energy use kWh – New energy use kWh
6.9.4 Option C – Whole Facility
This is used for a single major EEM or multiple EEMs within a whole facility or building.
Energy use is measured by utility meters for at least 12 months of the base year and
continuously throughout the post-retrofit period. The actual measured consumption in the
post-retrofit period is compared with an estimate of what the consumption would have been,
in the post retrofit period, without the EEM.
The accuracy of this estimation is the key to this Option, using techniques from simple billing
data comparison to multivariate regression analysis. The process involves using historical
data (base year) to develop a model of the energy performance of the facility, then using the
baseline model to estimate the “baseline energy” in the post-retrofit period that would have
been measured if the EEM had not been installed.
The post-retrofit saving is the difference between the estimated “baseline energy” in the
post-retrofit and the actual energy measured in the post-retrofit period.
Option C is intended for projects where expected savings are large compared to the random
or unexplained energy variations which occur at the whole-facility level. If savings are large
compared to the unexplained variations in the baseline energy data, identifying savings will
be easy. Also the longer the period of savings analysis after the EEM installation, the less
significant is the impact of short term unexplained variations. Typically savings should
exceed 10% of the baseline energy for option C to be applied. Under this Option, continuous
measurements of the entire facility’s energy use are taken throughout the reporting period.
Example: A entire building is retrofitted with numerous EEMs including lighting, HVAC,
operator training, and occupant energy awareness campaign. In addition to their individual
contribution to savings the EEMs also interact (e.g. reducing lighting impacts on heating and
cooling) so the overall effect is complex. In this case, Option C is recommended for reporting
comparative energy usage between the two periods.
Option C involves use of utility meters, whole facility meters, or sub-meters to assess the
energy performance of an entire facility. The measurement boundary encompasses either
the whole facility or a major section. This option determines the collective savings of all
EEMs applied to the part of the facility monitored by the energy meter. Since whole facility
`
117
meters are used, savings reported under Option C include the positive or negative effects of
any non EEM changes made in the facility.
6.9.5 Option D – Calibrated Simulation
This is used for a single EEM or multiple EEMs within a whole building but where no base
year data are available, either because no records are available or, because it is a new
building. Post-retrofit measurements are used to calibrate the simulation model, and base
year energy use is generated by the simulation model.
This Option is not used widely as it requires specialist simulation skills and software. It
requires considerable skill in calibrated simulation.
Example-1: Multifaceted energy management program impacting many systems in a

facility and where no meter or facility existed in the baseline period. After the new
energy efficient building has been operating for 12 months. A simulation model based on
technical inputs has been developed and calibrated with the actual operational consumption.
This model can be used to estimate the likely consumption if the various EEMs had not been
included. The consumption difference is a measure of the impact of the EEMs.
Example-2: New Building Designed to Be Better than Code

A new building is being designed to use less energy than required by the ECBC (5 star
rated) code. In order to qualify for say a government incentive payment, the owner was
required to show that the building’s energy use during the first year of operation after
commissioning and full occupancy was less than 60% of what it would have been if it had
been built just to comply with ECBC code.
Simulation software was used to predict energy use of the building under a known set of
conditions. Post-retrofit measurements were used to calibrate the simulation model, and
base year energy use was generated. The simulation was adjusted to match with the
calibration data as much as possible. ‘‘Calibration error’’ is the set of differences between the
modelled and calibration actual data points. Computer simulation was used extensively
throughout the building design process to help meet a target energy use equal to 60% of the
code.
6.9.6 Selecting the Option
The selection of the M&V Option is a decision that is made collectively by the client, the
ESCO and the M&V practitioner. The choice depends on the characteristics of the energy
saving project, the specific EEM(s) proposed, data availability, budget, and professional
judgment.
Options A and B are typically used if the EEM is about improving the efficiency of end-use
equipment. They are also often selected when higher levels of uncertainty or risk in
quantifying savings are acceptable.
`
118
Option A minimizes the costs of measuring and monitoring the energy savings.
Measurement and verification costs for these options can be reduced by using statistically
significant random samples when there is a large number of similar components involved
(e.g., lighting fixture retrofits).
Option C should be used when there are more than one EEM and we cannot separate out
their individual savings contributions and EEM interactions.
Option D should be used when no measurement data is available. It is not used very often
for M&V as it requires the services of an energy simulation expert and hence adds to the
cost of M&V.
With Options C & D, uncertainty is reducedaccuracy in determining energy savings is

improved. M&V cost will be higher due to increased use of metering, sub-metering, digital
equipment, and more complex monitoring systems (hardware) that are used in capturing
information to quantify savings. Such monitoring equipment might include sensing devices
such as temperature sensors, flow meters, and pressure switches; communications
equipment; or programmable controllers.
6.10 Uncertainty and M&V Cost
Measurement is one of the basic elements of M&V. The measurement of any physical
quantity includes errors because no measurement instrument is 100% accurate. Errors are
the differences between observed and true energy use due to various factors such as option
selected, the number of EEMs and the interactions among them, energy flows across the
measurement boundary in Options A, B, or D, level of effort for establishing baseline
conditions, sample sizes used for metering representative equipment, duration of the
reporting period etc.
Thus, any statement of measured energy savings includes some degree of uncertainty. A
goal for each M&V project is to balance the uncertainty in the reported savings values with
the cost of performing M&V.
Reductions in uncertainty are obtained by limiting errors in the measurements and analyses
conducted. For example, higher precision meters for measuring energy consumption may
produce a final result with lower uncertainty, but cost will be more. Similarly, when the M&V
project relies on sampling, a larger sample size will usually result in higher confidence level
that will cost more. The participants responsible for creating and approving the M&V plan
must consider how much accuracy they require, and at what cost (Figure 6.5).
`
119
Figure 6.5: Balancing Uncertainty and M&V Costs
However, there are certain norms to have a check on M&V cost. Overall M&V annual cost to
determine savings should always be less than 10% of the annual project cost savings and
should normally be between 3-5% for ESCO projects.
6.11 What is not M&V?
6.11.1 Difference between “Measurement & Verification” and “Monitoring and

Verification”
People often confuse whether M in M&V is for ‘measurement’ or for ‘monitoring’. The basic
difference between the two is of approach and purpose. Measurement and Verification
(M&V) is the process of using measurement to reliably determine actual savings created
within an individual facility by implementing an energy management program. Savings
cannot be directly measured, since they represent the absence of energy use. Instead,
savings are determined by comparing measured use before and after implementation of a
project, making appropriate adjustments for changes in conditions.
On the other hand, Monitoring is the process of observing energy use for prediction, cost-
control, diagnostic purposes and even legal compliance and may or may not involve
measurement. All standards (ISO 50015) and protocols insist on inclusion of measurement
in “Measurement & Verification”. Hence, we should always consider M for “measurement’ in
M&V and not as “monitoring”.
6.11.2 Difference between M&V and Monitoring & Targeting
Monitoring and targeting includes the traditional energy monitoring, accounting, analysis and
reporting functions. It has additional functionality that corrects the measured energy for
changes in factors that influence consumption over time, such as weather, area, and
`
120
occupancy and production levels. M&T is very useful in identifying (targeting) EEMs based
on comparative information between one period and another.
Even though there are similarities, Monitoring and targeting does not have the same focused
purpose, discipline, rigour and transparency required for M&V. M&T ignores non-routine
adjustments and interactive effects, whereas M&V considers such effects fully. M&V is
concerned with measurement of actual energy performance while Monitoring & Targeting is
concerned with the gap between actual energy performance and expected energy
performance (target) to plan corrective measures.
6.12 Conclusion
M&V protocols and guidelines have been developed to provide a consistent and verifiable
approach for determining savings for all types of energy savings projects. There are inherent
errors and risks that contribute to savings uncertainty. A balance has to be found between
the M&V cost and the savings uncertainty, considering project objectives and constraints.
The following should be always remembered about M&V:
 M&V should be integral part of all types of energy savings project.

 There is no absolutely correct savings number. There is always some uncertainty.
 Savings cannot be measured. They are determined from the pre- and post-retrofit
energy measurements. ·
 The measurement boundary for an EEM or a group of EEMs has to be defined.
 The Baseline Energy in the post-retrofit period is the base year Energy adjusted to the
post-retrofit conditions.
 The “savings” are the difference between the adjusted Baseline Energy and the actual
Post-Retrofit Energy, both in the post-retrofit period.
 A foundation for proper M&V is laid by preparing, documenting and following an M&V
Plan
 The basic approach comprises planning, designing, and implementing project-specific
M&V and reporting and verifying the savings.
 The M&V concepts and methodologies are quite simple and are based on common
sense and good quality management practices.
`
121
Annexure 6– i
M&V Plan
The preparation of an M&V Plan is a recommended part of savings determination. It also allows to
direct actions; ensure proper information is archived for later use and resolve major issues to avoid
possible conflicts between parties involved that may arise once results (savings) are known.
Advance planning ensures that all data needed for savings determination will be available after
implementation of the EEM(s), within an acceptable budget. Data from the baseline and details of the
EEMs may be lost over time. Therefore, record them for future reference in case conditions change or
EEMs fail. Documentation should be easy to find and easy to understand by verifiers and others,
because years may pass before these data are needed. A complete M&V Plan should include
discussion of the following topics:
1. Scope & Purpose – This should include a. the organization for whom the M&V is undertaken, b.
Purpose(s) of M&V, c. parties responsible for M&V, their roles and relationship with organization, d.
confidentially requirements, e. parties who will receive the results, f. M&V method used, g. potential
consequential effects etc.
2. EEM details - Describe the EEM, its intended result, and the operational verification procedures
that will be used to verify successful implementation of each EEM. Identify any planned changes to
conditions of the baseline, such as unoccupied building temperature settings.
3. Selected Option and Measurement Boundary - Specify the Option which will be used to determine
savings. Identify the measurement boundary of the savings determination. The boundary may be as
narrow as the flow of energy through a pipe or wire, or as broad as the total energy use of one or
many facilities. Describe the nature of any interactive effects beyond the measurement boundary
together with their possible effects.
4. Baseline: Period, Energy and Conditions - Document the facility’s baseline conditions and energy
data, within the measurement boundary. In energy performance contracts, baseline energy and
baseline conditions may be defined by either the owner or the ESCO, providing the other party is
given adequate opportunity to verify them. This baseline documentation should include: a)
Identification of the baseline period b) All baseline energy consumption and demand data, c) All
independent variable data coinciding with the energy data (e.g. production rate, ambient temperature)
d) All static factors coinciding with the energy data.
5. Reporting Period - Identify the reporting period. This period may be as short as an instantaneous
measurement during commissioning of an EEM, or as long as the time required to recover the
investment cost of the EEM program.
6. Basis for Adjustment - Declare the set of conditions to which all energy measurements will be
adjusted. The conditions may be those of the reporting period or some other set of fixed conditions.
7. Analysis Procedure - Specify the exact data analysis procedures, algorithms and assumptions to be
used in each savings report. For each mathematical model used, report all of its terms and the range of
independent variables over which it is valid.
8. Energy Prices - Specify the energy prices that will be used to value the savings, and whether and
how savings will be adjusted if prices change in future.
`
122
9. Data gathering Plan and Meter Specifications - Specify the metering points, and period(s) if
metering is not continuous. For non-utility meters, specify: meter characteristics, meter reading and
witnessing protocol, meter commissioning procedure, routine calibration process, and method of
dealing with lost data.
10. Roles and Responsibilities - Assign responsibilities for reporting and recording the energy data,
independent variables and static factors within the measurement boundary during the reporting period.
11. Expected Accuracy - Evaluate the expected accuracy associated with the measurement, data
capture, sampling and data analysis. This assessment should include qualitative and any feasible
quantitative measures of the level of uncertainty in the measurements and adjustments to be used in
the planned savings report.
12. Resources required - Define the budget and the resources required for the savings determination,
both initial setup costs and ongoing costs throughout the reporting period.
13. Report Format - Specify how results will be reported and documented. Formats to be used for
reporting results need to be finalized.
Depending upon the circumstances of each project, some additional specific topics should also be
covered in a complete M&V Plan:
a. For Option A, document detailing stipulated parameters with justification and the overall
significance of these parameters to the total expected saving, the uncertainty inherent in the
stipulation; and periodic inspection in reporting period
b. For Option D, name and version number of simulation software; Input data and method of
measuring any parameters used to support input values; Output from software; calibration data, future
changes and accuracy achieved by simulation.
`
123
ANNEXURE 6ii
CONTENTS OF A FULL M&V REPORT
M&V Reports should be prepared and presented as defined in M&V Plan. These should
include at least:
 Observed data of the reporting period: the measurement period, start and end points in
time, the energy data, and the values of the independent variables
 Description and justification for any corrections made to observed data
 For Option A, the agreed estimated values
 Energy price schedule used
 All details of any baseline non-routine adjustment performed. Details should include an
explanation of the change in conditions since the baseline period; all observed facts and
assumptions, and the engineering calculations leading to the adjustment.
 Computed savings in energy, demand and monetary units.
 Input from the review of the report with the facility operating staff
M&V reports should be written to their readers’ levels of understanding. Energy managers
should review the M&V reports with the facility’s operating staff. Such reviews may uncover
useful information about how the facility uses energy, or where operating staff could benefit
from more knowledge of the energy-consumption characteristics of their facility. While
preparing reports, the needs and understanding levels of the users of the M&V reports should
also be kept in mind.
`
124
ANNEXURE 6iii
M&V CASE STUDY: EEM: STEAM TRAP REPLACEMENT
A. M&V Option A selected.
This measure involves replacing steam traps. This will improve return water quantity and temperature,
which will reduce boiler consumption and water treatment chemicals for makeup water.
B. M&V Plan Description
Option A (Retrofit Isolation with Key Parameter Measurement) will be used to quantify the energy
consumption savings associated with steam trap replacement.
C. Why M&V Option A was selected?
 This measure is detailed with multiple measurements and calculations required to verify savings. It
is recommended to perform a routine steam trap assessment to verify savings are being
maintained.
 Option A is recommended for verification of the performance of this EEM.
 Performance parameters (Table 6.2) include a steam trap assessment of the entire facility. This will
identify the failed traps. Once the failed traps have been identified, the steam pressure and orifice
size will be required to calculate losses. This will be done during the baseline development, post-
installation, and performance period with 20% of the steam traps being assessed every year and
rotated.
Table 6-2: M&V Plan Performance and Operational Parameters
Parameter Period Population Measurement
Steam Trap Assessment
Performance Baseline Entire facility Thermograph/ultrasonic
Performance Post-Installation Entire facility Thermograph/ultrasonic
Performance Performance 20% rotating Thermograph/ultrasonic
Steam Pressure and Orifice Size
Performance Baseline For all traps failed Spot measurement
Performance Post-Installation For all traps failed Spot measurement
Performance Performance Based on baseline None
Parameter Period Population Measurement
Steam Trap Operation
Operation Baseline Entire facility Hours based on boiler logs
Operation Post-Installation Based on baseline None
Operation Performance Based on baseline None
D. M&V Performance Assurance Activities
 Verify failed traps have been properly replaced.

 Verify savings through calculated losses by verifying trap orifice size and steam pressure.
 Obtain customer approval of all stipulated performance and operational parameters shown in the
baseline and post-installation parameter value tables.
`
125
7. BEST PRACTICES, TECHNOLOGIES AND CASE STUDIES 

ELECTRICAL AND THERMAL SYSTEM
7.1 Introduction
Energy efficiency should be viewed as an energy reserve just like fossil fuel reserves. There
is a very significant potential (1525%) to improve industrial energy efficiency using existing,
proven technologies that are cost-effective today, as well as applying new technologies. Best
practices in Electrical and Thermal, along with relevant case studies, covering electrical and
thermal areas are presented in this chapter.
Electrical Thermal
Energy Efficient Motors Pressure reducing turbine
Applications of VFD Heat pump
o Fans Heat Pipe applications
o Pumps Condensing boiler
o Compressors Absorption chillers
High COP chillers Trigeneration
Internet of Things (IOT) Applications Organic Rankine Cycle
for Chiller System
7.2 Best Practices and Technologies in Electrical System
7.2.1 Case for Energy Efficient Motors
Electric motors convert electrical power into mechanical power within a motor‐driven system.
In industrial applications, electric motor driven systems are used for various applications
such as pumping, compressed air, fans, conveyors etc. The system approach for optimizing
energy efficiency of motor-driven system is recommended, which include the following:
Use of energy efficient motors;

Selecting the driven equipment―like pumps, fans, compressors, transmissions,
variable speed drives―right type and size, and high efficiency;
Efficient operation of the complete system.
From the motor perspective, when buying a new motor, operating cost and not just the
purchase cost should be the main consideration. In a single year the cost of energy can be
up to 10 times the purchase cost. Over the life of the motor it is by far the most significant
cost. Old motors, typically more than 15 years and operating for over 5000 hours in a year
can be considered for replacement with energy-efficient motors to reduce energy costs.
IE Classification
International Efficiency (IE) is a new trend around the world in describing the energy
efficiency of motors. The IE classes IE1 to IE4 are well developed, while the IE5 is under
126
preparation. The classification method allows for further improvement in the energy
efficiency of motors. The IE Classification as per IEC 60034-30-1 is shown in Table 7.1.
Table 7.1: IE Classes

Class Type Class Number
Standard efficiency IE1
High efficiency IE2
Premium efficiency IE3
Super premium efficiency IE4
IE4 represents the highest energy efficiency while IE1 represents the least energy efficiency.
In other words, the higher the class number, the higher will be the motor efficiency. IE5 is to
be incorporated in the next edition of IEC 60034-30-1, with a goal to obtain an energy loss
reduction of 20% relative to IE4.
Energy Savings with Energy Efficient Motor

The annual energy saving by upgrading to more efficient motor is calculated as per the
following formula:
The energy saving (%) can be calculated using the following formula:
If the annual energy consumption of motor is not available, it can be estimated with the
following formula:
Replacing IE1 motor with IE3

The information regarding the old motor and the operation pattern is as follows:
Rated Power 37 kW
No. of Poles 4
Efficiency 91.2 (IE1)
Operating Hours per Day 10
Operating Days per Year 360
The annual energy consumption is calculated as follows:

127
Annual Energy Consumption (kWh per Year) = 37 kW/0.912 x 10 hours per day x 360 days/
year = 1,46,052 kWh
It is proposed to replace IE1 is replaced with IE3 motor as per following specifications:
Rated Power 37 kW
No. of Poles 4
Designed Lifespan 400,000 hours
The percentage of energy-saving and the anticipated annual energy saving is calculated
below:
Replacing IE1 motor with IE4

If the new motor is IE4 with following specifications, energy savings is as follows:
Rated Power 37 kW
No. of Poles 4
Designed Lifespan 400,000 hours
The percentage of energy-saving and the anticipated annual energy saving is calculated as
follows:
Typical motor rating and efficiency of IE1, IE2, IE3 and IE4 is shown in Figure 7.1.
128
Figure 7.1: Efficiency classes IE1 to IE4

Source: IEC 60034-30-1
7.2.2 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Applications
The potential for energy saving from speed reduction depend on the characteristics of the
load being driven. There are three main types of load prevalent in industry: variable torque,
constant torque and constant power.
Variable torque load

Variable torque loads are typical of centrifugal
fans and pumps and have the largest energy
saving potential. They are governed by the Affinity
Laws which describe the relationship between the
speed and other variables:
The change in flow varies in proportion to the

change in speed:
Q1/Q2 = (N1/N2)
The change in head (pressure) varies in

proportion to the change in speed squared: Figure 7.2: Variable Torque Load
H1/H2 = (N1/N2)2
The change in power varies in proportion to the change in speed cubed (Figure 7.2):
P1/P2 = (N1/N2)3
Where, Q = volumetric flow, H = head (pressure), P = power, N = speed (rpm)
The powerspeed relationship is also referred to as the ‘Cube Law’. When controlling the
flow by reducing the speed of the fan or pump, a relatively small change in speed will result
in a large reduction in power absorbed.
129
Constant torque load

Typical constant torque applications include
conveyors, agitators, crushers, positive
displacement pumps and air compressor. On
constant torque loads the torque remains
constant with speed and the power absorbed is
directly proportional to the speed (Figure 7.3);
this means that the power consumed will be in
direct proportion to the useful work done, for
example a 50% reduction in speed will result in
50% less power being absorbed or consumed.

Figure 7.3: Constant torque Load
Although the potential energy savings from
speed reductions are not as attractive as that with variable torque loads, they are still worth
investigating to achieve efficient process control and energy savings.
Constant Power
On constant power loads, the power absorbed is
constant while the torque is inversely proportional to
the speed (Figure 7.4). The torque loading is a
function of speed up to 100% operating speed. As the
speed of the operation is decreased, the torque
increases so that the power required remains
essentially constant. Typical applications are saws,
grinders, and machine tools. The installation of VFD is
not recommended for constant power applications.
VFD for Fans Figure 7.4: Constant Power Control
Dampers are often used to regulate the flow of

fans in applications such as most kinds of
ventilation systems, air extract systems, industrial
cooling, and combustion-air control and flue gas
evacuation systems for boilers. With damper
control, the input power reduces as the flow rate
decreases. If dampers are replaced with VFD
control, input power is reduced much more
significantly as per cube law as shown in Figure
7.5.
One of the limitations of VFDs is that the speed Figure 7.5: Damper versus VFD
can be reduced below 30% as cooling capacity of
the motor will be affected.
130
VFD versus Outlet Damper in a Fan

The power consumptions of fan with variable speed method and outlet damper method, and
their associated costs of operation are determined for a given load profile as shown.
Flow Duty Cycle

(% Flow) (% of time)
100 10
80 40
60 40
40 10
100% flow is equivalent to 100 CFM
Outlet damper control

For each duty (operating) point, the required power corresponding to the fan flow can be
obtained from the fan curve. This power is multiplied by the fraction of the total time, for
which the fan operates at this point. These "weighted horsepower" are then summed to
produce an average horsepower that represents the average energy consumption of the
fan over the entire duty cycle.
Flow (CFM) Duty Cycle (%) Power (HP) Weighted Power(HP)

100 10 35 3.5
80 40 35 14
60 40 31 12.4
40 10 27 2.7
TOTAL (Outlet damper control) 32.6
VFD control
To assess the energy savings with VFD, calculations are carried out using flow-power
relationship: P2/P1 = (Q2/Q1)3 as Q2/Q1 = N2/N1. When Q1 = 100% and W1 = 35 HP, the
values of W 2 for various values of Q2 are as follows:
Q2 100 80 60 40
W2 35 18 7.56 2.24
These calculated values match with the points available on the fan curve. The weighted
power can be calculated as follows:
Flow (CFM) Duty Cycle Power (HP) Weighted Power(HP)

100 10 35 3.5
80 40 18 7.2
60 40 7.56 3.024
40 10 2.24 0.224
TOTAL (VFD control) 13.9
131
The cost savings with VFD if the system operates 18 hours per day (540 hours per
month), and the cost of electricity is Rs. 5.5 per kWh.
Parameters Outlet damper Variable speed

Weighted Horsepower 32.6 13.9
kW/HP 0.746 0.746
hours/month 540 540
kWh/month 13,133 5,599
Cost (Rs./KWh) 5.5 5.5
Total operating cost(INR) 72,229 30,797
Savings (INR) 41,432
VFD for Pumps
Unlike VFD applications for fans, pump speed adjustment should be carefully evaluated. The
best application for VFD is on pumping system with only frictional head and no static head.
Using a VFD to control the flow rate from a pump rather than using simple throttle control,
can result in large power savings and therefore cost savings. For example, when flow
demand decreases by 50%, the head is reduced by 75%, and the power absorbed is
reduced by 20%
On pumping systems with a high static head, for example, boiler feed-water pumps or high
lift applications, where the pump must overcome the resistance to lifting the water before any
flow starts, the energy savings with VSDs will be reduced. This is because higher speeds
need to be maintained in order to overcome the additional resistance due to the high static
head.
Higher static head, lower VFD savings in pumps
For pumps with high static head, Affinity Laws cannot be directly applied. For example
consider a system that utilizes a 5 HP pump, operating at 60% flow continuously. If static
head is ignored and Affinity Law is applied, 60% flow would allow VFD to modulate to 60%
speed, reducing the power required from 5 HP to 1.1 HP. Energy savings is 78%
However, if the system has a minimum static head of 30 ft (9.1 m) and the design static
head is 40 ft. (12.2 m). If the required speed to overcome this static pressure is included,
calculated power is 4.4 HP. Energy savings is now only 15%.
In high static head applications, reducing pump speed also risks inducing vibrations and
creating performance problems that are similar to those found when a pump operates
against its shutoff head (zero flow through the system). Operators should review the
performance of VFDs in such applications and consult VFD manufacturers so as to avoid the
damage that may result when a pump operates too slowly against high static head.
132
In applications, where the head must be kept constant but flow may vary, installing a variable
frequency drive is not recommended. Instead, a multiple pump system where pump will start
or stop if discharge pressure starts to drop or rise is recommended.
For positive displacement pump, energy consumption tends to be directly proportional to the
volume pumped and energy saving is easily quantified.
VFD Application Guidelines in Pumping System
Applications where the static head is greater than 50% of the total head are not usually good
applications for VFD variable speed pumping. This is because of the following reasons:
 The system curve is very flat, and the pump efficiency at the reduced speed operating
point falls off rapidly. The opportunity for energy savings at reduced speed is minimal.
 The flat system curve also limits the useable speed reduction range.
For variable speed applications, select pumps with the full speed operating point to
the right of BEP whenever possible.
 Selecting operating point to the right of BEP improves efficiency at reduced speed since
the intersection point with the system curve moves toward BEP when speed is reduced.
 Variable speed applications often allow the use of smaller, less expensive pumps.
VFD for Air compressors
The potential for energy savings from using VFDs for air compressors will depend on the
control system being replaced. Typical control adopted in industry is load/unload control
(Figure 7.5). Unlike fans and pumps most air compressors present a constant-torque load
and have less scope for energy savings, nevertheless it is economically viable to fit VFDs to
air compressors where the average loading is less than 75%.
Load/unload control
Compressor pressure is set between high pressure and low pressure, which is determined
based on pressure required in the system. Compressor unloads when high pressure is
reached and loads when low pressure is reached. When demand for compressed air is fully
met―when compressed air supply is not needed―the suction valve of the compressor
closes and the compressor becomes unloaded. When the demand for compressed air
supply is resumed, the suction valve opens and the compressor becomes loaded. The
compressor suction valve is opened or closed to match supply with demand as sensed by a
pressure regulator. This type of control is also called suction valve control (Figure 7.6).
Typical unloading power is 25% of full load power for reciprocating compressor and 3540%
of full load power for screw compressor.
133
Figure 7.6: Load/Unload Control
Inverter (VFD) control

In inverter control or variable frequency drive (VFD) control, the speed of the compressor
motor varies with air demand. When air demand is less, the speed of the motor is reduced
and vice versa. As a result, constant pressure is maintained (Figure 7.7). There is a direct
relationship between compressor power and air delivered. Inverter changes the speed of the
motor by converting 50-Hz alternating current to direct current, and then reconverts it to AC
at the frequency required to run the motor at the desired speed.
Figure 7.7: VFD Control
Power savings with Load/Unload (Suction control) vs VFD
Three cases comparing Load/Unload with VFD are presented for a screw compressor of
following specification:
Type: Screw Type Control: Suction Valve and

VFD control
Rated capacity: 60 m3/hr Motor rating: 7.5 kW
Rated pressure: 830 kPa (Maximum) Annual running hours:: 5400
134
Case I
Flow Rate Pressure Power On/Un loading time Average Power
Operation 3
(m /hr) (kPa) (kW) (sec) (kW)
Loading 6.6 33.6
30 500-600 5.37
Unloading 4.3 38.5
-
VFD 30 550 4.5 4.50
-
Savings per annum (kWh) 4708
Case II
Operation 3
Loading 7.2 40.5
30 600-700 6.09
Unloading 4.75 33.5
-
VFD 30 610 4.8 4.80
-
Case III
Operation 3
Loading 6.75 53
40 500-600 5.89
Unloading 4.3 28.5
-
VFD 40 550 5.3 5.30
-
7.2.3 High COP Chillers
In many commercial and industrial facilities, space cooling and process refrigeration
represents one of the largest energy costs. Vapour compression chillers are used
extensively for large facility space cooling and in industrial process liquid cooling. Improving
chiller efficiency can significantly reduce energy usage without affecting comfort or
production.
A liquid chilling system cools water or secondary coolant for air conditioning or process
refrigeration. Liquid (usually water) is supplied to the facility at a temperature of 70C (for air
conditioning) and is returned at some higher temperature after it has removed heat from the
facility. Under full load conditions, the water will usually undergo a 100C temperature rise. As
the chiller removes heat from this water, it rejects this heat into the ambient air, whether
directly by means of a refrigerant-to-air heat exchanger, or indirectly by means of a separate
water loop and a cooling tower.
A chiller has four primary components: compressor, compressor drive, evaporator, and
condenser. The evaporator and condenser serve as heat exchangers which transfer heat
135
between the water and the refrigerant. Chillers can be mainly categorized based on the type
of compressor as electrically driven vapour compression-type chillers, or absorption-type
chillers.
Vapour compression chillers utilize electric motors to drive the compressor. These chillers
can be further categorized according to the type of compressor being used.
Reciprocating Compressor Chillers are well-suited for air-cooled condensers and low-
temperature application.
Centrifugal Compressor Chillers are similar to fans or blowers. They are generally quieter,
require less maintenance, and have less vibration than reciprocating compressors. They are
mostly water-cooled.
Screw Compressor Chillers are more compact than either the centrifugal or reciprocating
compressor. Screw type systems are better suited for low temperature applications.
Scroll Compressor Chillers They are relatively new in commercial applications, very quiet,
and efficient. Scroll compressors are available up to 60 tons.
When comparing chillers for energy efficiency, auxiliary energy requirements such as
condenser and chilled water pumps, cooling tower fans, as well as the cost of water
treatment should also be taken into account.
Vapour compression chillers can be compared based on the input power in kilo Watts
required to deliver one ton of refrigeration or air conditioning, or KW/Ton. A lower kW/ton
rating indicates higher efficiency. Few terms are defined here.
Tons: One ton of cooling is the amount of heat absorbed by one ton of ice melting in one
day, which is equivalent to 12,000 Btu per hour (h), or 3.516 kilowatts (thermal) or 3024
kCal/hr.
.
Coefficient of performance (COP): The ratio of the cooling capacity output power to the
power input to compressor at any given set of rating conditions, expressed as watts of output
per watts of input.
kW/ton = 3.516/COP; COP = 3.516/(kW/ton)
Chillers are broadly classified based on the compressor type, and type of cooling (air-cooled
or water-cooled). Manufacturers' literature for vapour compression chillers will generally give
the input KW along with the cooling capacity in tons. Although each chiller will have its own
rating assigned by the manufacturer, typical efficiency ranges along with sizes are given in
Table 7.2.
136
Table 7.2: Typical Compressor Sizes and Efficiencies

Compressor Type Compressor KW/Ton Sizes (Tons)
Air-Cooled
Reciprocating 1.0 - 1.3 3 - 450
Centrifugal 0.7 - 0.9 80 - 1300
Screw 0.7 - 1.2 45 - 380
Scroll up to 1.2 up to 60
Auxiliary KW/Ton = 0.19 KW/Ton
Water-Cooled
Reciprocating 0.8 - 0.9 3 - 450
Centrifugal 0.5 - 0.8 80 - 8500
Screw 0.6 - 0.7 50 - 1300
Auxiliary KW/Ton = 0.21 KW/Ton
The following points regarding chillers should be remembered by energy auditors/energy

managers:
The efficiencies for water cooled units are generally higher than those for air-cooled (where
an air-to-refrigerant heat exchanger is utilized), but there is a slight increase in auxiliary
KW/Ton. This efficiency improvement in water-cooled chiller is the result of more efficient
heat transfer and consequently, lower condensing temperatures.
Compressor efficiency depends on the type of compressor being utilized. COP design data
can be compared with actual COP data to diagnose performance issues. Reciprocating
compressors generally operate better when partly loaded while screw compressors operate
best under fully-loaded conditions.
Each chiller has a different COP. The COP varies with the cooling load on a chiller.
Operating efficiencies of chillers are more important than full-load efficiency as chillers
operate at part-load most of time.
Case for High efficiency (COP) chiller

Chiller manufacturers have made significant improvements in the operating efficiency of their
units over the past 20 years. A chiller more than ten years old will typically have a full-load
efficiency rating of 0.75 to 1.00 kW per ton. High efficiency centrifugal chillers will have a full-
load efficiency rating of about 0.50 kilowatts (kW) per ton or even lower (in the range of 0.40
kW per ton). For the same load, a new, high efficiency chiller will consume only 60% of the
energy consumed by an old chiller.
As a rule of thumb, the best candidates for replacement are those chillers that are more than
20 years old, operating atleast 1,000 hours per year, serving a number of critical loads in the
building, and requiring higher maintenance.
137
7.2.4 Internet of Things (IOT) Application for Chiller System
Cooling load in a building depends on various factors such as outside dry bulb temperature,
number of occupants etc. The chiller water temperature which influences the cooling of
space is normally set for a particular temperature, typically 70C. If the cooling loads decrease
or increase, the chilled water temperature drops or rises correspondingly. Manual
intervention is needed to periodically reset chilled water temperature corresponding to
dynamic change in cooling load.
In an IOT and Machine Learning controls scenario (Figure 7.8 (a) and (b), temperatures of
cooling space, chilled supply and return water temperature, outside air temperature,
occupancy are measured. The objective is as follows:
 To maintain a set cooling space temperature by varying temperature of chilled water

supply as per the cooling load to reduce compressor power.
 To monitor the environment in building space, improve comfort, and reduce
operational costs
 To proactively identify conditions that might cause a climate-related issue, and
correct the conditions before they become severe
 To control chilled water temperature remotely (without manual intervention).
Figure 7.8 (a) Multiple datasets (b) Optimization Approach

from sensor networks Real Time Machine Learning Model
It involves setting logic, rules, notifications, creating predictive analytics models and
instructions that would trigger chiller system if a particular rule is violated. In case of reduced
cooling load, chilled water set point rule triggers notifications which instruct chiller system to
correct chiller system set point. This control happens in real-time and real-time energy
savings is achieved using automation to feed machine-learning intelligence back into the
138
building management system (using artificial intelligence). Figure 7.9 illustrates compressor
power with and without IOT.
Figure 7.9: Compressor Power Consumption  IOT vs Non-IOT
Same concept can be extended to condenser cooling circuit. It involves varying the
temperature of condenser as the wet bulb temperature of the air varies.
Setting up IOT will involve installing temperature sensors at various points (shown as black
boxes) in Figure 7.10. These sensors send data to big data platform and analytics (analysis
of data) is performed in real-time and notification is send in real-time to take corrective
action.
Figure 7.10: IOT for Chiller System Efficiency

139
7.3 Best Practices and Technologies in Thermal System

7.3.1 Pressure Reducing Turbine
The steam pressure is generally throttled and controlled to reduce pressure using pressure
reducing valves (PRV). The throttling process is isenthalphic which means enthalphy before
and after throttling is constant, and no energy output can be produced. Alternatively if
pressure is reduced through turbine (backpressure type), energy can be produced along with
low pressure steam for process. Although steam consumption is increased marginally, net
energy savings can be achieved.
Case Study: Pressure Reducing Turbine Application (Figure 7.11)
Steam is generated in the boilers at pressure of 710.5 kg/cm2 and steam pressure is
reduced in the PRV’s/PRDS to lower pressure of 2.5 kg/cm2 to 3.0 kg/cm2 required for the
process.. After installation of steam turbine, reduction of steam pressure in PRV’s/PRDs is
avoided and electrical power is produced from generator coupled to the turbine. Steam
turbine is installed in parallel to PRV/PRDs, and steam energy which would have been wasted
due to pressure reduction, is recovered in the form of electrical power, thus reducing power cost.
Figure 7.11: Pressure Reducing Turbine Application
Turbine Specifications
S. No. Parameter Unit Value
1 Rated Capacity of the Turbine Alternator kW 40
2 Voltage V 433
3 Steam Inlet Flow to Turbine TPH 3
4 Steam Outlet Flow of Turbine TPH 3
5 Steam Inlet Pressure to Turbine kg/cm2 10.5
2
6 Steam Outlet Pressure of Turbine kg/cm 3.5
140
Cost savings
S. No. Parameter Unit Value
1 Turbine capacity kW 40
Annual Operating hours- 24 hrs/day and
2 hours 8400
350 days/annum
3 Turbine Load factor % 90
4 Annual electrical savings kWh 302400
5 Electricity cost per unit `/kWh 5.6
6 Total cost savings `(Lakh)/annum 16.9
7 Total investment `(Lakh) 34.50
8 Simple payback Years 2

Source: Detailed Project Report on Energy Conservation Turbine (40 kW), Textile SME Cluster, Surat, Gujarat (India) New
Delhi: Bureau of Energy Efficiency; Detail Project Report No.: SRT/TXT/ECT/03
7.3.2 Heat Pump
Heat Pump is a device which pumps heat from, one or more low temperature sources to one
or more high temperature sinks simultaneously, with the help of an external source of
energy. Heat pumps are designed to move thermal energy opposite to the direction of
spontaneous heat flow by absorbing heat from a cold space and releasing it to a warmer
one. Heat pumps are very efficient for heating and cooling systems and they can significantly
reduce the energy costs. Schematic diagram of heat pump is shown in Figure 7.12.
Figure 7.12: Schematic Diagram of Heat Pump

141
COP is defined as follows:
For a refrigeration machine: COPREF = Useful refrigeration output

Net-work input
For a heat pump: COPHP = Useful heat rejected from cycle

Net-work input
Various applications of heat pump

The primary application of heat pumps is space conditioning in hotels, malls, theatres and
other commercial buildings. The system combination of solar thermal collectors and heat
pumps is a very attractive option for increasing renewable energy usage for heating and
domestic hot water preparation. In industrial applications, they can be used at temperatures
from below -100°C to above 100°C. The heat pumps are available with capacities ranging
between 1 kW to 10 MW.
Industrial Applications include the following:

 Dairy, pharmaceutical, textile, food processing and cold stores, automobile, etc.
 Cold utility: air conditioning, process cooling and potable water cooling.
 Hot utility: process heating, boiler feed water preheating, drying, liquid desiccant
Case Study: Replacement of Electric Heaters with Heat Pump (Figure 7.13)
A. PreHeat Pump Situation

Industrial process Automotive Components Washing machine
Use of process Heat Cleaning of gear casings and its components before assembling
End use Cleaning of oil, dust and the burs from the components
Process Temperature 50 – 55 °C
Mass flow of the 80 components(sets) per shift (8 hrs)
components
B. System Design
a. Primary System – 28 kW Air-Source Heat Pump
b. Balance of Plant – Primary and Secondary Circuit (including Buffer Tank and Plate Heat
Exchangers)
142
Figure 7.13: Heat Pump Circuit
C. Results
Case I
Description Before After
Source of Energy Electric Heater Air-Source Heat Pump
Number of Heating Elements 12 1
Capacity of Each Heating Element (kW) 6 28
Total Rated Capacity (kW) 72 28
Electricity Consumption (kWh/year) 1,52,000 72,000
CO2 Emission (kg/year) 1,24,640 59,040
Total Savings per Year (Rs.) 5,60,000
Payback Period (months) 23
Case II
Description Before After
Source of Energy Electrical Heater Air Source Heat Pump
Total Rated Capacity (kW) 6 14
Electrical Consumption (kWh/year) 32400 13500
CO2 Emission (kg/year) 26,568 11,070
Total Savings per Year (Rs.) 1,52,000
Payback Period (Months) 46
143
7.3.3 Heat Pipe
Heat pipes are devices which can transfer 1000 times more thermal energy than copper. It is
used in traditionally difficult heat exchange environments such as high particulate gases,
dirty liquids, corrosive environments, low temperature gradients.
Heat pipe is basically a copper tube sealed on both ends with an internal wick or mesh along
the interior of the pipe (Figure 7.14). Heat pipe has a working fluid in a vacuum and various
fluids used include liquid nitrogen, methanol, water, and sodium. The operating principle of
heat pump is based on evaporation/condensing cycle. The working fluid evaporates to
vapour absorbing thermal waste heat (heat in). The vapour migrates along the cavity to
lower temperature end where it condenses back to fluid, releasing thermal energy (heat out).
The working fluid flows back to the high temperature end. Due to continuous cycle of
evaporation and condensation large amount of heat is transferred.
Figure 7.14: Schematic Diagram of Heat Pipe
The performance (amount of heat that can be transferred) of a heat pipe is a function of its
length, diameter, wick structure, and overall shape. The larger the diameter, the more
energy it can transport, but longer the length, less capable is the performance.
Advantages
• Not affected when any pipe fails
• No cross contamination between hot and cold streams
• No wear and tear
• Complete hot and cold stream separation for heat recovery systems and thus remote
heat removal is feasible.
• No additional power needed
• Alternative to rotary regenerator in thermal power plant
• Other applications include control panel cooling, plastic mould cooling, rectifier cooling,
oil cooling (pneumatic power packs), gear box oil etc.
144
7.3.4 Condensing boiler
Condensing boiler is a packaged, natural gas fired, condensing steam boiler having almost
100% thermal efficiency on NCV of natural gas. To achieve maximum heat recovery, this
packaged boiler consists of six passes of flue gas namely, three passes in Evaporator a
single pass in each of Economizer, Non-condensing Water Pre-Heater and Condensing
Water Pre-Heater. Combustion products of Natural gas comprise of gases such as Carbon
dioxide, Hydrogen Water Vapor, Nitrogen and traces of other inert gases.
Combustion of hydrogen present in the fuel forms water vapour. In addition, moisture/water
present in the fuel and moisture in air also evaporate and is carried along with flue gas in
vapour form.
In a standard boiler, evaporation of the total water and rise to flue gas temperature requires
heat energy or enthalpy, which is taken away from the gross energy released during
combustion process. As a result, heat carried away by the water vapour in the flue gas is not
available for steam generation and it is directly lost in the atmosphere. The air and the
combustion products other than water (CO2, CO, NOx) and nitrogen also take away some
amount of heat.
GCV minus heat carried away in the water vapour, inerts and combustion products per unit
mass of the fuel is called Net calorific Value (NCV). Boiler efficiency is calculated based on
NCV of the fuel as the heat carried or lost with water vapour is any way not available for heat
transfer. It is NCV which is available for heat transfer in the boiler for steam generation.
On the other hand, condensing boilers use heat from exhaust gases that would normally be
lost and released into the atmosphere as flue gas. To use this latent heat, the water vapour
from the exhaust gas is turned into liquid condensate through heat exchange of cold
demineralized feed water which is preheated in a specially designed condensing
economizer. Due to this process, a condensing boiler is able to extract more heat from the
fuel than a standard boiler, which means that less heat is lost through the flue gases.
Condensing boiler comprises of three passes of heat recovery in a fire-tube type boiler;
followed by fourth pass of heat recovery in economizer, fifth pass in non-condensing water
preheater and sixth pass in condensing preheater. On flue gas side, the condensing
preheater is followed by external structure-supported stack with material of construction,
carbon steel with internal FRP lining or Stainless Steel conforming to IS 6533.
The boiler also has operational flexibility as the same boiler could be operated by through
fuel ranging from Natural Gas to FO / LDO / HSD, by bypassing condensing preheater by
operating flue gas diverter valve & feed water bypass arrangement.
Case Study-1: Energy savings with installation of condensing boiler
As seen in Figure 7.15, flue gas temperature exiting the boiler at 330oC is passed through
the non-condensing economizer where temperature is reduced to 175oC. The flue gas
145
enters non-condensing water pre-heater where temperature is reduced to 85oC. Finally it is

passed through condensing water pre-heater/economizer where final temperature of the flue
gas is further reduced down to 53oC by preheating the boiler feed make up water fed at
31oC. Overall, flue gas temperature is reduced from 330o to 53oC. The benefits:
 Thermal efficiency improved (lower natural gas consumption for unit production of
steam).
 Water recovery from the flue gas.
Figure 7.15: Schematic Diagram of the Condensing Boiler
Scenario before and after installation of 24 TPH condensing boiler is as follows:
S. No. Description Before After

1 Flue gas Exit Temperature in chimney, 0C 115 55
2 Water Recovery from flue gas per annum, (L) 0 60,00,000
3 Natural Gas Consumption per MT of steam, Sm3 74 70
4 Natural Gas savings per annum, Sm3 0 5,50,000
5 Energy Cost savings per annum, Lakhs 0 200
Average reduction in carbon dioxide emission
6 0 1600
(estimated), MT/annum
Boiler Thermal Efficiency on NCV of fuel, (%) 92 100
Source: Improve boiler efficiency and recover water from flue gas; Syamal Kumar De; Chemical Industry Digest. April 2016
Case Study-2
A condensing boiler was built in year 2013 for a German-owned pigment processing
company having process plant at Gujarat, India. The details of the installation are as follows:
Fuel Natural Gas

Capacity 24000 kg/hr (F&A 100)
Safety valve set pressure 14.5 kg/cm2 (g)
Application Steam for process use
Thermal efficiency on NCV of fuel 100 %
Condensate return quantity. & temperature from process 65% @ 500C.
146
The performance trails were conducted by both direct as well as indirect method. The Figure
7.16 accompanied by the table shows the performance of the condensing boiler in terms of
overall thermal efficiency versus outlet temperature of the flue gas.
Figure 7.16: Overall Thermal Efficiency vs Temperature of Flue Gas
Temperature of Flue Gas Overall Thermal Overall Thermal

at the Outlet of Heat Efficiency, Efficiency, on HHV Basis
Recovery Unit (0C) on LHV Basis (%) in %
183 92 83.1
120 95 85.8
99 96 86.7
78 97 87.6
57 98 88.5
55 99 89.4
53 100 90.3
51 101 91.2
Performance test was carried out by Indirect Method as per BS-845-part I
7.3.5 Absorption chillers
Absorption chillers use heat as their energy source unlike vapour-compression chillers which
use electricity. Typically, the heat is supplied in the form of steam, hot water, direct
combustion of Natural Gas or even waste heat. Absorption chillers are either lithium
bromide-water (LiBr/H2O) or ammonia-water based equipment. The LiBr/H2O system uses
lithium bromide as the absorber and water as the refrigerant. The ammonia-water system
uses water as the absorber and ammonia as the refrigerant. The absorption chillers will have
an advantage over motor-driven vapor-compression chillers, if excess waste heat is
available and electricity cost is high.
147
Single-effect LiBr/H2O absorption chillers use low-pressure steam, or hot water with
temperatures as low as 90oC as the heat source. The thermal efficiency of single-effect
absorption systems is low. A single stage lithium bromide-based absorption chiller produces
chilled water at 6-8oC and has a COP of about 0.7.
The double-effect chillers need higher temperatures, about 170oC, which means they need
high-pressure steam or gas-fired as the heat source. Double-effect absorption chillers are
typically used in applications, where excess high-pressure steam is readily available. The
COP is about 1.2 which means that they can produce chilling capacity corresponding to 1.2
times the heat source capacity. The COP range for the different absorption chiller types is
given in Table 7.3.
Table 7.3: Typical Chiller Types and Efficiencies

Absorption Chiller Type COP Range
Hot water or steam single-effect chiller 0.60-0.75
Hot water or steam double-effect chiller 1.19-1.35
Direct fired double-effect chiller 1.07-1.18
7.3.6 Trigeneration
Trigeneration is the simultaneous conversion of fuel energy into three useful energy
products: electricity, hot water or steam and chilled water (Figure 7.17). A trigeneration is
acutally a cogeneration system with an addition of absorption chiller that uses some of the
heat to produce chilled water. Unlike vapour compression chillers using electricity,
trigeneration uses recovered heat from both the exhaust gas and engine cooling circuit.
Figure 7.17: Trigeneration

148
Trigeneration application
A trigeneration plant was set up at a government hospital in New Delhi, India. The plant has
three major components (Figure 7.18), a gas engine, a Vapour Absorption Machine VAM)
and an electrical chiller (vapour compression) for meeting balance cooling demand. The
details of Trigenertion plant are as follows:
Equipment Make Size

Gas Engine Schmitt Enertec 347 kW, natural gas fuel
VAM Thermax 105 TR, COP 0.7
Chiller York 250 TR, COP 4.0
Cooling Tower Paharpur 1800 kW
The system utilizes natural gas as fuel for the gas engine. The engine generates electrical
power (347 kW) by utilizing 96 standard cubic meter (scm) gas per hour and the exhaust gas
at 4000C is passed through the VAM. The VAM through absorption refrigeration cycle
produces chilled water at 7°C by utilizing heat from the high-temperature exhaust gases,
further increasing the efficiency. Heat from the low temperature circuit is used to pre-heat the
water being fed into the boiler further increasing the efficiency. Thus the overall efficiency of
the system increases up to 67% as against 36%.
The energy savings from the Trigeneration plant is around 660,000 kWh per annum. The
reduction in CO2 emission is 1700 tCO2 per annum as the result of utilization of waste heat
in VAM.
Particulars Value (million Rs)
Equipment cost 350
Additional project cost 62
Total project investment 412
Annual savings from Trigen 130
Project payback 3.2 years
Source: Factsheet, Indo-German Energy Program (IGEN),
Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ)
Figure 7.18: Trigeneration Application

149
7.3.7 Organic Rankine Cycle (ORC)
ORC is a power generation plant which on a mini-scale is in the range of 10–250 kW. Unlike
the traditional power plant where working fluid is water, evaporated gas is steam, and engine
is steam turbine, the ORC system uses organic fluids which boil at much lower temperatures
and pressures than water. Typical organic fluids used include R234fa, R134, pentane,
cyclopentane, n-heptane, hexane, and toluene. The ORC systems can even work on low
temperature heat sources (90–3000C) for heat recovery.
The schematic of ORC system is shown in Figure 7.18. The ORC system is based on the
principle whereby organic fluid is heated causing it to evaporate, and the resulting gas is
used to turn an organic vapour turbine (expander) which is coupled to a generator producing
power. The exhaust vapour is condensed in water or air-cooled condenser and is recycled to
the vaporiser by a liquid pump.
Figure 7.19: ORC Process Schematic

150
8. BEST PRACTICES IN BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND

CONSERVATION
8.1 Introduction
The construction industry in the country is growing at a rapid pace because of large-scale
urbanization and increasing income, and the rate of growth in India is 10% as compared to
the world average of 5.2%. It is being projected by 2030 that two-thirds of the buildings have
yet to be built and 1 billion m2 of new commercial buildings will be added. Commercial
buildings are the third largest consumers of energy, after industry and agriculture. Buildings
annually consume about 3035% of electricity consumption in India. Break-up of energy
consumption break up in a typical office building in an IT park building is shown in Figure 8.1
Energy Balance
LPG
8%
Others
12%
Chilled water Chiller

pumps 46%
6%
Lighting
9%
AHU UPS
15% 12%
Figure 8.1: Energy Consumption in an Information Technology Park Building

Commercial
Out of the total electricity consumed Building
in the building sector, around 75% is used in residential
buildings. The production of residential building stock is quickly shifting from building
individual homes and low rise buildings to multistory residential buildings. This form of
housing will be in the formal sector and subject to the building byelaws and urban
development regulations of the Local Urban Bodies (ULBs).
The gross electricity consumption in residential buildings has been rising sharply – it was
around 50 TWh in 1995 and has increased by more than four times in next 20 years and was
around 220 TWh in 2015. Projections show it will rise to about 600-900 TWh by 2030. The
151
major reason to this rapid rise in the electricity use in residential buildings is attributed to the
increased use of decentralized room based air conditioning units in homes.
The potential for energy savings is 4050% in buildings, if energy efficiency measures are
incorporated at the design stage. For existing buildings, the potential for energy savings that
can be achieved by implementing best O&M practices and retrofitting measures is 2025%.
8.2 Green Building
The energy, water and materials demands for buildings have been growing enormously over
the years and the need has arisen to minimize natural resource consumption in building and
associated impact on the environment. Buildings are responsible for 40% of global
emissions and 60% of the wastes globally.
Green Buildings (also known as green construction or sustainable buildings) offer some of
the most effective means to achieving a range of global goals, such as addressing climate
change, creating sustainable and thriving communities, and driving economic growth. The
goal is to convert buildings to energy neutral structures.
"A green building is one which uses less water, improves energy efficiency, conserves
natural resources, generates less waste and provides healthier spaces for occupants, as
compared to a conventional building”.
Green buildings can play a catalytic role in addressing environmental issues and concerns.
A green building incorporates the following features:
 Energy efficiency
 Water efficiency
 Better living conditions
 Eco-friendly sustainable materials
 Less transport use
 Less waste
 Habitat protection/restoration.
Green buildings offer a number of economic benefits as well. These include cost savings on
utility bills for tenants or owners through energy and water efficiency; lower construction
costs and higher property value for building developers; increased occupancy rates, lower
operating costs for building owners; job creation, health and well-being of occupants. A
sample list of green building features is shown in Table 8.1.
152
Table 8.1 List of Green Building Features
Building Design Orient building to allow optimum sunlight and ventilation

Envelope High performance walls, roofs
o Fly ash bricks for walls, over deck insulation, etc.
Glass High performance glass – Low-E Glass, double glazed units, triple-
glazed units.
Appliances BEE star rated equipment and appliances
o Air conditioners, refrigerators, Geysers, etc.
Lighting Systems Energy efficient lamps and luminaries
o T5, CFL, LED, High frequency electronic ballast etc.
Renewable energy Solar photovoltaic, solar water heaters, biogas etc.
sources
Energy Monitoring Energy meters & sub meters to measure, monitor & sustain building
performance.
Water Fixtures Use ultra low & low flow & flush water fixtures
o Dual flush systems, (high flush 4 – 6 LPF / low flush 1.5 - 2
LPF), water less urinals etc.
Water Management  Provide rain water harvesting / storage structures
 Treat 100% of waste water onsite
 Use water meters to monitor the consumption of treated grey
water, irrigation water, rainwater reuse, domestic hot water etc.
Sourcing of Use eco-friendly building materials and try to source materials
Building Materials that are locally manufactured (within 400 km) from project site
Certified Wood  Use wood certified by local forestry or rapidly renewable
materials (plantations which can completely replenish within 10
years) for all wooden products & furniture.
Sustainable Site  Retain fertile top soil excavated during construction for
measures landscaping during post-occupancy
 Maximise the vegetated open space in the building
Transportation  Use alternate fuel vehicles such as electric cars for local
conveyance and encourage car/van pooling and public transport
Landscaping  Reuse treated waste water for landscaping
 Use drought tolerant and native species for landscape to reduce
irrigation requirement (Xeriscaping)
Irrigation efficiency  Use drip and sprinkler irrigation systems for enhanced water
efficiency
Interior Finishing  Use NO or low VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) materials
Materials such as paints, adhesives, sealants, coatings etc.
Ventilation & day  Design openings to enhance cross ventilation
lighting  Ensure maximum daylight into all occupied spaces
Views for occupants Design interior layouts which would provide a better connectivity to
the occupants with the external world
153
The various green building rating systems are BEE Star Ratings for buildings, GRIHA, IGBC
and USGBC based-LEED certifications. All of these use Energy Conservation Building Code
(ECBC) 2017 as the baseline requirement to evaluate energy consumption of building.
IGBC Green Building Rating Systems

IGBC Green Building Rating Systems have been developed by the Indian Green Building
Council (IGBC) to suit the national context and priorities. The Rating System incorporates
National Standards and Codes namely National Building Code (NBC), Energy Conservation
Building Code (ECBC), Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF) and Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) guidelines.
National priorities addressed in this rating system include water conservation, waste
management, energy efficiency, reduced use of fossil fuels and lesser dependence on
usage of virgin materials. Different rating systems are developed for different building types:
commercial, residential, cities, townships, schools, healthcare, data centres and several
others.
Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment (GRIHA)

Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment (GRIHA) is the rating system jointly
developed by TERI and the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy, Government of India.
GRIHA is aimed at using best of traditional architecture and modern technology to build new
buildings. The latest version of GRIHA is called GRIHA V – 2015. Buildings would be rated
on a 1-5 star scale, with 5 star labeled buildings being the most efficient. GRIHA rating
system consists of 31 criteria and points are assigned to different criteria which reflect
current resource priorities of India.
USGBC-LEED
LEED, which is Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, is a third party certification
for design, construction and operation of a given building. US Green Building Council
(USGBC) has completed a comprehensive update of LEED which is called LEED v4. Seven
impact categories considered under LEED are as follows:
 Reverse contributing to global climatic change

 Enhance individual human health and well-being
 Protect and restore water resources
 Protect, enhance and restore biodiversity and ecosystem resources
 Promote sustainable and regenerative resource cycles
 Built a greener economy
 Enhance social equality, environmental justice, and community quality of life.
Other International Rating Schemes

Other international rating schemes include US Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
energy star and National Australian Built Environment Rating System (NABERS). USEPA
energy star for buildings is more popular internationally and accounts for data centers and
labs. NABERS is specific to Australia and is designed taking into account density of
154
workspace. The number of employees working in the main shift, number of workstations,
efficiencies of the UPS and allied systems to ensure uninterrupted power supply to IT
equipment and the server rooms influence the energy performance and need.
8.3 Net Zero Energy Building (NZEB)
Net or nearly zero-energy buildings (NZEB) have very high performance. The low amount of
energy that these buildings require comes mostly from renewable sources. Such buildings
produce as much energy as they consume, accounted for annually.
In order to achieve their net zero

energy goals, NZEBs must first
reduce energy demand using energy
efficient technologies, and then
utilize renewable energy sources to
meet the residual energy demand
(Figure 8.2). In such buildings,
efficiency gains enable the balance
of energy needs to be met by
renewable energy technologies.
NZEB is aimed at eliminating

greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions
associated with the operation of new Figure 8.2: NZEB Concept
buildings by 2030, and eliminate the
GHG emissions from all buildings by 2050. Meeting NZEB objectives will require addressing
both active and passive measures along with energy generation/supply from renewable
energy such as Solar Photovoltaic, Winds, Biogas, and any other applicable hybrid
renewable energy system. Achieving zero energy is an ambitious, yet increasingly
achievable goal
8.4 Building as an Energy System
Modern buildings are complex structures; there are significant interactions among the
various systems of which they are comprised. The energy auditor needs to look holistically
at the building when recommending efficiency measures to ensure that these energy
interactions are taken into account. Among the interactions that need to be considered are
the following:
A lighting retrofit from incandescent to LED lighting, because of the improved efficiency, will
reduce the internal heat gain of the building; therefore, in the cooling season, the cooling
system will experience a decreased load. Because the AC system not only cools, but
dehumidifies the building, the same lighting retrofit could result in an over-designed cooling
155
plant to operate less frequently to maintain temperature, thereby causing humidity to

increase.
Building envelope improvements such as increased insulation and reduced infiltration will
have similar effects as noted on cooling plant. The
reduced infiltration could require an increase in fresh
air supply (thereby fan energy) in order to maintain
occupant comfort and meet indoor air quality
standards.
In case of strategies such as using passive methods

for cooling, the most sustainable approach would be
adopting three-tier approach with heat avoidance Figure 8.3: Sustainable Cooling
being the first preference, followed by passive cooling, Strategy
and mechanical cooling as shown in Figure 8.3.
8.5 Energy Saving Approaches for Building
Some of the key energy efficiency measures covering building envelope (Walls, Roofs,
Windows), Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system, Lighting (indoor and
outdoor), and Electrical Power and Motors are briefly described as follows:
8.5.1 Passive Designs
Passive designs take advantage of local climates and reduce energy consumption for
heating or cooling the building by optimising insulation, ventilation, orientation, and
shade of a building.
Form and Orientation

This is the first step to achieve energy efficiency. In predominantly hot regions, buildings
should be ideally oriented to minimize solar gains in summer and maximize solar gain in
winter. Proper building layouts also ensure redistribution of air and provide shade. A
rectangular building footprint stretched from east to west helps minimise direct sun from
angles where it is difficult to control. It also helps to shade exterior courtyards, reducing the
amount of southern exposure. This orientation also directs night time breezes and day time
sea breezes (if located on coast) to cool outdoor spaces. Usable area can be increased
through shading and ventilation of outdoor spaces. The following measures are
recommended:
 Orient longer facades along the north. This will allow glare free light in summer from
north without shading and winter sun penetration from the south.
 Make building shape compact to reduce heat gain and losses.
 Use simulation tools and techniques to design orientation to minimize heat ingress and
enhance energy efficiency.
156
Minimising heat gain through roofs
Cool roofs: Conventional roofs are the worst possible summer design. Instead of acting like
a shade for occupants in the building, they create unbearable heat. Cool roofs use solar-
reflective surfaces (e.g. Galvalum) to maintain lower roof temperatures (Figure 8.4). Highly
reflective and light-colored roofs decrease the amount of heat that is absorbed from direct sun,
thereby reducing cooling energy. Such roofs achieve the greatest cooling energy savings in
hot climates, but can increase energy costs in colder climates. Materials that are light in
colour are not the only factor, but also chemistry of coatings. Specialized paints are
available to increase the reflectance of existing buildings. Low-rise buildings with large roof
areas are ideal candidates for such applications.
Performance of cool roofs is assessed in Cool roofs are able to maintain a

terms of thermal emittance, solar temperature differential of 6-80C between
reflectance, or Solar Reflective Index (SRI), ambient and indoor air temperature due to
which is a measure of emittance and high thermal emittance and solar
reflectance. reflectance.
Figure 8.4: Cool Roofs
Green roofs: Green roofs and walls enhance thermal

mass, provide evaporative cooling, insulative
performances, prevent solar heat from entering the
building, and keep the local air temperature around
the building cooler thereby reducing air conditioning
energy (Figure 8.5). They also improve building
acoustics. ‘Intensive’ green roofs have deeper soil,
larger plants and can be used as rooftop gardens, but
are very heavy. ‘Extensive’ green roofs have shallow
soil, ground-covering plants, and are lighter.
Figure: 8.5: Green Roofs
External shading: External shading can be used to exclude direct sun before it reaches a
building’s windows and control glare. Various types of shading are illustrated in Figure 8.6.
Overhangs on south-oriented windows provide effective shading by blocking summer sun

and admitting winter sun. On south-facing glass, a fixed horizontal overhang is suggested.
157
Horizontal shading are the best type of ‘fixed’ (non-movable) shading for facades facing
North (and South, for northern locations); vertical shading are best for east and west. If no
exterior shading is possible, adopt lower solar heat gain coefficient for glazing. On east and
west glass, window area should be minimized as they are difficult to shade.
Figure 8.6: Types of Shading
Landscaping can be considered to shade east and west exposures. ‘Vegetation can be
used as shading, as appropriate for the climate zone.
Fenestration
Fenestrations (windows, skylights, & other openings
in a building etc.) allow daylight and the prevailing
wind inside the building when needed (Figure 8.7).
Building fenestrations can affect lighting and cooling
loads considerably. Various methods to reduce heat
gain through windows include the following:
 Orientation and size

Figure 8.7: Fenestration
 Glazing
 Internal shading devices (blinds, curtains)
 External shading devices
Fenestrations also influence daylight harvesting potential by reducing lighting loads without
compromising on visual and thermal comfort of building occupants.
The properties relevant to daylight harvesting and energy efficiency are illustrated in Figure
8.8.
158
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Measure

of solar heat transmitted through the window.
SHGC is expressed as a number between 0
and 1. Lower value means less heat transmitted
(less heat gain. SHGC should be lower for warm
climates and higher for cold climates.
Visual Light Transmission (VLT): Visible light
that passes through the glazing. Higher VLT
denotes higher daylight penetration.
U value: Denotes conduction heat gain through
glazing unit (frame + glazing). Lower U value
means less heat is conducted.
Light to Solar Gain Ratio (LSG): Ratio of VLT
to SHGC. Higher values better for daylight
harvesting.
Figure 8.8: Properties relevant to Daylight Harvesting
The following options are to be considered:

 Reduce glazing area as long as it does not affect the uniformity of daylight distribution
in a building.
 Reduce Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) as less heat will be transferred into the
building.
 Adopt glazing with low U value as well as low SHGC, except for the cold climate where
high SHGC is recommended.
Effective building material sealing: Air leakage can be minimized by adopting caulking,
gaskets, and weather stripping the following vulnerable areas:
 Openings between walls and foundations and between walls and roof and wall panels
 Openings at penetrations of utility services through, roofs, walls, and floors
 Joints around fenestration and door frames
 Site-built fenestration and doors,
 Building assemblies used as ducts or plenums, and
 Any other openings in the building envelope.
High performance glass: High performance glass allows daylight in regularly occupied
zones and also reduces heat gains thereby reducing air-conditioning capacity. In recent
Green Buildings, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) is found to vary between 0.25 (for
ECBC code compliance in case of prescriptive approach) to 0.35 in case of whole building
performance simulation. Window glasses can be placed so as to have better visual
connectivity with outdoor environment and improve occupant productivity.
Windows with low solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC): Tinted glass is commonly used to
achieve solar control, but has effect of reducing natural daylight. Soft-coat low-E coatings
provide the best possible solar control for only a slight reduction in daylight. Reflective and
toned glass treatments are other approaches for controlled daylight as well as solar gain.
159
Low-E Glass: Uncoated single-glazed windows are considered to be the weakest thermal
component in the building envelope, transmitting large amounts of heat into and out of a
building. ‘Standard clear glass has an emittance of 0.84 over the long-wave portion of the
spectrum, meaning that it emits 84% of the energy possible for an object at its temperature.
It also means that 84% of the long-wave radiation striking the surface of the glass is
absorbed and only 16% is reflected.
By comparison, low-E glass coatings can have an emittance as low as 0.04 which means
such glazing would emit only 4% of the energy possible at its temperature, and thus reflect
96% of the incident long-wave, infrared radiation. Soft-coat low-E’ glass coatings on clear
glass provide the best possible daylight transmission (measured as ‘VLT’) while achieving
good solar control. Low-E glass is comprised of extremely thin layers of silver or other low
emissivity materials. The silver low-E coating reflects the interior temperatures back inside,
keeping the room warm or cold.
Double-glazed units: A double-glazed window has

two panes of glass with a sealed air gap between
them (Figure 8.9). The spacing of the glass panels is
usually between 6-20 mm. Double-glazed units
(‘DGUs’) perform better than single-glazing, and
filling the cavity with lower conductivity argon gas
improves their effectiveness further.
‘Low-E’ coatings can improve both single and double Figure 8.9: DGU with Low-E-
glazing, with liquid-applied coatings available for pre- Coating
existing windows. The window framing system also
has a major influenceone large pane performs better than many small panes. In
comparison with single glazing, double glazing reduces heat conduction by about 50%
Triple-glazed units: The best insulation

performance that can be achieved for windows
with the above approaches is generally around a
system U-value of 2.5 W/m²·K. Triple-glazing offers
further improvements, and filling the two cavities
with inert gases like argon improves their
effectiveness (Figure 8.10). Triple glazing, which is
becoming common in some European countries,
reduces heat conduction by about 30% (relative to
double glazing).
Figure 8.10: Heat Loss Comparison
Thermochromic and Electrochromic Glass: Thermochromic glass becomes darker when it

is heated up by direct sun and clearer again when it cools down. This improves natural
daylight when the glass is not in direct sun, and limits solar heat gains (reducing cooling
energy) and glare when it is.
160
Electrochromic glass also changes from clear to dark, but that change is instead triggered
by an applied electric voltage (typically controlled by a local switch or a building
management system), which provides choice over whether to allow or exclude solar heat
gains.
Double skin facades: Double skin facades involve a secondary line of glass outside of the
main glass facade. They allow the introduction of movable external shading on high rise
buildings, which enables very clear glass to be used (improving natural daylight) and
enhanced solar control (reducing cooling energy). Double skin facades generally have a
better overall insulative performance, and can be designed to deliver effective natural
ventilation in high rise buildings. They can be ventilated or sealed, and the distance between
the glasses can be wide or narrow. When narrow and sealed they are called Closed Cavity
Facades (CCF).
Low energy cooling
Natural ventilation: Ventilative cooling uses the principle of exhausting the warm building
air and replacing with cool outside air. Well-directed moving air across occupant’s skin
creates convection and evaporation. This principle is achieved by wind and stack effect.
Suitable openings are not only provided, but located correctly and are large enough for this
principle to work properly. Various schemes for natural ventilation are shown in Figure 8.11.
For effective natural ventilation, building openings should be in opposite pressure zone
(since natural ventilation relies on pressure to move fresh air through buildings).
Cross ventilation is dependent on the size and position of opening. Inlets should be in windward
direction and aided with suitably placed outlets that allow egress of wind from the space.
Opening controls like louvers can be used to control the direction and velocity of air stream flowing
into a space.
Figure 8.11: Effective Schemes for Natural Ventilation
161
Stack-Effect ventilation: A stack-effect ventilator also

called as solar chimney uses passive solar heat as the
driving force. The principle is illustrated in Figure 8.12. The
warm indoor air is lighter and has more buoyancy than
cooler air. The temperature differential induces a forced
upward flow. As indoor air is evacuated, (cooler) outdoor
air flows into the building. The solar chimney is used to
exhaust hot air from the building quickly, thus improving
the cooling potential of incoming air from openings. Figure 8.12: Stack Effect
Ventilation
Solar chimneys having a relatively low construction cost,
can move air without the need for the expensive conventional forms of energy, and can cool
the building structure at night. They can also improve the comfort of the inhabitants during
the day if they are combined with an evaporative-cooling device. This system is especially
suitable for large hall-like spaces.
Passive downdraft evaporative cooling

(PDEC): Passive downdraft evaporative
cooling systems (Figure 8.13) consist of a
downdraft tower with wetted cellulose pads at
the top of the tower. Water is distributed on
the top of the pads, collected at the bottom
into a sump and re-circulated by a pump.
Certain designs exclude the re-circulation
pump and use the pressure in the supply
water line to periodically surge water over the
pads, eliminating the requirement for any Figure 8.13: Passive Downdraft Evaporative
electrical energy input. In some designs, Cooling
water is sprayed using nozzles in place of
pads.
These towers are often described as reverse chimneys. Unlike rise of warm air in
conventional chimney, cool column of air falls in PDEC. The air flow rate depends on the
efficiency of the evaporative cooling device, tower height and cross section, as well as the
resistance to air flow in the cooling device, tower and structure (if any) into which it
discharges. In Torrent Research Centre in Ahmedabad, where this system is deployed, the
inside temperatures of 29–30 °C were recorded when corresponding outside temperatures
were 43–44 °C.
Thermal insulation
Thermal insulation in walls and roofs reduces heat transfer between the inside and outside
and helps maintain comfortable indoor temperature. Insulation keeps indoor space cooler in
summer months and warm during winters.
162
The various materials being used include fibre glass, mineral wool, rock wool, expanded or
extruded polystyrene, cellulose, urethane or phenolic foam boards and cotton. They are
generally in the form of amorphous wool or rigid sheets, or require in‐situ pouring. Insulation
is rated in terms of R‐value. Higher R‐values denote better insulation and saves more
energy savings. However, Insulation beyond 100 mm thickness does not offer further benefit
in terms of energy efficiency.
Most of the new buildings are designed to have new construction practices for wall
insulation such as, Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) blocks, and insulation blocks with
Expanded polystyrene (EPS) or Extruded polystyrene (XPS) type of insulation. These
envelope options support in designing new buildings with optimized heat gain, for lesser
capacity of air-conditioning equipment thereby reducing cost of operation.
Lighting
Daylighting:: Day lighting is the controlled admission of natural light, direct sunlight, and
diffused-skylight into a building to reduce electric lighting and saving energy. Appropriate
use of windows, skylights, and other apertures in the building helps to harvest daylight. The
various methods include external light shelves, light pipes (for large window area), skylights
and roof monitors (for areas without access to windows), light coloured interior surfaces
which reduces luminance contrast and improves coverage. Large buildings can allow
daylight into more spaces by having central courtyards or atria, or having other cut-outs in
the building form as illustrated in Figure 8.14.
Dome shaped skylights are most suitable for year around daylight from any direction. Vertical fins
can be added to deflect direct sunlight and reduce glare.
Figure 8.14: Dome Shaped Skylights
Light Shelves: A light shelf is a passive

architectural device used to reflect natural daylight
into a building. Unlike direct sunlight which can
cause glare near an opening and leaving dark
spaces further inside the room, light shelf bounces
sunlight off a horizontal surface and distributes it
more evenly and deeply within a space. They are
often designed as part of a broader daylight and
shading strategy.
Light shelves can be fixed either externally or

internally. Exterior light shelves can be more
Figure 8.15 Internal Light Shelf

163
effective than internal light shelves as they do not radiate as much heat into the space and
so can reduce solar heat gain and cooling loads as well. However, internal light shelves are
easier to maintain as they can be more accessible and less exposed (Figure 8.15). Overall
light shelves provide following benefits:
 Enhance daylight quality.

 Reduce the need for artificial lighting and hence reduce energy consumption.
 Reduce cooling loads.
 Increase occupant comfort and productivity.
 Enhance design aesthetics.
8.5.2 HVAC
HVAC systems contribute to nearly 40% of the energy used by commercial buildings and
over 50% of total energy consumption in IT buildings. After reducing cooling/heating loads
through passive design strategies, enhancing the efficiency of HVAC systems should be the
top priority for any building energy efficiency. Apart from selecting energy efficient
equipment, it is important to select the correct system type, size, and design for optimized
energy efficiency. The system types are broadly categorized as follows:
 Centralized system: Central chilled water system (Air cooled and water cooled)
 Distributed system (DX system): VRF, Duct able system, split air conditioners, unitary
systems
Energy saving potential in HVAC System Design is shown in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2: Energy Saving Potential in HVAC System Design

Cooling Load (kW/ton)
Improvement
Component Conventional Optimized
Potential
Design Design
Chiller 0.75 0.50 33%
Air Distribution
0.60 0.06 90%
System
Water Pump 0.30 0.04 87%
Cooling Tower 0.10 0.02 80%
Total 1.75 0.62 65%
High efficiency chillers

Chiller is the highest energy consumer in the HVAC system. Chiller efficiency is rated in kW/
ton or coefficient of performance (COP). The efficiency is considered either in full peak load
or part load (IPLV). ECBC states the minimum requirement of COP for each chiller type and
size. Today, water-cooled chillers are available in the efficiency (COP) range of 6.3 to 6.7.
Air-cooled system is designed to achieve COP in the bandwidth of 3 to 3.3.
164
Water-cooled chillers
Water-cooled chillers reject heat to a condenser water system, in contrast to air-cooled
chillers which reject heat directly to the atmosphere. Condenser water systems connected
to cooling towers or ‘hybrid wet-dry coolers’ result in chillers running more efficiently in the
majority of weather conditions. Where there is a substantial alternative water source (for
example storm water harvesting) this can be utilised.
Chilled water storage

Chilled water storage allows chillers to operate at times of day that differ from when air
conditioning is needed. Chilled water system is illustrated in Figure 8.16. Chilled water is
typically created overnight (when chillers operate more efficiently due to cooler ambient
temperature), stored in very large well-insulated tanks (designed to allow the coldest water
to sink and warmer water to rise), and drawn upon as needed. In locations with a strong
‘diurnal swing’ in temperature, the additional energy for pumping is more than offset by the
lower chiller energy. The system provides following benefits:
 Encourages consumers to operate the chillers during off-peak period when unit charges
for electricity are lower thereby lowering the cost of electricity for cooling.
 By shifting the operation of chiller compressor to evening and night hours when ambient
air temperature is cooler enables chiller to operate more efficiently and consume less
power for cooling.
 Potential for negotiating for lower contract demand and thereby lower demand cost.
Off-peak Cooling Mode Peak Rate Cooling Mode

Figure 8.16: Chilled Water System
Ice Bank
This system is similar to chilled water
system. Blocks of ice are created at night
during off-peak periods, typically night time.
Chiller cools an ethylene glycol solution to
below 00C and the solution is circulated
through tubes in a tank freezing the water
held in the tank (Figure 8.17). During the

Figure 8.17: Ice-Bank System
165
day, the ice melts cooling the solution in the tubes. The chilled solution is moved through a
heat exchange coils where it cools the air.
Trigeneration System
Trigeneration systems produce heat and electricity which in turn can be used for heating,
cooling and hot water heating systems in a building. Electricity produced can also be
supplied to the grid if not needed in the site. It is also known as Combined Cooling, Heating,
and Power (CCHP).
Tri-generation technology (Figure 8.18) comprises of a gas engine or a power system

operated by burning waste, bio fuel, or fossil fuel to produce electricity. The connected heat
recovery system is used as a heat exchanger to recover exhaust heat from the engine. The
recovered heat can be used for heating applications like hot water, or in absorption chillers
for producing chilled water for cooling. The electricity produced within the tri-generation
process could be used to meet the building loads or power chillers during peak load
period. The thermal energy could be diverted to boilers to heat the water used in hospitals,
hotels, and industries for numerous purposes and/ or to absorption chiller to heat the
absorbent and refrigerant mixture and regenerate the absorbent. Larger buildings with a
constant high demand for hot water are ideal candidates for its application. Trigeneration
systems are more commonly used in buildings with readily available waste heat and intense
24 hours operations.
Figure: 8.18: Schematic diagram of a Trigeneration system
Radiant cooling system

Buildings designed with radiant cooling system offers energy savings, exceeding 30% over
an energy efficient building designed with conventional air-conditioning system. This is
mainly due to supply of chilled water at higher temperatures such as 14-17oC.
Pipes embedded in the structure cool the thermal mass of the building generally during the
hours when it is unoccupied. For cooling, radiant systems use both thermal mass and
166
nocturnal cooling. Chilled water in the pipes can be supplied through a conventional chiller
(Figure 8.19).
Figure: 8.19: Schematic Diagram of a Radiant Cooling System.
Energy-efficient pumps and fans (HVAC system)

Pumps and fans which are used in HVAC system are designed to achieve higher efficiency
benchmarks with use of IE3 and IE4 (most energy efficient motors).
Air tightness
When the wind (or a ventilation system) causes a pressure difference between inside and
outside, air tries to move from one to the otherincreasing air conditioning energy. ‘Blower
door testing’ is used to measure how air tight a building is, and can be a useful diagnostic
tool. Revolving doors perform much better than sliding doorsand where secondary swing
doors are required they should be on push-button release to discourage their use.
Mixed mode ventilation System

Mixed mode ventilation systems combine mechanical ventilation (which uses fan energy)
and natural ventilation. Some buildings have windows that open automatically, others turn-
off their mechanical ventilation when someone opens a window. Transient spaces are often
ideal candidates for such applications. Buildings designed for natural ventilation can also
incorporate a ‘night-purge cycle’ easily, which flushes out hot air from the building
overnight.
Demand-controlled ventilation (DCV)

Outside air is pushed into buildings by ventilation systems to dilute the carbon dioxide,
odours and other chemicals produced by the people and materials inside. In conventional
systems the amount of supply air is constant normally based on maximum occupancy levels
or at predetermined ventilation rate, regardless of the occupancy level thus wasting energy
167
due to fan operation as well as in conditioning and cooling the airthe energy is not only
wasted due to the fan operation, but also in conditioning and cooling the air.
Figure 8.20: Demand Controlled Ventilation
DCV operation at various modes: full occupancy and partial occupancy is illustrated in
Figure 8.20. DCV ensures a building is ventilated, cost effectively, while maximizing indoor
air quality. Sensors are used to continuously measure and monitor conditioned space and
provide real time feed back to the space controls which adjust dampers or fan speed to
modulate the ventilation rate to match with the occupancy of the building. Control technology
used is a combination of VFDs, CO2 or volatile organic carbon (VOC) sensors, and exhaust
fan status monitoring. Sensor placement needs to be carefully considered during design 
and periodic re-calibration of the sensors is important during operation. Potential energy
savings with DCV is 1040%.
Electronically Commutated fans

Electronically commutated (‘EC’) fans use brushless motors with permanent magnets and
DC voltage controlled by a microprocessor like the fans found in desktop computers. These
motors are more energy efficient than conventional AC motors because they do not have
the same copper wire windings. The speed of EC fans can be controlled without the need
for an external ‘variable frequency drives’ (‘VFD’). This measure is applicable for fans
throughout the building (for example in fan coil units).
Low-temperature Variable Air Volume

Low-temperature ‘VAV’ (Variable Air Volume) air conditioning systems supply colder air
(about 11°C as against conventional older (about 14°C), enabled by the development of
‘swirl diffusers’. As a result less air needs to be pushed through the system to provide the
same amount of cooling, reducing fan energy.
168
Similarly, ‘Low-pressure’ ventilation systems are designed for air to be pushed through
without applying as much pressure (measured as ‘Pa’ (Pascals), where lower is better), also
saving fan energy. Typical designs target a ‘pressure drop’ of about 0.8 Pa per metre of
duct and aim to minimise the air speed across coils and filters.
Heat recovery ventilation (‘HRV’) systems

Heat recovery ventilation (‘HRV’) systems use the air-conditioned or heated air leaving a
building to pre-cool or pre-heat the incoming outside air. ‘Run around’ pipe heat exchangers
(which circulate a liquid between coils in two ducts) and most ‘plate’ heat exchangers
transfer temperature only. ‘Enthalpy wheels’ and some plate heat exchangers transfer both
temperature and humidity. Heat recovery is most beneficial during very hot and very cold
weather.
Solar Cooling
Cooling loads in tropical countries is high during the hot summer season when solar radiation is
available in abundance. Thus, application of solar cooling technology uses a renewable source
of energy to reduce the cooling loads when air conditioning demand is at its annual high. Solar
heat is used to re-generate the refrigerant in an absorption chiller (Figure 8.21).
Figure: 8.21: Schematic Diagram of a Solar Air Conditioning System
Insulated roller doors

Where roller doors are required for access to a cooled space they can be a significant point
of heat transfer, resulting in higher energy use. In these applications a product should be
chosen that has insulated panels or slats and is well sealed around the edges. Ideally these
roller doors should also operate automatically to limit the length of time they remain open.
Industrial ‘air curtains’ (set to only operate in very hot or cold weather) can also be installed
to limit air movement into and out of the space while the doors are open.
169
8.5.3 Lighting
International standards have specified lighting efficiency requirement in terms of lighting

power density (LPD) to provide flexibility to the designer to meet the design as well as the
efficiency requirements. LPD sets the maximum lighting power per unit of area of a building
category or space function classification.
ECBC has set the minimum LPD requirement for whole building or for each space function
to quantify the maximum allowed lighting power for a respective category to meet the lux
level requirement prescribed in the National Building Code (NBC). Use of low Lighting
Power Density (LPD) such as 0.45 in green buildings has resulted in significant energy
savings in lighting. Such deployment has reduced air-conditioning load as well. In 2005-6,
the LPD load which was in the range of 0.91.1 W/sq. ft and has come down over the years.
LED Lighting
Light Emitting Diode (LED) lighting provides more light for the same amount of electricity
when compared to fluorescents, metal halides and halogens. Less heat is generated which
also means less cooling energy requirements. LEDs reach full brightness instantly and can
be turned off and on again quickly, allowing integration with controls like day lighting and
occupancy sensors to further reduce the lighting energy consumption.
In the majority of applications it is important to choose LEDs with a high Colour Rendering
Index (‘CRI’, measured out of 100), which affects how accurately the human eye perceives
colour. They also tend to have long life, and less maintenance.
Occupancy detection
Occupancy detection uses sensors to identify when people are no longer using a space and
switches-off (or turns-down) building systems, saving energy. This application is common for
interior lighting, but it is also effective for heating, ventilation, air conditioning and exterior
lighting.
There are a variety of different sensor types, suitable for a range of different distances. some
are designed to detect movement; others detect ‘presence’ (when a person is present but
not moving). Systems are even available that have one occupancy sensor per light,
providing a high level of responsiveness and energy efficiency. ECBC specifies occupancy
sensors to all office areas such as meeting and conference rooms, school classrooms, and
storage spaces.
Daylight dimming
Daylight dimming (sometimes called ‘daylight harvesting’) uses sensors to identify when
there is a good amount of natural daylight available and turns down lighting, saving energy.
The sensors used are called ‘PE cells’ (photoelectric cells) - for external lighting it is normally
just called ‘PE cell control’. A sensor can either be built into every light or shared between
groups of lights  but it is important to keep groups of lights small (because, for example,
170
blinds might be adjusted). Internally, it provides the most benefit near facades, skylights and
atria.
Flexible Lighting Control

Using only the lights when and where needed results in less energy use. Flexible lighting
control systems provide the ability to link any individual light to any particular switch or
sensor, without altering any physical connections. This allows the grouping of lights to be
easily reconfigured  for example when desks are rearranged in an office. It also enables
separate lighting ‘scenes’ to be setup where a space is used for a number of different
purposes. some control systems allow people to change the brightness of an individual light
using their smartphone.
8.5.4 Renewable Energy
BIPV
Building integrated photovoltaic (‘BIPV’) materials generate electricity from sunlight and also
replace the function of a conventional building materialfor example glass or roof tiles. BIPV
can use higher efficiency ‘crystalline’ silicon technology, but often uses ‘amorphous thin-film’
technology, which is better suited to dim and diffuse light and can be applied on curved
surfaces. There are coloured options, opaque options, and options with different
transparencies. BIPV is particularly attractive for high-rise buildings where the roof space is
relatively small.
Solar hot water systems

Solar hot water systems collect heat from direct sun, usually for domestic hot water
purposes  reducing the requirement for gas or electricity. In ‘flat plate’ systems, water flows
through a dark-coloured panel. In ‘evacuated tube’ systems, a liquid flows through dark-
coloured double-walled glass cylinders, then transfers the heat to water in a storage tank.
Evacuated tube type systems are more thermally efficient, particularly in cold weather.
Usually solar hot water systems are fitted with a gas or electric heating element to ‘boost’
the hot water temperature when the solar contribution alone is not sufficient.
8.5.5 Other areas
Power factor correction

Large buildings are often charged not just for how much electricity (kWh) they use, but also
for their ‘peak demand’ (the peak power drawn from the grid at any time). In many locations
this is based on ‘apparent power’ (measured as ‘kVA’, where lower is better). For buildings
that have a poor ‘power factor’ during peak periods, ‘power factor correction’ equipment can
be installed which reduces the apparent power drawn from the grid, thereby saving cost.
The main causes of poor power factor are generally ‘AC’ motors (including pumps, fans and
appliances) and some ‘switched-mode’ power supplies for computer equipment. All 3 phase
shall maintain their power factor at the point of connection in the range 0.970.99.
171
Sub-metering systems
Sub-metering systems use a number of carefully placed energy meters ‘downstream’ of the
main utility meter to pinpoint how different parts of the building are using energy. This allows
energy loss to be identified, and helps in managing improvement. Connecting sub-meters to
a Building Management System (‘BMS’) will automatically record all the data in one place,
with software that can shape it into useful graphs, and provide alerts when any unusual
consumption is detected. It can also be linked to display screens inside the building to show
live energy use information to occupants.
Energy Efficient Appliances

Unitary air conditioners (if used in the building) should be minimum 3 star rating or above or
air conditioner with a COP equivalent to 3.1 (EER of 10.58) or above.
Pumps and fans used in HVAC system are designed to achieve higher efficiency
benchmarks with use of IE3 and IE4 (most energy efficient motors) or BEE 3 star rating or
more.
Electrical Energy Storage

Energy storage which can make best use of non-dispatchable onsite and offsite solar and
other renewable energy options is another area becoming important. Storage of electricity
does not reduce overall energy consumption, but it can provide other benefits. Some
systems store and re-use excess electricity instead of feeding it to the grid - offering some
cost benefit, as well as improving Energy Rating of the building. Other systems store off-
peak grid electricity for re-use in the peak-period, to reduce the maximum demand on the
grid. Lithium ion batteries are the smallest and lightest option, but are expensive. Flow
batteries (zinc bromide for example) can be completely drained without impacting
performance, but are larger and heavier.
Building Energy Management System (‘BEMS’)

A Building Energy Management System (‘BEMS’) is a dedicated computer and network that
controls and monitor all the equipment (such as pumps, fans, ‘dampers’, chillers, lighting,
renewable energy system, elevators, etc.) that are part of the building HVAC system. They
can provide very sophisticated control, but their influence on energy efficiency depends on
how they are designed. BMS control based on energy efficiency rather than temperature
control can realize substantial energy savings. As sensor prices have come down, installing
more sensors enables more sophisticated approaches to monitor and control the system
more effectively.
Crystalline Water proofing

Newly constructed buildings are expected to last at least for 50 years. Concrete is one of the
most commonly used building and construction materials. However, due to its porosity
(micro porous structure) and permeability, it is often susceptible to damage and deterioration
from water and chemical penetration.
These properties result in pathways to form that allow the ingress and movement of water
into, and through, along with the cracking that occurs due to shrinkage. Thus, these voids,
172
pores and capillaries become the major sources for water leakages from the concrete
structures. As a result, structure of buildings is damaged and expected life of the building is
drastically reduced.
One type of waterproofing has proven particularly suitable for green building—crystalline
waterproofing technology. Crystalline waterproofing system transforms the porous concrete
into a water-resistant impermeable barrier which provides a powerful protection against
water damage such as cracking and corrosion of reinforcing steel. The other benefits include
preventing air entry into or out of a building, which can reduce the cooling/heating
requirements.
The crystalline waterproofing chemistry can be introduced into new concrete as an

admixture, a dry-shake product, or a surface-applied coating. It becomes an integral part of
the concrete matrix when applied to existing concrete or added to the mix at time of
batching. For older (i.e., cured) concrete, surface-applied coatings are used.
8.5.6 Emerging Trends
BM Analytics
Building Management (BM) analytics complements BEMS and is based on statistical
analysis, performance trending and automated diagnostics. BM works with BMS to analyse
all the data that it collects and generates. The software can search for patterns that indicate
equipment is operating efficiently or not, and generate a list of actions for predictive
maintenance. Their effectiveness depends on the information available to the BMs and how
proactively the actions are implemented.
For new buildings, BM analytics should be embedded in the purchased BEMS. For existing
older buildings BM analytics can be incorporated in BEMS with potential payback period of
around 5 years.
Self-Learning Buildings
The application of analytics in Building Energy Management also leads to development of
Self-Learning buildings. Self-learning buildings use wireless sensor technology and data
mining methods to increase their energy efficiency over time by anticipating and meeting
their occupants’ needs. Data such as temperature, humidity, luminance, and occupancy are
collected and transmitted using wireless sensors. The software then learns to optimize
heating and ventilation so that energy consumption is minimized without affecting the user
comfort.
Use of simulation for energy efficiency in building

New Building
Energy simulation has been used in new and existing buildings. Some of the key benefits of
building simulation in new buildings are as follows:
 Optimize energy performance. Building simulation establishes the impact of key
simulation inputs such as Lighting Power Density (LPD), set point, window-to-wall ratio
(WWR), orientation and fresh air intake on energy consumption.
173
 Support project team in early decision making, such as capacity of electrical/ HVAC
equipment ,
 Determine several alternatives for better benefits during operation and maintenance
(O&M)
 Evaluate/check code compliance and Green Building Certification programmes and
determine enhanced energy performance.
Existing Buildings
a. Revalidate building performance after one or two years of building operation. Also,
compare the building performance after occupancy, as per M&V protocol.
b. Support decision making with calibrated simulation during retro-commissioning/re-
commissioning of equipment– electrical and HVAC.
c. Predict energy savings with cost savings/payback with proposed implementation of
energy efficiency measures in existing buildings.
Green Leasing
Green leasing is a new and emerging concept within the green building world. Green leases
(also known as energy efficient leases, or high performance leases) align the financial and
energy incentives of building owners and tenants so they can work together to save energy,
conserve resources, and ensure efficient operation of buildings.
If a tenant in large commercial building makes efficiency upgrades, but if the building is
not sub-metered, there is no means for the tenant to quantify the savings and receive
recognition for the achievements. The tenant would have spent money for an energy
efficiency upgrade, but may not be sufficiently benefitted from the energy savings
created by that upgrade. Similarly a landlord would have invested in energy efficient
upgrade and would not being sufficiently compensated for the efforts as the entire
benefits in terms of lower utility bills would pass to tenant.
Green lease concept provides means to acknowledge such sustainable practices. By

including a few new or modified clauses in a traditional commercial lease, both owners and
tenants can better realize the benefits of investing in energy efficiency measures.
The benefits other than energy efficiency that a landlord can benefit from green lease
include increased property value, higher occupancy for green buildings, increased ability to
recruit and retain employees, higher employee morale, fewer sick day days, and increased
employee productivity.
174
9. RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS
9.1 Introduction
The world is currently undergoing irreversible climatic change due to the effects of global
warming arising from the massive production and consumption of fossil fuels. To mitigate the
impacts, many countries have taken collective decision to reduce the usage of fossil fuels and
find alternate energy sources. Among the alternate energy sources, renewable energy sources
have huge potential to meet the energy requirements and mitigate the climate change impacts.
The global renewable energy installed capacity was 921 GW (2017), and India’s share was
around 70 GW. With abundant natural resources such as solar power, wind power, bio-energy
and hydro power at its command, the Government of India has set an ambitious target of
achieving 175 GW of renewable energy by 2022.This target comprises 100 GW solar power, 60
GW wind power, 10 GW bio-energy, and 5 GW small hydro power. The target is to achieve 21%
share of renewable energy in its total electricity consumption by 2022.
9.2 Types of Renewable Energy System
Renewable energy system is based on converting the energy found in sunlight, wind, falling-
water, sea-waves, geothermal heat, or biomass into a form that can be used such as heat or
electricity. The various forms of renewable energy resources are shown in Figure 9.1.
Figure 9.1: Various Forms of Renewable Energy Resources

175
9.3 Installable Potential and Installed Capacities
The status of renewable energy in Indiapotential versus installed capacity is shown in the
Table 9.1.
Table 9.1: Installable Potential and Installed Capacities

S. No. Source Potential Installed
302251 MW @100m
1. Wind Power 102788 MW @80 m 34193.20 MW
49130 MW@ 50 m
2. Solar Power - Ground Mounted 50 MW/sq.km 21118.64 MW
3. Solar Power - Roof Top - 1210.75 MW
4. Biomass Power
23700 MW 9375.61 MW
5. Bagasse Cogen
6. Small Hydro (up to 25 MW) 15000 MW 4493.20 MW
Tidal:80009000 MW
7. Tidal / Wave 
Wave:40000
Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion
8. 180000 MW 
(OTEC)
9. Geothermal 10000 MW 
9.4 Solar Energy
Solar energythe most abundant natural resourceis easily capable of providing many times
the total current energy demand. The average intensity of solar radiation received is 200
MW/km square (megawatt per kilometer square). India is endowed with vast solar energy
potentialabout 5,000 trillion kWh per year energy incident over Iand area with most parts of
the country receiving 35 kWh per sq.m. per day. Based upon the availability of solar radiation
and land, the potential of solar power in the country has been assessed to be 750 GWp.
Solar energy can be used in two ways―thermal and electricity. Solar thermal technology uses
the solar heat energy to heat water or air or power production. Solar photovoltaic technology on
the other hand converts solar energy directly into electricity using photovoltaic (PV) solar cell.
176
9.4.1. Solar Radiation Resource
Knowing the quantum of solar radiation is a pre-requisite for site selection and planning for
tapping solar energy. Two main sources of solar radiation resource data: satellitederived data
and landbased measurements.
Irradiance is the level of solar radiation on a defined area. Irradiance is therefore an output per
area expressed in watts per square metre (W/m2). The solar irradiance fluctuate widely―it
ranges from 50 W/m2 during severely cloudy conditions to about 1000 W/m2 when the sky is
clear.
The solar resource of a location is usually defined by the values of the Global Horizontal
Irradiation (GHI), Direct Normal Irradiation (DNI) and Diffuse Horizontal Irradiation (DHI) (Figure:
9.2).
Global Horizontal Irradiationthe total solar

energy received on a unit area of horizontal
surface is of most interest to solar PV power
developers. As solar resource is intermittent, an
understanding of variability is important. Direct
Normal Irradiation data is relevant to developers
of solar thermal energy particularly based on
concentrated solar technologies.
The study of solar radiation map will help to

make decision on the location of the solar plant
and technology. Maps are available to calculate
solar resource of a particular region. The Figure 9.2: Global Irradiation
location of a project determines the power
production of a solar power plant. However, inconsistency in weather conditions may cause
deviations from the initial power projections. Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE)
has prepared Indian Solar Radiation Atlas, with 3 km X 3 km spatial resolution, providing details
of solar resources (GHI, DHI and DNI) for the benefit of solar developers.
Over the recent years, solar energy has been used in a variety of applications which can be
classified into two main categories: solar thermal applications and solar electrical power
applications.
177
9.4.2 Solar Thermal Applications
Solar thermal has a broader range of applications than PV does, since the sun’s heat can be
collected and transferred in a medium, and the stored energy can be used for heating and
cooling a home, heating water, cooking food, or producing electricity.
Solar thermal energy is used in three ranges of temperatures: low-temperature, which is used
for heating, cooling, and ventilation; mid-temperature, which is used for cooking, water heating;
and high-temperature, which includes generating electricity.
9.4.3 Flat Plate Collectors (FPC) based Solar Water Heaters
Flat Plate Collectors consist of an insulated outer metallic box covered on the top with glass
sheet. Inside the box, selectively coated black absorber sheets with in-built channels or riser
tubes absorbs the solar radiation and transfers the heat to the flowing water (Figure 9.3).
It has three main components, namely,

a) Solar collector
b) Cold water tank
c) Insulated hot water storage tank with
required insulated hot water pipes and
accessories.
In the case of smaller systems (100–2000

litres per day), the hot water reaches the user
end, by natural circulation (thermo–syphon) for
which the storage tank is located above the Figure 9.3: Flat Plate Collector
collectors. In higher capacity systems, a pump
is used for forced circulation of water.
A typical 100 litres insulated tank with a 2 m2 collector area, can supply water at a temperature
of 6080°C. A bank of collectors can be arranged in a seriesparallel combination to get higher
quantity of hot water. This system is mainly for domestic hot water applications such as bathing,
utensil cleaning etc. For a house with one bathroom and 3 to 4 members, 100 liter per day
capacity system should be sufficient.
Table 9.2: Typical SHWS Capacity and Collector Area

0
Capacity (in LPD) for 60 C SWHS Recommended Collector Area (in Sq. m)
100 2
200 4
300 6
500 8
1000 16
178
9.4.4 Evacuated Tube Collectors (ETC) based Solar Water Heaters
Evacuated tube collector consists of parallel rows of tubes

connected to a header pipe (Figure 9.4). The tubes are
made of double layer borosilicate glass tubes evacuated
for reducing heat losses. The outer wall of the inner tube
is coated with selective absorbing material. This helps
absorption of solar radiation and transfers the heat to the
water which flows through the inner tube. Compared with
FPC, ETC has following benefits:
Figure 9.4: Evacuated Tube Collector

 Evacuated tube collector produce higher
temperature (up to 1770C) than flat-plate collector.
 ETC exhibits higher efficiency at higher temperatures unlike FPC whose efficiency falls with
rise in ambient temperature,
The collector area required for system is 1.3 sq.m./100 LPD (for above 500 LPD capacity).
Industrial applications include pre-heating of boiler feed water, cooking/dishwashing in industrial
canteens, washing of milk cans in dairies, sterilization of surgical instruments etc.
9.4.5 Concentrated Solar Power (CSP)
This solar thermal generation technology creates the effect of multiplying effects of the sun to
produce electricity or direct heating. The most common classification of CSP modules is by the
degree of concentration (or concentration ratio), which is expressed in terms of number of
"suns". For example, "80x" means that the intensity of the light that hits the photovoltaic material
is 80 times than it would be without concentration. Concentrating solar also means direct
sunlight rather than diffuse light, limiting this technology to clear, sunny locations. It also means
that, in most cases, tracking is required. One of the key benefits of CSP over PV is that the
heated fluids can be used to store energy from the sun for later use.
Solar concentrators include parabolic dish collectors, linear parabolic trough collectors and
linear Fresnel collectors. Parabolic dish collectorwhich is the predominant technology in
Indiacan generate temperatures of up to 400°C.
179
9.4.6 Parabolic Solar Dish Collector
Solar dish collector consists of a parabolic reflector dish

focusing sunlight onto the focal point in front of the dish
collector where heat absorber is located (Figure 9.5). The
solar dish collectors can consist of flat mirrors attached to
steel or aluminium frames. Some dishes are static and need to
be manually adjusted (23 times a day) to follow the sun,
while others track the sun automatically
The focused beam of intense solar energy generates heat.

Due to the very high temperatures at the focal point, a thermal
oil type fluid is generally used instead of water inside the Figure 9.5 Solar Dish Collector
absorber. The heat absorber can be as simple as a small
evacuated tube or a more complex solar heat engine, such as a Sterling Engine to produce
power. As well as generating electricity, the concentrating type parabolic solar dish can also be
used for cooking applications.
Designs popularized in India include Scheffler dish and ARUN-160 dish―a two-way tracking
parabolic dish with an aperture area of 160 m2, weighing around 20 tonnes and generating 100-
120 kg of steam per hour (between 80-100 kW of thermal output).
9.4.7 Parabolic Trough Collectors (PTC)
PTC is the most mature among the

CSP technologies. The direct
radiation falling perpendicular to the
parabolically curved, trough shaped
mirrors is reflected and concentrated
on an absorber pipe located in the
length of the focal line (Figure 9.6).
Heat from the absorber pipe is
removed by circulating heat transfer
fluid through the pipe and is utilized
to produce electricity or process
heat. PTC is normally tracked in
single axis and oriented in north-
south direction for good energy yield.
Figure 9.6: Parabolic Trough Collector
Concentration ratios up to 80 and heat transfer fluid temperatures up to 5500C have been
practically achieved. The applications include industrial and commercial scale power generation
180
or cogeneration, solar cooling, milk pasteurization, boiler feed water pre-heating and process
hot water/steam supply.
Parabolic Trough Power Plant (PTPP) is thus far the most developed CSP thermal plants that
are operating commercially. The sun’s energy heats up the heat-absorbent medium (mineral oil,
synthetic oil, molten salt etc.), which carries the energy to the water in a boiler heat exchanger,
reaching a temperature of about 400°C. The heat is transferred into the water, producing steam
to drive turbine (Figure 9.7).
Figure 9.7: Schematic of a PTPP with a Thermal Storage System
9.4.8 Linear Fresnel Collectors
Linear Fresnel collectors are similar to parabolic trough collectors, except it substitutes large
parabolic curved mirrors with an array of smaller linear or slightly curved mirror strips which
reflect the solar radiation onto a receiver line mounted above them. These high-concentration
collectors produce temperatures up to 400°C and are extremely suitable for potential industrial
process heat applications.
The above systems can be direct systems (open loop systems) that can use water or air as the
heat transfer fluid, or indirect systems (closed loop systems) that can use other fluids such as
molten salts or synthetic oil.
9.4.9 Power Towers
This configuration uses hundreds or thousands of flat mirrors called heliostats to focus and
concentrate the sunlight on a central fixed receiver (Figure 9.8). The heliostats are arranged in a
circular pattern and each heliostat tracks the sun and reflects sunlight onto the central receiver
mounted on the top of a tower located at the centre of the heliostat field. Due to the use of large
181
numbers of reflectors and the high levels of concentration, very high temperature―about 5500C
is achieved.
The working fluid that receives all this heat can be water, high specific heat capacity oil or
molten salts. A high specific heat ensures large storage of thermal energy in molten oil or salt.
The working fluid is moved from the tanks to a heat exchanger where water is heated to
produce superheated steam to drive turbine and generate electricity. The efficiency level is
similar to that achieved with thermal-fired electricity generators.
Figure 9.8: Power Tower
This technology is more flexible than solar PV plants because of energy storage and ability to
produce power based on the grid demand. Currently, concentrated solar thermal can store
enough heat to produce between 3 and 17 hours of electricity, which makes generation almost
continuous and reliable. The capacity factor of a concentrated solar thermal plant can reach up
to 60% with energy storage, which is much more than the capacity factor of a solar PV plant.
9.4.10 Industrial Applications of Solar Thermal Energy
Solar cooling
Solar thermal cooling systems based on absorption chillers can be used to replace electricity-
driven, vapour-compression air conditioning systems.
In absorption chillers (the most common system), solar energy is used to regenerate the
absorber fluid containing the refrigerant. Two common absorption chiller systems are ammonia-
water (NH3/H20) or water-lithium-bromide (H20/LiBr), as refrigerant/absorber fluids.
182
Single effect chillers require lower temperatures (70100°C) to operate and can be driven by
conventional solar thermal collectors such as FPC and ETC. Large cooling capacities (>100
kW) and high temperatures for double-effect chillers (150180°C) and triple-effect absorption
chillers (200250°C) cannot be met by conventional solar thermal collectors and require solar
concentrators (parabolic trough collector).
Integration of solar heat into industrial processes

Most industrial processes require heating of a fluid stream (e.g. hot air streams, hot water, liquid
baths). Existing heating systems for industrial process are based on steam or hot water from a
boiler, which mainly uses fossil fuels like oil, gas and coal or electricity generated by different
sources. An example of integration of solar heat by direct pre-heating of feed water supply to
boiler is shown in Figure 9.9.
Figure 9.9: Solar Thermal Heat for Pre-heating of Feed to Steam Boiler
9.4.11 Solar PV Technology
Solar PV is a semiconductor device which coverts sunlight directly into electricity. A solar PV
panel, when exposed to sunlight generates voltages and current at its output terminal. The
quantum of electricity depends on the intensity of the sunlight.
Photovoltaic system comprises the following components:

 PV Modules
 Inverters & Charge Controllers
 Mounting structure
 Balance of System Components
183
PV Modules
The PV modules are devices that actually convert solar
energy to electricity (Figure 9.10). They are made from
PV cells, which are most commonly manufactured
using silicon. The conversion efficiency of silicon-
based solar cells varies from 1520%. These solar
cells can be broadly classified into two types:
Monocrystalline and Multicrystalline. Monocrystalline
silicon has longer life than multicrystalline silicon, but Figure 9.10: PV Modules
costlier.
Alternatively, thin film cells are available. The main thin film PV technologies are the CdTe
(Cadmium Telluride) PV technology and CIGS (Copper Indium Gallium Selenide) PV
technology. Thin film glass modules have efficiencies from 1418%. Organic solar cells are a
relatively new technology. The materials are based on conductive organic polymers or organic
molecules based on carbon.
Good quality PV modules are expected to have a useful life of 25 to 30 years.
Inverters
A solar inverter or PV inverter as shown in Fig 9.11 converts
the direct current (DC) output of a photovoltaic (PV) solar panel
into a utility frequency alternating current (AC) that can be fed
into grid or used on-site.
Inverters are classified based on the mode of operation, size, or

implementation topology.
Based on mode of operation, there are (a) inverters for grid-

connected system, (b) inverters for stand-alone system, (c)
inverters for both grid-connected and standalone types
Figure 9.11 Inverter
(bimodal inverters).
Inverters are also classified based on capacity, as central inverters (typical > 300 kW) for large
scale solar PV plant and string inverter (< 60 kW).
The selection of an inverter for a project depends on a number of factors, including application
(with or without battery storage), size, cost, function, usage, etc. Some inverters can also
perform energy monitoring functions. Best inverters offer efficiencies in the range of 95%98%.
Solar inverters incorporate maximum power point tracking or MPPT mechanism to get the
maximum possible power from the PV array.
184
Mounting structure
The mounting structureis the support structure that holds the PV panels to efficiently capture
solar insolation, increase generation, and provide stable structural support. Mounting structures
can be either fixed or tracking. Fixed tilt mounting systems are simple, cheap and maintenance-
free as against costlier tracking system which continuously orients PV panels with the sun. Due
to these reasons, fixed tilt mounting structures are common in India.
Mounting structures for rooftop solar PV installations also require compliance with regulations or
guidelines associated with the structural aspects of the roof, such as load-bearing capacity, and
wind loading.
Balance of System
Balance of system (BoS) is comprised of cables, switchboards, junction boxes, and electricity
meters.
9.4.12 PV system types
The solar PV power system applications can be categorized broadly as grid-connected (grid-
interactive or grid tied) and off-grid PV system.
9.4.13 Grid-connected (Rooftop Solar) PV Plant
A grid-connected rooftop solar PV plant typically refers to a solar PV system that is located on
the roof of a building and is connected to the local distribution grid (Figure 9.12). It is considered
as a type of distributed power generation.
The DC power generated from solar PV panel is converted to AC power using inverter/power
conditioner and fed to the grid. Power generated during the day time is utilized fully by captive
loads and excess power if any is fed to the grid. In case, when solar power is not sufficient due
to cloud cover etc., the captive loads are served by drawing power from the grid.
The grid interactive rooftop system can work on net metering basis wherein the consumer pays
to the utility on net meter reading basis only. Alternatively two meters can also be installed to
measure the export and import of power separately. Most of the States in India have come out
with solar policy supporting grid connected rooftop systems as well as notified regulations on
net-metering.
185
Figure 9.12: Grid-Connected (Utility-Interactive) PV System
Grid connected systems normally do not require battery back-up as the grid acts as the back-up
for feeding excess solar power. However, to enhance the performance reliability of the overall
systems, a minimum battery backup of one hour of load capacity can be adopted.
It has to be ensured that in case of grid failure, the solar power is fully utilized or stopped
immediately as feeding of power to the grid may cause electrocution to grid person working on
maintenance. This feature is called as ‘Islanding Protection’.
The grid connected rooftop PV plant generates electricity at the consumer and hence
contributes to reducing the network losses of the distribution companies (DISCOMs). The
DISCOMs are further benefited as they are able to comply with their solar purchase obligation
targets as specified by Electricity Regulatory Commissions.
Net-metering
The energy generated by the solar rooftop plant is first allowed for self-consumption and the
excess energy is injected to the grid. Net metering is the concept which records the net energy
between export of generated energy and import of utility energy for a billing month. The meter
has the feature of recording both the import and export values (Figure 9.13).
Each State has its own rule and method for meters to be used while recording the energy inputs
and output. Some States authorize use of single meter which shows net consumption. These
types of meters are usually digital meters and run in reverse direction on transferring of power
from the solar power system to grid thereby recording net energy between export of generated
energy and import of utility energy for a billing month. Some states prefer double meters―one
meter to measure energy transferred from the solar power system and the other to record
energy consumed from the grid.
186
Figure 9.13: Net-metering
Benefits of Net Metering:

 Consumer becomes generator for his own electricity requirements. An average energy
consumer becomes Prosumer.
 Local utility grid acts as battery―the user need not worry about the shortage or excess
power generation.
 Consumer benefits by way of considerable reduction in energy bills.
 Consumer is able to reduce diesel consumption wherever DG backup is provided.
9.4.14 Approach and Methodology to develop a Rooftop PV Plant
Before setting up the rooftop PV plant, site survey and analysis has to be carried out and
following details have to be collected:
 Available shadow free area (best to have no shade anywhere on array from 9 a.m to 3
p.m).
 Annual electrical consumption
 Minimum shadow free area (12 sq.m. for 1 kWp)
 Sanctioned load
 Load bearing capacity of the roof
 Mounting area
System Design
A solar PV system design can be done in following steps:
 Load estimation
 Estimation of number of PV panels
 Estimation of battery bank
 Cost estimation of the system
187
Load estimation
 It is necessary to know the energy needs from listing all consumer daily loads, such as
lights, TV, and other appliances.
 To determine total energy consumption, wattage of the appliance should be multiplied by
the number of hours used in a day.
 After adding the energy consumption of each appliance, the power output required from PV
system can be determined.
Steps to design a Grid-connected rooftop solar PV system

A sample calculations showing recommended capacity of the solar modules array for a rooftop
PV system is shown with following steps.
Step 1: Shadow free rooftop area = 60 m2
Step 2: Maximum system capacity on the basis of the shade-free rooftop area.
Capacity = Shade-free rooftop area (in square meters) divided by 12.
The maximum solar PV capacity that can be installed on this rooftop area
=60/12 = 5 kWp
Step 3: Calculate the system capacity based on annual energy consumption.

Capacity = 90% of annual energy consumption (in kWh) divided by 1,500 hrs.
If annual energy consumption is 15,000 kWh
Solar PV system capacity based on annual energy consumption
= (90% x 15,000)/1,500 = 9 kWp
Step 4: Recommended Capacity: Take the lower of the above two capacities determined in
Step 2 and Step 3.
In this example: 5 kWp
Step 5: Solar Grid Inverter Capacity
Step 6: Recommended solar grid inverter capacity in kW shall be in a range of 95110% of the
solar PV array capacity.
In the above example, the solar array capacity was calculated to be 5 kW. The solar
grid inverter required for this array would be in a range of 4.75 – 5.50 kW used (single
phase inverter or three single phase inverter). For systems above 4 kW, three phase
solar grid inverters shall be preferred.
The system is expected to last over 2025 years. Typical payback period is 410 years,
considering a 15% subsidy on initial investement.
188
9.4.15 Off Grid Solar PV
Stand-alone PV systems are designed to operate independent of the electric utility grid, and are
generally designed and sized to supply DC and/or AC electrical loads. Stand-alone PV system
requires batteries to store electricity produced by the PV array during the day, and to supply
electricity to electrical loads as needed (during night times and periods of cloudy weather).
PV panels are connected together in groups or strings. The DC electricity from the PV arrays
flow through charge controller to battery. The controller regulates the DC power to the batteries
and protects the battery from overcharge and over discharge.Voltage is generated at 12, 24, or
48 V DC. DC power produced can power small systems such as lights, signs etc. The Inverter
converts the DC battery power to AC electricity to meet AC loads (Figure 9.14).
Figure 9.14: Typical Stand-alone PV System Powering DC and AC Loads
Battery charge controller adds significantly to the cost of a PV system. The charging of batteries
reduces system efficiency significantly20% energy losses are typical during battery charging.
The battery capacity for off-grid storage is determined based on the climate (periods of cloudy
weather, critical loads etc.). Typically capacity should last for 421 days. Battery should not be
discharged more than 5070% to ensure long life.
Typical off-grid solar PV applications are lighting, electricity and water pumping. The users
include hospitals, educational institutions, Government offices, commercial buildings,
construction companies, telecommunication towers, and petrol bunks. This mode for supply of
power needs battery backup.
189
Off-grid solar PV system has the following advantages:

 Continuous access to power
 No scheduled/unscheduled power cuts
 No dependency on diesel
 Power quality better than grid
 Investment against increasing fuel and grid charges.
9.4.16 Business Models for Installation of Large Capacity Rooftop
Government has identified rooftop and vacant areas in Government/PSU buildings for installing
rooftop solar. Government provides project management consultancy charges (3%) through
MNRE. PSUs have carried out site assessment and many have executed the project through
RESCO/CAPEX. Model bidding documents were developed for both CAPEX (ownership) and
RESCO modes for free downloads and use at MNRE website.
CAPEX Model
The borrower sets up rooftop solar project to reduce its own power consumption and feeds
residual power to the grid. The execution of the project is executed through Engineering,
Procurement and Construction (EPC) contractor. The O&M contract may be given to the same
EPC contractor or some other agency. The CAPEX model is illustrated in Figure 9.15.
Figure 9.15: CAPEX Model
RESCO Model
RESCO (Renewable Energy Service Company) develops the rooftop solar project based on
agreed terms and conditions. Long-term legally binding lease agreement is executed between
190
RESCO and the owner of the site on right to use the roof of the owner building on which solar
project is being installed (Figure 9.16).
RESCO will also enter into a power purchase agreement (PPA) for the supply of power. The
same RESCO may take up multiple projects consecutively and simultaneously across different
locations. RESCO would be the borrower in Bank’s books and liable for repayment of loan
Figure 9.16: RESCO Model
9.4.17 Solar Power Parks
Solar Power Park is a large area of land developed and made available to solar power
developers. Such land is free from statutory clearances and provided with common
infrastructure facility such as water, transmission lines, roads, drainage, communication network
etc. Developers are freed from the burden of seeking number of approvals and focus on
executing the project.
MNRE has drawn a scheme to set up number of solar parks with a collective capacity of 20 GW
across various states in the country, each with a capacity of minimum 500 MW and smaller
parks of 100 MW and above for North Eastern States, HP, Uttarakhand and J&K. Solar Energy
Corporation of India (SECI) would be MNRE’s Agency for handling this Scheme.
The solar parks are being developed in collaboration with the State Governments and their
agencies. For the park, the state will have to provide land to the project developers, which can
be either wasteland or non-agricultural land. It would also enable States to bring in significant
investment from project developers, meet its Solar Renewable Purchase Obligation (RPO)
mandates, and provide employment opportunities to the local population.
191
The services of Renewable Energy Service Company (RESCO) are being used in developing
solar power park. RESCO will design, built, finance and operate the equipment and also bear
performance risk. Solar park agency will sign Power Purchase Agreement (PPA) with the
RESCO and power supply agreement (PSA) with DISCOM.
Example: Charanka Solar Power Project, Gujarat
9.4.18 New Solar Technologies
Solar Skin design

One major barrier for the solar industry is the fact that most homeowners consider solar panels
to be an unsightly home addition. To overcome this issue, Solar Skin design has been created
to make it possible for solar panels to match the appearance of a roof without interfering with
panel efficiency or production.
Solar cell sandwiches

Researchers are working on an exciting new material called perovskitea light sensitive
crystal which could revolutionise solar power. At present, its power conversion efficiency figure
is nearly on a par with traditional silicon at around 22%, but 1,000 times thinner.
This will lead to big drop in price of solar power in future. These third generation solar cells are
built-up layer by layer, like a sandwich, with perovskite as the light-harvesting active layer. It is
semi-transparent, meaning a building’s windows could one day be replaced by coloured plates
of perovskite that would also generate electricity. The final layer of the solar cell is gold, which
acts as an electrode.
Concentrating Photovoltaics (CPV)
In Concentrating Photovoltaics (CPV), a large area of sunlight is focused onto the solar cell with
the help of an optical device. By concentrating sunlight onto a small area, this technology
provides three competitive advantages:
 Requires less photovoltaic material to capture the same amount of sunlight as non-
concentrating PV.
 Makes use of high-efficiency multi-junction cells which becomes viable (although costly) due
to smaller space requirements
 The optical system is made of standard materials, manufactured in proven processes and
thus less expensive than cells.
Concentrating the light also means that direct sunlight rather than diffuse light is required,
limiting this technology to clear, sunny locations. It also means that tracking of sun is required.
192
9.5 Wind Energy
Among the non-conventional energy sources, wind energy is proved as the most matured
source and popular all over the world for clean and safe production of electricity. Earth's
commercially viable wind power potential is estimated to be 72 TW (72000000 MW) which is
four times more than the world's present total energy demand. India ranks fourth in the world in
terms of cumulative installed capacity (34046 MW as of 2018) after China, USA and Germany.
During sunny hours, air in the atmosphere gets heated up and tends to move towards low
pressure regions, creating wind. The kinetic energy of the wind is converted into mechanical
energy and then to electrical energy by means of wind energy conversion systems or wind
turbines.
Wind turbines convert the energy in the wind to electricity by rotating propeller-like blades
around a rotor. The rotor turns the drive shaft, which turns an electric generator. Three key
factors affect the amount of energy a turbine can harness from the wind: wind speed, air
density, and swept area. Energy in the wind is given by the following relation:
3
Power in the Wind =
Where,
ρ = Air Density kg/m3

Swept Area (A) = πR2 (m2) Area of the circle swept by the rotor
V = Wind Velocity m/s
Kinetic Energy =½ mV2
9.5.1 Types of Wind Turbines
Modern wind turbines are categorized into two basic types namely the horizontal-axis and the
vertical-axis design (Figure 9.17 and Figure 9.18). Horizontal-axis wind turbines typically have
either two or three blades. These three-bladed wind turbines are operated "upwind," with the
blades facing into the wind.
193
Fig 9.17: Horizontal Axis Wind Turbine Fig 9.18: Vertical Axis Wind Turbine
Utility-scale turbines range in size from 100 kilowatts to as large as several megawatts. Larger
wind turbines are more cost effective and are grouped together into wind farms, which provide
bulk power to the electrical grid.
Single small turbines, below 100 kilowatts, are used for homes, telecommunications towers,
water pumping etc. Small turbines are sometimes used in combination with diesel generators,
batteries, and solar photovoltaic systems. These systems are called hybrid wind systems and
are typically used in remote, off-grid locations, where a connection to the utility grid is not
available.
9.5.2 Development of Wind Project
Once a site is found to be suitable for wind energy development, the availability of that particular
land should be explored. The primary objective of a wind project design is to locate the wind
turbines in the best wind sites to maximize energy production.
A number of software packages are available to determine the placement of wind turbines at
eligible sites (wind turbines are typically arranged in single or multiple rows, depending on the
size and contour of the land. A single row is most often used on hilltops where the flat land is
very limited. The distance between rows in complex terrain is typically dictated by the terrain
characteristics. Multiple rows can be used in a broader and flatter land.
194
9.5.3 Offshore Wind Energy
The advantage of offshore wind power is that the

wind is much stronger off the coasts, and unlike
wind inland, offshore breezes can be strong in
the afternoon, matching the time when demand
for electricity is the most. The other benefits of
developing offshore wind energy include
abundant space, and consistent wind which can
increase power output by 40% compared to
onshore wind project. India, with long coastline of
over 7500 km, has promising offshore wind Figure 9.19: Offshore Wind Turbine
potential awaiting exploitation (Figure 9.19).
9.5.4 Repowering
The wind power projects initiated in the 1990s by MNRE comprised of turbines of 225/250 kW
and hub height of around 3040 m. These are very low compared with current technologies and
capacities available. As hub heights are directly related to the amount of wind power that is
actually generated, such low heights lead to under utilisation of wind potential. It is estimated
that over 3000 MW capacity installation are from wind turbines of around 500 kW or below.
Most of the turbines installed over the years are now nearing the end of their useful lifetimes. In
order to effectively utilise the resource, MNRE has released the policy for repowering wind
power projects. The refurbishment involves replacing old machines with fewer, larger and taller
modern units, which are quieter, more reliable and can produce more electricity.
There are two approaches to repowering: full and partial. Full repowering involves removing the
old turbines including foundations and replacing with new units. The more popular partial
repowering typically involves an upgrade with more advanced and efficient technology to main
components, particularly the rotor and gearbox, while other elements, such as the foundation
and tower are retained for reuse. Partial repowering is the more complex, since the foundation
— a technically complicated component that is buried under the ground — can be just as
difficult to modify as it is to replace
9.5.5 Small-scale wind turbine
Wind turbines range in power output from a few Watts to tens of megawatts. A wind turbine with
rated capacity of less than or equal to 100 kW is considered as a small wind turbine (SWT) in
India.
The basic operating principles are the same for turbines of all sizes, such as restriction on
output power as given by Betz limit, operational issues namely starting performance, cut-in
195
speed (the lowest wind speed at which power is extracted). These issues are however important
for small machines:
 Small wind turbines are often located where the power is required or adjacent to the owner’s
home which may not be the best wind location, whereas wind farms containing large
turbines are deliberately sited in windy areas.
 The generators of small turbines often have a significant resistive torque that must be
overcome aerodynamically before the blades will start turning. Also pitch control is rarely
used on small wind turbines because of cost.
9.5.7 Small WindSolar Hybrid System
One of the major drawbacks of both wind and solar farms today is that power is produced only
during certain intervals—when the sun shines during the day, or when there are strong enough
winds, typically during the evening.
Superimposition of wind and solar resource maps in India shows that there are large areas
where both wind and solar have high to moderate potential. The existing wind farms have scope
of adding solar PV capacity and similarly there may be wind potential in the vicinity of existing
solar PV plant.
The combination of renewable energy sources, wind & solar are used for generating power
called as windsolar hybrid system. This system is designed using solar panels and small wind
turbines generators for generating electricity. A wind-solar plant will be recognized as hybrid
plant if the rated power capacity of one resource is at least 25% of the rated power capacity of
other resource.
A hybrid project reduces this variation and power can be generated from a plant almost 1518
hours/day apart from optimally utilizing the infrastructure including land and transmission
system.
The hybrid plants allow power producers to tap into multiple energy sources simultaneously,
and generate more power from a given site. A hybrid windsolar system is ideal for remote
location, as the system is normally a stand-alone systemnot connected to the grid. For the
times when neither the wind nor the PV is functioning, hybrid systems can provide power
through batteries and/or a DG set. If batteries run low, DG set can provide power and recharge
the batteries.
The various approaches towards integrating wind and solar are AC integration and DC
integration.
In AC integration, the AC output of the both the wind and solar systems is integrated either at LT
side or at HT side. In the later case both system uses separate step - up transformer and HT
196
output of both the system is connected to common AC Bus-bar. Suitable control equipment are
deployed for controlling the power output of hybrid system.
DC integration (Figure 9.20) is implemented in case of variable speed drive wind turbines using
convertor - inverter. In this configuration the DC output of the both the wind and solar PV plant is
connected to a common DC bus and a common invertors suitable for combined output AC
capacity is used to convert this DC power in to AC power.
Figure 9.20: Hybrid Wind-Solar Power System
9.6 Bio-energy
The organic matter that makes up the plants is known as biomass. Biomass can be used to
produce electricity, transportation fuels, or chemicals. The use of biomass for any of these
purposes is called bio-energy.
Biomass is basically ‘fresh’ carbon from plants and animals, while coal, oil and natural gas
are more like ‘old’ carbon from plants and animals. Biomass is formed on a relatively short
time-scale via photosynthesis from CO2 and water. The CO2 is released during combustion,
and can then be bound by the next generation of plants. Therefore, biomass can be
considered as a ‘carbon neutral’ fuel.
Bioenergy is a versatile energy source. In contrast to other energy sources, biomass can be
converted into solid, liquid and gaseous fuels. Energy from biomass can be extracted by direct
combustion, co-firing, gasification, bio-methanation or digestion.
9.6.1 Direct Combustion of Biomass
In direct combustion, biomass is burnt as a coal substitute or in a boiler. Biomass particles are
first pre-treated to make the biomass easier to mill. For larger-scale combustion, fluidized bed
reactor systems are used. This reactor type allows feeding of larger biomass particles up to the
order of several centimetres. With fixed bed or moving bed reactors, large biomass particles can
197
be combusted. Air for combustion is distributed from bottom. These systems are also used for
waste incineration and typical operating temperatures are above 1000oC.
9.6.2 Co-firing of Biomass
Co-firing of fossil fuels and various types of biomass is a mature technology and is currently
being successfully practiced globally. With technological advances, many limitations associated
with it have been overcome. Coal-fired plants can be converted or retrofitted to accommodate
biomass co-firing with limited impact on efficiency, operations, or lifespan.
Various technologies have been developed to enable co-firing biomass with coal in pulverized
coal (PC) boilers. The vast capacity of existing PC boilers offers great potential for increasing
biomass utilization and economic benefits compared to new stand-alone power plants,
9.6.3 Biomass Gasification
Biomass gasification is a thermo-chemical conversion of biomass into a combustible mixture

through partial combustion route with air supply restricted to less than that theoretically required
for full combustion. The output from the gasifier is also known as producer gas or syngas. A
gasifier system basically comprises of a reactor where the gas is generated, and is followed by
a cooling and cleaning unit which cools and cleans the gas. In the process, tar residues are also
produced.
Producer gas consists primarily of carbon monoxide, hydrogen, carbon dioxide, and nitrogen,
and has a heating value of 4 to 6 MJ/Nm3, or 10 to 15 percent of the heating value of natural
gas. The heating value of the produced gas depends on the nature of the biomass and the
gasification process. The produced gas can be burned directly in boilers, or it can be used as a
fuel in engines or gas turbines after removal of tar.
There are two types of biomass gasification technologies—

fixed bed or fluidized bed—both based on direct combustion.
Small-scale gasifier capacities range from 5 kg/hour up to
about 500 kg/hour of biomass input.
In fixed-bed gasifier reactors, the biomass is injected into the

top of the unit. There are two methods to provide air for the
gasification process namely updraft gasifier and downdraft
gasifier. The downdraft gasifier is preferred because less tar
residues is produced.
In downdraft gasifier, air and biomass move in the downward

direction (Figure 9.21). The synthesis gas exits at the Figure 9.21: Downdraft Gasifier
198
bottom of the reactor. The amount of tar produced is smaller than in the updraft method
because of high temperature in the hot zone, around 10000C, which causes tars to be broken
down into lighter gases without affecting its energy content. Therefore tar content is much less
than updraft gasifier.
In fluidized-bed gasifiers, a mixture of air, biomass particles, and inert bed materials undergo
drying, pyrolysis, and gasification at high temperatures. The gasification process is more
efficient due to the better heat transfer between the gas and the solid phases in fluidized state.
Since this system operates at high temperature, a part of the tar undergoes cracking. The
advantage of fluidized bed gasifiers compared to fixed ones are their higher capacities, the
possibilities of using wide variety of biomass fuels, and even wet biomass.
9.6.4 Anaerobic Digestion
In anaerobic digestion (also called as bio-methanation), biomass such as manure, sewage

sludge and liquid waste is broken down by microbes at optimum temperatures (atleast 35°C).
This process is called as anaerobic which means without air. A biogas digester should produce
200–400 m3 of biogas per dry ton input containing 55–70% methane, which means around 8 GJ
per ton input, for producing heat or generating electricity. Although, heat value of gas is less
than the energy content of dry dung or sewage, the process produces clean fuel and disposes
of odorous waste.
The predominant design in India is the floating-cover digester (Figure 9.22), which was
introduced commercially by the Khadi and Village Industries Commission (KVIC).
Figure 9.22: Anaerobic Digestion

199
With this design (Figure 9.2.2), a gas holder floats on a central guide and provides constant
pressurisation of the produced gas. The reactor walls generally are brick or concrete, and the
cover is made of mild steel. The digester is fed semi-continuously, with input slurry displacing an
equivalent amount of effluent sludge. The predominant feed for digesters is a mix of cattle dung
and water. The gas production rate is expressed in terms of daily volumetric gas production per
unit of digester volume. The residual sludge can be used as an organic manure for gardening.
The wastes from following industries/sources can be bio-digested to produce biogas:

 Distilleries & Breweries.
 Sewage Treatment Plants (Municipal solids, liquids & Landfills).
 Food & Agro Processing Units (Starch, Palm Oil &Food processing Units).
 Dairy
Typical Composition of Biogas:


Methane – 55 to 70%

Carbon dioxide – 15 to 40%

H2S – 1000 to 35,000 ppm

Humidity – 100%

Calorific Value – 4500 to 6500 KCal /m3
Application
H2S quantity has to be reduced to less than 200 ppm using a scrubber before use. The biogas
can be burnt directly as a fuel for cooking or heating, or it can used in DG set for producing
electricity. Alternatively, it can be used in waste heat boiler to produce low pressure steam. In
industries such as Diary and Starch, where large quantities of refrigeration are needed, the
biogas can be used as the heat source for absorption refrigeration system.
in a Vapour Absorption Machine (VAM Chillers).
Some thumb-rules for biogas generation are:

 10 kg of organic kitchen waste yields 1 m3 of biogas
 25 kg of cow-dung yields 1 m3 of biogas
 1 m3 of biogas is sufficient for cooking requirements of a family per day
9.6.5 Liquid Biofuels
The biomass can also be used make petroleum substitutes or alternative fuels which are called
as biofuels. The main biofuels are ethanol and biodiesel. Ethanol can be used as a direct petrol
substitute in some vehicles, but it can also be blended with petrol to be used in a typical car.
Biodiesel is produced from vegetable and animal fats. Depending upon the source of the
feedstock, different qualities of biodiesels are produced. Vegetable oils are the easiest to source
200
as suitable energy crops can be harvested and processed as biodiesel. Biodiesels can be
blended with regular diesel for use in regular vehicles or used as a direct substitute in modified
vehicles.
The National Policy on Biofuels, which was approved on 2008, aims to ensure that a minimum
quantity of biofuels is readily available in the market in order the meet the demand at any given
time. A target of 20% blending of biofuels, including biodiesel and bioethanol was proposed in
2017. However, implementation has not matched with the target. Ethanol production depends
on sugar cane production in India. Hence the blend targets were partially successful in years of
surplus sugar cane production.
9.7 Small-scale Hydropower
Small-scale or micro hydro units convert the energy of flowing water into electrical energy. With
a suitable water source, micro hydro is the most cost effective form of renewable electricity.
Micro hydro power is the best choice where water supply is continuously available.
In the run-of-river hydro (Figure 9.23), the natural flow of water is strong enough to power the
hydro turbines with small height difference. Even resources with low heads of 2 to 10 metres are
being exploited for producing power. They create less environmental impact than conventional
hydro units because the natural flow of the river is only partially blocked.
Figure 9.23: Run-of River Hydro
The major advantages of smallscale hydro are their high reliability and high efficiency.
Efficiency ranges from 7075%, which means that 7075% of the potential energy can be
converted to electricity.
201
Micro or pico hydro generators operate with power outputs that are generally less than 5 kW.
For small–scale hydro, micro and pico category, low head turbine design based on
Archimedean screw which can be applied to 1 to 10 metre head difference and low flow rates of
between 0.01 to 10 cubic metres per second are being used.
Power generated by hydropower station

Electricity generation in hydropower requires height differences, or head, and flowing water. To
calculate the power generated by a hydropower station, the following formula is used.
P = ηρQgh
Where,
P = power (W)
η = efficiency of hydropower station
ρ = density of water (kg/m3)
Q = flow rate of water (m3/s)
g = acceleration due to gravity (m/s2)
h = height difference between the top reservoir and bottom reservoir, or Head (m)
Example
The hydropower unit has a head of 10 metres and handles flow of 0.17 cubic metres of water
every second. The turbine operates at an efficiency of 90%. The reference density of water,
1000 kg/m3, and the acceleration due to gravity, 9.81 m/s2. The power developed by the turbine:
P = ηρQgh
= 0.9 x 1000 kg/m3 x 0.17 m3/s x 9.81 m/s2 x 10 m
= 15009.3 kg.m2.s-3
= 15009.3 or ~15 kW
9.8 Electrical Energy Storage (EES)
With the planned integration of nearly 160 GW of wind and solar energy by 2020, there is a
need for storage applications to address the issues of variability, unpredictability and location
dependency of these renewable energy sources.
With developments such as distributed generation and smart grid, there is need to store
electricity where it is needed. Due to recent developments in storage technologies and
developments, electricity can be stored in megawatt scale.These electricity energy storage
(EES) applications are increasingly becoming viable around the world.
202
Energy storage technologies are broadly classified into mechanical, electrochemical, chemical,
electrical and thermal energy storage systems as shown in Figure 9.24.
Figure 9.24: Electrical Energy Storage (EES)
Pumped storage hydro: It is the most successful energy storage systems due to their fast
response and storage capacity. Water is pumped during off-peak hours from lower reservoir to
upper reservoir. Water is allowed to flow back from upper reservoir to run a turbine and
generate electricity when required. The long lifetimes and stability makes them the ideal storage
systems.
Compressed air energy storage (CAES): This technology is based on the conventional gas
turbines and stores energy by compressing air in an underground storage. Electricity is used to
compress air and when needed the compressed air is mixed with natural gas, combusted and
expanded in a modified gas turbine. The turbine produces the same amount of output power as
conventional gas turbines but uses only 40% of the gas. The advantage of CAES is its large
capacity; disadvantages are low round-trip efficiency and geographic limitation of locations
where it can be installed.
Flywheels: Kinetic energy is stored in a large rotational cylinder where the energy is maintained
by keeping its speed constant. A transmission device is used to accelerate or decelerate the
flywheel by supplying and extracting electricity. When the speed is increased higher amount of
energy is stored. Flywheels are extensively used for space applications and latest generation
flywheels are reported to be suitable for grid applications. The long life of this technology with
relatively less maintenance requirements makes it another ideal storage solution. However, high
levels of self-discharge due to air resistance and bearing losses may make it less efficient.
Thermal storage: These systems use chilled water, ice storage, hot water, molten salt as
storage medium. The efficiencies vary with the material. These storage systems are becoming
relevant for integrating large scale renewable energy such as concentrated solar thermal
203
technology which can be used as a reliable and despatchable source of energy to balance the
supply and demand.
Hydrogen: Excess electricity from renewable energy can be used to produce hydrogen by
electrolysis and therefore can be considered as zero-carbon fuel. Hydrogen can be stored as
gas under pressure or liquid at low temperatures. It can then be used to create electricity in
conventional reciprocating engines, gas turbines or in fuel cells, transport etc. A further area of
application is that the hydrogen can be injected into existing natural-gas networks.
Battery storage:
Battery storage is a solution to the intermittency of renewable energy sources such as solar and
wind. As battery costs continue to drop, battery storage will become an increasingly attractive
option for storing electricity from such renewables.
Lead acid batteries are the world's most widely used battery type. Valve-regulated lead-acid
(VRLA) batteries absorbed glass mat (AGM) designs have increased performance and total
energy output making them a good choice for renewable energy off-grid applications at a lower
cost than other batteries. However, their lifespan tend to be relatively short because of lower
depth of discharge.
VRLA batteries with added nanocarbon are more resistant to sulfation which can reduce the life
of batteries faster. The carbon slows sulfation and allows the battery to charge faster and cycle
more than traditional lead acid.
Lithium-ion batteries are most popular as it powers the lives of millions of people each day
ranging from laptops and cell phones to hybrids and electric cars. Lithium provides the highest
energy density per weight--far lighter and more efficient than the popular lead acid battery.
Lithium-ion batteries have a significantly higher cycle life than lead acid batteries in deep
discharge applications. This means that lithium-ion battery can support a higher number of
complete charge/discharge cycles before its capacity falls under 80%.
Lithium ion’s high energy density and long cycle life has made it dominant in electric vehicle
applications. Electric vehicles could also have an impact on energy storage through vehicle-to-
grid technologies, in which their batteries can be connected to the grid and discharge power for
others to use
Sodium Sulfur (NAS) Battery is a type of molten-salt battery constructed from liquid sodium
(Na) and sulfur (S). This type of battery has a high energy density, high efficiency of
charge/discharge and long cycle life. The operating temperatures of 300 to 350 °C and high
corrosive nature of sodium makes it suitable only for large-scale grid storage applications.
These batteries are ideally suited for supporting peak demand and stabilizing the grid.
Redox (reduction–oxidation) flow or a flow battery, or battery, is a type of electrochemical cell

where chemical energy is provided by two chemical components dissolved in liquids contained
204
within the system and separated by an Ion exchange membrane accompanied by flow of
electric current through the membrane. The major advantage over other rechargeable batteries
is a long lifespan.
Super Capacitor: Capacitor is device which store current as static energy, rather than
traditional storage of energy which uses a chemical reaction Super capacitors have a very high
energy density (energy per unit volume or mass) than normal capacitors. Super-capacitors use
two layers of the dielectric material separated by a very thin insulator surface as the dielectric
medium, whereas normal capacitors use only a single layer of dielectric material
Unlike battery, a super capacitor can be re-charged indefinitely and do not have issues such as
battery life, over-charging, and maintenance. The super capacitors can withstand much higher
numbers of charge/discharge cycles and their response time is fast. They are ideally suited for
very short-term power applications. However, the cost per unit of energy storage capacity is
higher than for batteries.
9.9 REEE Integration for mitigation of Climatic Change
India is endowed with abundant renewable energy (RE) resources that currently supply about 5
percent of the country’s grid electricity, with potential to enable a low-carbon growth path that
can substantially strengthen the country’s energy security and address climate change.
However greater deployment of variable renewable energy (VRE) resources, like wind and solar
poses challenges and costs for operating electricity systems. In this context it is important to
answer the following two key questions if the country is to integrate its RE resources into the
power grid at an accelerated scale.
a) How can the issue of intermittence of RE resources and the need for load balancing be
addressed?
b) What are the emerging global best practices that countries are following to integrate their
variable RE sources into the grid at a significant scale?
Some countries have been able to integrate significant levels of VRE into their power systems
through improved methods for integrated planning and, deepening and broadening the
application of demand side energy efficiency programs to contend with the intermittence of RE
resources. The geographic concentration of India’s RE resources – particularly wind –
exacerbates existing transmission bottlenecks. Furthermore, much of India’s new VRE
generation is not covered by the most up-to-date power systems control technology, which
prevents grid operators from visualizing the full extent of the challenge that they have to deal
with. Current methods for power system analysis and planning do not permit a holistic approach
to the design reforms in support of VRE integration. In particular the rigorous grid-integration
205
modeling used to build constituencies and support for increased RE targets in other countries is
at its inception in India.
Efforts are underway to address some of the aforementioned issues of large-scale integration of
RE into the power grid in India. They range from analysis and planning, policy and regulatory
reforms, new infrastructure, and the application of utility driven demand response and efficiency
programs. Key initiatives include the Government of India’s (GOI) Smart Grid Roadmap and
pilot projects in its distribution utilities, the reform of the Electricity Grid Code (particularly
forecasting, scheduling, and managing system imbalances, and the application of demand side
management/EE strategies) and a new process to prepare a roadmap for RE in India.
206
10. GHG AND CARBON FOOTPRINT ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING
10.1 Introduction to Greenhouse gases and Carbon Foot Print
Human activities continue to impact Earth's climate through the emission of greenhouse
gases. The climate change is caused by a range of gases, known collectively as
„greenhouse gases‟. Six greenhouse gases (GHGs) contribute the most towards global
warming and associated climatic change. They are carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4),
nitrous oxide (N2O), hydro-fluorocarbons (HFCs), per-fluorocarbons (PFCs), and sulphur
hexafluoride (SF6). As concentration of these gases increase in atmosphere so will be the
global warming. Over the last few decades, temperatures have risen sharply at the global
level — to approximately 0.80C higher than our 19611990 baseline. The global temperature
is rising at the rate of 0.170C per decade.
Of these greenhouse gases, most common is carbon dioxide released from combustion of
fossil fuels such as coal, oil, natural gas etc. and that is why it is talked about the most.
Figure 10.1 shows trend in CO2 levels in parts per million (ppm) over the last four decades.
Figure 10.1: Global CO2 Concentration Increase Since 1980
Figure 10.2 shows global average temperature increase as a result of increasing CO2 levels.
207
Figure 10.2: Global Average Annual Temperature Trend
The term „carbon footprint‟ is used to describe the amount of total greenhouse gas emissions
caused directly and indirectly by a person, organisation, event or product. It is an approach
for organizations and individuals to assess their carbon equivalent emissions i.e. all GHG
converted to equivalent carbon emissions (CO2 eq.). In other words, it is simply a unit for all
GHGs expressed as if they had the same climate change effects as CO2.
At least 40 countries—both developed and developing—require facilities and/or companies

that emit above a certain amount of greenhouse gas emissions to account and report their
GHG emissions on an annual basis. In India, GHG Program is a voluntary initiative to
standardize measurement and management of GHG emissions. The GHG reporting
program has following benefits:
 It allows policymakers to better understand greenhouse gas emissions sources and

trends.
 It can direct overall country climatic change policy
 It can collect data on energy production and consumption, which can steer energy
efficiency policy development.
 It can be used by policy makers to set realistic, source-specific GHG reduction strategies.
 It can be used to assess which technology is more effective for GHG emission reduction
so that mitigation strategies can be planned.
 It can lead to regular tracking of emissions and enable benchmarking.
 It enables industries to understand their emissions-related risks and opportunities so
they can efficiently focus on mitigation activities that will produce the greatest GHG
reductions.
The focus of this chapter is on GHG and carbon footprint accounting and reporting for an
organization i.e. organization carbon footprint.
208
10.2 Global Greenhouse Gas Emission Scenarios
An increase of temperature beyond 2°C relative to pre-industrial levels is considered to be

catastrophic. To mitigate the impacts of climate change, countries in the world entered into
an international climate agreement at the U.N. Framework Convention on Climate Change
(UNFCCC) organized Conference of the Parties (COP 21) in Paris in December 2015 to limit
the temperature rise to 1.5°C, and to achieve net zero emissions in the second half of this
century. The agreement envisages publicly stating their post-2020 climate actions they
intended to take known as Intended Nationally Determined Contributions (INDCs).
INDCs reflect each country‟s goal for reducing emissions, taking into account its domestic
circumstances and capabilities. Some countries also address how they will adapt to climate
change impacts, and what support they need from, or will provide to, other countries to adopt
low-carbon pathways and to build climate resilience.
The Paris climate agreement set actions to keep warming limited to 1.520C by the end of
the century. Potential future emission pathways of global greenhouse gas emissions
(measured in gigatonnes of CO2 eq. in the case of no climatic policies, current implemented
policies, national pledges within the Paris Agreement, and 20C and 1.50C consistent
pathways are shown in Figure 10.3. High, medium and low pathways represent ranges for a
given scenario. Temperature figures represent the estimated average global temperature
from pre-industrial to 2100. The five scenarios are shown in Figure 10.3.
 No climate policies: projected future emissions if no climate policies were implemented; this
would result in an estimated 4.1-4.8°C warming by 2100 (relative to pre-industrial
temperatures)
 Current climate policies: projected warming of 3.13.7°C by 2100 based on current

implemented climate policies
 National pledges: if all countries achieve their current targets/pledges set within the Paris
climate agreement, it is estimated average warming by 2100 will be 2.6-3.2°C. This will still be
above the overall target of the Paris Agreement to keep warming "well below 2°C".
 2°C consistent: there are a range of emissions pathways that would be compatible with
limiting average warming to 2°C by 2100. This would require a significant increase in ambition
of the current pledges within the Paris Agreement.
 1.5°C consistent: there are a range of emissions pathways that would be compatible with
limiting average warming to 1.5°C by 2100. However, all would require a very urgent and rapid
reduction in global greenhouse gas emissions.
209
Figure 10.3: Potential Future GHG Emission Pathways
10.3 Indian GHG Scenario
India is the sixth largest economy in the world by nominal Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
and third largest in terms of purchasing power parity. The per capita energy consumption is
estimated to rise by about 5% annually till 2030. Under the business-as-usual scenario, the
annual energy use per household is likely to increase to 2750 kWh by 2050.
The total GHG emission is about 2.34 billion tonnes of CO2/year which is about 7% of global
CO2 emissions1. Per-capita CO2 emission is 1.84 tonnes (2016). India is quite vulnerable to
the impacts of climate change. It is facing challenges which include water availability,
changing rainfall patterns, and disaster management. It is difficult to quantify the expected
impact of climate change. However, a recent World Bank study estimates that developing
countries like India will need between $70 and $100 billion per year through 2050 to meet
current and future climate adaptation needs.
India has committed to reduce its GHG emissions by 33-35% by 2030 compared to 2005
levels as its INDC commitments. These targets are planned to be met by identifying options
to reduce or mitigate emissions while simultaneously meeting aspirations of achieving
growth, maintain sustainable lifestyle and climate justice to protect the poor and vulnerable
from adverse impacts of climate change. Accordingly the following focus areas are set as
part of its INDC communication2.
 To reduce the emissions intensity of its GDP by 3335% of the 2005 levels by 2030.
1 BP Statistical Review of World Energy-2018

2 Source : INDIA’s INDC’s target submitted to UNFCCC
210
 To achieve about 40% cumulative electric power installed capacity through non-fossil
fuel sources by 2030 with the help of transfer of technology and low cost international
finance including from Green Climate Fund (GCF).
 To create an additional carbon sink of 2.5 to 3 billion tonnes of CO 2 equivalent

through additional forest and tree cover by 2030.
To implement the INDC targets, India‟s GHG emissions need to be measured, targets for
reduction to be set and progress against these targets assessed and reported annually.
However, under UNFCCC India do not have binding GHG mitigation commitments in
recognition of its relatively small contribution to the greenhouse problem as well as low
financial and technical capacities.
10.4 GHG Accounting and Reporting
When consolidating GHG data, it is important to distinguish between GHG accounting and
GHG reporting. GHG accounting concerns the consolidation of GHG emissions from
operations in which a company holds an operational or financial control and linking the data
to specific operations, sites, geographic locations, and business processes. Accounting for
emissions can help identify the most effective reduction opportunities.
GHG reporting, on the other hand, concerns the presentation of GHG data in appropriate
formats to meet the needs of various reporting uses and users. As concerns over climatic
change grow, NGOs, investors and other stakeholders are increasingly calling for greater
corporate disclosure of GHG information. In response, companies are preparing stakeholder
reports containing information on GHG emissions as a stand-alone report or as a part of
broader sustainability reports.
10.5 Relevant Protocols and Standards
Two global approaches to organizational (sometimes called “corporate” or “entity-level”)

greenhouse gas accountings are available:
The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG Protocol) was developed by a consortium convened by
the World Resources Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for Sustainable
Development (WBCSD), and second revision is now available.
ISO 14064-1:2006 Greenhouse gases -- Part 1: Specification with guidance at the

organization level for quantification and reporting of greenhouse gas emissions and
removals.
It specifies principles and requirements at the organization level for quantification and
reporting of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and removals. It includes requirements for the
211
design, development, management, reporting and verification of an organization's GHG

inventory.
10.6 Estimating GHG or Carbon Emissions
GHG emissions or carbon dioxide equivalent emissions or simply carbon emissions refer to
emissions of all GHGs stated in terms of tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent (CO2 eq). The
carbon dioxide equivalent (CO2 eq) allows the different greenhouse gases to be compared
on a like-for-like basis relative to one unit of CO2.
CO2e is calculated by multiplying the emissions of each of the greenhouse gases by its 100
year global warming potential (GWP).The equivalence is based on Global Warming Potential
(GWP) of each GHG and CO2 is considered as common denominator with an equivalence of
1 and other GHGs are expressed in CO2e using their respective GWP. For example
methane (CH4) has GWP is 28. Hence 1 kg CH4 emissions equal 28 kg CO2 eq. The GWPs
for different GHGs are presented in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1: GHG and its GWP

GWP (100
GHG GHG Name Common Sources/Uses year time
horizon)
CO2 Carbon Dioxide Fossil fuel combustion, forest clearing, cement 1
production etc.
CH4 Methane Coal mining, fuel combustion, landfills, 28
wastewater treatment, production and distribution
of natural gas and petroleum, etc.
N2O Nitrous Oxide Fossil fuel combustion, fertilizers, nylon 265

production, manure, etc.
HFC's Hydro Refrigeration gases, aluminum smelting, Up to

fluorocarbons semiconductor manufacturing, etc. 12400
PFC's Per- Aluminum production, semiconductor industry, Up to

fluorocarbons etc. 11100
SF6 Sulfur Insulated switch gears and circuit breakers. 23500
hexafluoride
Source: GWP values for 100-year time horizon; IPPC fifth assessment report, 2014 (AR5)
In addition to major six Kyoto GHG gases, companies may also decide to report emissions
data for other GHGs (i.e. Montreal Protocol gases) separately.
212
10.7 Calculations and Methods for Determining GHG Emissions
The following methods can be used to estimate GHG emissions:
 Measuring GHG emissions from identified sources and converting them to CO2
equivalent using GWP.
 Measuring energy use and converting it to CO2 equivalent using notified emission
factors
 Estimating GHG emissions from production using product emission factors
 Estimating GHG emissions based on fuel consumed and its composition (ultimate
analysis)
 Approaches for estimating GHG emissions from transport
 Estimating GHG emissions from chemical reaction using material balance
A brief description followed by illustrative calculation of GHG assessments by each of the

above methods with examples are given as follows:
10.7.1 Measuring GHG emissions from identified sources converting them to CO2
equivalent using GWP
An industrial source emits around 10 tonnes of CO2 and 100 kg of methane. It also
consumes around 0.2 kg of HFC. CO2e emissions using GWP can be estimated as
shown in Table 10.2.
Table 10.2: Estimation of Total GHG Emissions based on Emission Releases

GHG gas emitted Quantity GWP CO2 eq
Carbon dioxide 10 t 1 10 t
Methane 100 kg 28 2.8 t
HFC 0.2 kg 12400 2.48 t
TOTAL GHG EMISSIONS 15.28 t
10.7.2 Measuring energy use and converting it to CO2 equivalent using notified
emission factors
For sources where there are difficulties in measuring emissions from source, such as due
to use of fuels whose source of origin or quality is not known, or use of electricity produced
using different fuels, for such GHG sources, emission factors that are published from
various agencies like CEA can be used (refer Table 10.3).
213
Table 10.3: GHG Emissions Factors
S. No. Parameter Units Emission

Factor
1 Grid Electricity Kg CO2/kWh 0.82
2 CPP Electricity
a) Coal Fired Kg CO2/kWh 1.04
b) Diesel Fired Kg CO2/kWh 0.59
c) Gas Fired (CC) Kg CO2/kWh 0.43
3 Coal(Sub-bituminous) Kg CO2/TJ 90600
4 Diesel Kg CO2/TJ 69100
5 Furnace oil Kg CO2/TJ 71900
Source: CO2 Baseline Database for the Indian Power Sector, CEA, Dec 2014
As an example of how to estimate GHG emissions using these factors, assume an

industry uses 950 kWh of grid electricity and 400 kWh of dieselfired CPP electricity (DG
set) and also uses 500 kg of furnace oil for heating purposes. The total CO2e emissions
from the industrial source can be estimated as shown in Table 10.4.
Table 10.4: Estimation of Total GHG Emissions based on Fuel/ Power Consumption
Energy consumed Quantity Emission CO2e

Factor, kg CO2
Grid Electricity 950 kWh 0.82/kWh 779 kg
Diesel fired CPP electricity 400 kWh 0.59/kWh 236 kg
Furnace oil 500 kg 3.11/kg 1520 kg
TOTAL GHG emissions 2535 kg = 2.54 t
10.7.3 Estimating emissions from production using product emission factors
Standard GHG emissions data published by various government and other data agencies
can be used to estimate the total GHG emissions. For example, in cement sector, the
Energy Benchmarking for Cement Industry: Version 2.0, by CII; Cement Sector Emissions
Calculation Tool India Version 1.0, July 2005 by TERI can be used. As an example, GHG
emissions from cement industry producing 4 MTPA cement using specific GHG emission
data could be calculated as shown in Table 10.5.
214
Table 10.5: Estimation of Total GHG Emissions Based on Emission Factors

Cement Emissions, tCO2e
Production For Thermal energy For Electrical Total
energy
1 ton 0.232 0.0604 0.2924
4 MTPA 928000 241600 1169600
= 1.17 MT CO2/year
10.7.4 Estimating emissions based on fuel consumed and its composition (ultimate
analysis)
The ultimate analysis of fuel e.g. coal can be measured to estimate the total GHG
emissions as given in Table 10.6.
Table 10.6: Ultimate Analysis of Sub-Bituminous Coal

Element/Compound (Weight %)
Carbon 39.17
Hydrogen 2.70
Oxygen 8.57
Nitrogen 1.16
Moisture 5.19
Mineral Matter 43.25
Sulphur 0.48
Equation: C + O2  CO2
Formula Wt.: 12 32 44
Tons emission per Ton carbon 1 3.67
Tons Emission per ton fuel 0.39 1.43
For example, if the thermal power plant burns 1 tonne of coal, 1.43 tonnes CO2 will be
emitted.
10.7.5 Approaches for estimating GHG emissions from transport
Three approaches are given for estimating GHG emissions from transport:
a) Calculating emissions based on fuel used and emission factor

Suppose total fuel used by all the diesel vehicles in a company is 150,000 litres annually. If
the emission factor for diesel is 2.67 kg CO2 eq/L, then
Total emissions = 150,000 x 2.67 = 400,500 kgCO2 eq./year

215
b) Calculating emissions based on fuel expenditure and emission factor

The company does not collect fuel usage data. It tracks total fuel spend as INR 15
Lakhs/year. The average price for the year for diesel is INR.60/Litre.
Fuel use = Fuel spend ÷ Fuel price

= 1500000 ÷ 60
= 25000 Litres
Therefore:
Total emissions = 25000 x 2.67
= 66750 kgCO2 .eq./year
c) Calculating fuel use from mileage and fuel efficiency

If the company does not have fuel expenditure data but know total mileage as 20000
km/year and estimates its trucks get mileage of 7 km/Litre. It therefore calculates its
emissions as:
Fuel use = Distance ÷ Fuel efficiency

= 20000 ÷ 7
= 2857 Litres/year
Therefore:
Total emissions = 2857 x 2.67
= 7628 kgCO2 eq./year
10.7.6 Estimating GHG emissions from chemical reaction using material balance
approach
Apart from combustion of fossil fuels, manufacturing of few products also emit GHGs. For
example, in cement manufacturing process, calcium carbonate is thermally decomposed
to form calcium oxide. The chemical equation is as follows:
Equation: CaCO3  CaO + CO2

Formula Wt.: 100 56 44
Tonnes of Emission per Tonnne CaCO3 1 0.44
If 1 tonne calcium carbonate is thermally decomposed, 440 kg CO2 is released into the
atmosphere.
10.8 Carbon Footprints
A carbon footprint measures the total greenhouse gas emissions caused directly and
indirectly by a person, organisation, event or product. A carbon footprint considers all six of
the Kyoto Protocol greenhouse gases.
The related terms are carbon neutral and carbon offset. A company becomes carbon neutral
when its net greenhouse gas emissions become zero. To become carbon neutral, company
216
must calculate its emissions, reduce these emissions as much as possible, and purchase
carbon credits equivalent to the remaining emissions which is called carbon offset. This
process results in its balance emissions being offset and leads to net zero emissions or
being carbon neutral.
Measuring the carbon footprint of products across their full lifecycle has following benefits:
 Identify cost savings opportunities

 Plan GHG emissions reductions
 Determine what level of emissions they need to offset to become carbon neutral
 Demonstrate environmental/corporate responsibility leadership
 Fulfill request from business or investors
 Meet customer demands for information on product carbon footprints
 Differentiate and meet demands from „green‟ consumers (for improving marketing).
 Incorporate emissions impact into decision making on choosing suppliers, materials,
product design, manufacturing processes, etc.
 Help meet national INDC targets
10.9 Types of Carbon Footprints
Broadly carbon footprint is assessed for organization as a whole (organizational carbon

footprint) or for a product (product carbon footprint).
 Organizational carbon footprint
An organisational carbon footprint measures the GHG emissions from all the activities
across the organization, including energy used in buildings, industrial processes and
company vehicles. It measures both direct and indirect GHG emissions.
 Product carbon footprint.
A product carbon footprint measures the GHG emissions of the product over the whole
life, from the extraction of raw materials, transportation to plant and manufacturing right
through to its use and final re-use, recycling or disposal, or to the extent it controls the
production, process based on boundaries it defines itself.
The different boundaries of organization and product footprints are illustrated in the Figure
10.4.
217
Figure 10.4: The Different Boundaries of Organisational and Product Footprints
10.9.1 Organizational Footprint
Of the two standards available to measure GHG emissions resulting from the activities of an
organization for corporate GHG accounting, the Greenhouse Gas Protocol standard is most
widely used.
The Greenhouse Gas Protocol Standard
The Greenhouse Gas Protocol sets out how to account GHG emissions by categorizing
emissions into three groups or „scopes‟:
Scope 1: Direct GHG emissions

Companies report GHG emissions from sources they own or control as scope 1. Direct GHG
emissions are the result of activities undertaken by the company.
 Generation of electricity, heat or steam. These emissions result from combustion of fuels
in boilers, furnaces, turbines etc.
 Physical and chemical processing. These emissions arise from manufacture or

processing of chemicals and materials, e.g. cement, aluminum, ammonia manufacture,
and waste processing
 Transportation of materials, products, waste and employees. These emissions arise from
the combustion of fuels in company owned/controlled mobile combustion sources (e.g.
cars, buses, trucks, trains, airplanes etc.)
 Fugitive emissions. These emissions results from intentional or unintentional sources,

e.g., leaks from joints, seals, packing and gaskets.
Scope 2: Indirect GHG emissions

Indirect emissions from any electricity, heat or steam purchased and used onsite. Although
the emission is not under the control of the organization, by using the energy it is indirectly
responsible for the release of CO2.
218
Purchased electricity represents one of the largest source of GHG emissions and most
significant opportunity to reduce these emissions. Companies can reduce their use of
electricity by investing in energy-efficient technologies and energy conservation.
Also renewable energy provides opportunities to switch over to less GHG intensive sources
of energy. Company can also setup cogeneration plant and reduce electricity supply from
grid which is more GHG intensive.
Scope 3: Other indirect emissions

Any other indirect emissions from sources outside organisation direct control comes under
scope 3. Scope 3 is optional, but it provides an opportunity to be innovative in GHG
management. Examples of scope 3 emissions include transportation of purchased materials,
purchased fuels and sold products, use of sold goods, employee commuting and business
travel, outsourced transportation, waste disposal and water consumption.
Under the GHG protocol, all organizational footprints must include scope 1 and 2 emissions.
There is flexibility when choosing which scope 3 emissions to measure and report. Typical
activities covered under each are summarized in Table 10.7.
Table 10.7: Activities Covered Under Each Scope

Scope 1 Scope 2 Scope 3
Fuel combustion Purchased electricity, Purchased goods and services
heat and steam
Company vehicles Upstream transportation and distribution
Process emissions Business travel
Fugitive emissions Employee commuting
Downstream transportation and
distribution
Use of sold products
Fuel- and energy related activities
The scoping of emissions is illustrated in Figure 10.5.

219
Figure 10.5: The Different Scopes of Carbon Emissions
10.9.2 How to calculate an Organizational Footprint?
The key steps in calculating an organizational footprint are:
Decide on the methodology

The methodology used should be consistent as many people are involved in collecting and
interpreting data. The GHG Protocol provides detailed guidance on methods, and is available
free of charge online. The ISO 14064 on the other hand, which builds on many of the
concepts introduced by the GHG Protocol.
Company shall choose and report a „base year for which verifiable emission data are
available. This will allow meaningful and consistent tracking of emissions over time.
In some areas the GHG Protocol leaves room for discretion, which may result in differences
in which companies measure their emissions:
 It covers the 6 GHG of the Kyoto Protocol. In addition, companies may also provide
emissions data for other GHGs (e.g., Montreal Protocol gases).
220
 When setting organisational boundaries, companies can choose between either the
operational control or financial control criteria to consolidate GHG emissions.
 Companies are asked to separately account for, and report on scopes 1 and 2 at a
minimum. Scope 3 is an optional reporting category.
 Companies are advised to choose as a base year as the earliest relevant point in time
for which they have reliable data.
 The GHG Protocol recognizes the importance of a quality management system to ensure
that an inventory continues to meet the principles of the GHG Protocol Corporate
Standard and outlines five accounting principles that set an implicit standard for the
faithful representation of a company‟s GHG emissions
Overall the two approaches are very similar in content and intent. A company reporting
against ISO requirements could very well be informed by the GHGP guidance and context.
In the majority of cases a company GHG report that meets ISO needs would also meet
GHGP needs, and vice versa. The primary remaining area of difference regards treatment of
indirect emissions.
Define boundaries and scope

Clear boundaries should be set which defines which parts of the organization are included in
the footprint. For corporate reporting, companies shall account for and report their
consolidated GHG data according to either the equity share or control approach.
Under the equity share approach, a company accounts for GHG emissions from operations
according to its share of equity in the operation and equity share will normally be the same as
the ownership percentage. Under the control approach, a company accounts for 100 percent
of the GHG emissions from operations over which it has control.
If the reporting company wholly owns all its operations, its organizational boundary will be the
same whichever approach is used.
The operational boundary determines which emission sources will be quantified. It should
include the full range of emissions from activities under operational control. All scope 1 and 2
emissions should be included, but which of scope 3 emissions to include is left to choice.
Collate the data

The accuracy of the footprint relies on collating consumption data for all of the emission
sources within the established boundary. For electricity, data in kilowatt hours (kWh) from
meter readings or bills are used. The data for other fuels can be in a variety of units, such as
litres, kWh or megajoules (MJ). For transport emissions, fuel consumption by fuel type where
possible (from fuel cards etc) is taken. Where this is not available, consumption can be
estimated based on the mileage of the vehicles and fuel economy assumptions.
Apply emissions factors

The carbon footprint is measured in tonnes of CO2 equivalent (tCO2e), and is calculated
using the activity data collated multiplied by standard emissions factors as given in Table
10.3.
221
Verify the results (optional)

The verification of the carbon footprint by a third party gives credibility and confidence to
carbon reporting for public disclosure.
The companies may need to track emissions over time in response to various business
goals such as,
 Public reporting
 Establishing GHG targets
 Managing risks and opportunities
 Addressing the needs of investors and other stakeholders
Validating emissions reductions (optional)

After measuring the carbon footprint and taking actions to reduce it progressively over time,
organizational internal audit team or outside agency may be called to verify and certify to
give credibility to the reduction claims. The approaches to validating results are as follows:
 Self-assessment
 Accredited third party Certification
 Non-accredited third parties Verification.
10.9.3 Communicating organizational carbon footprint
Internal communication
Communicating organizational carbon footprint to employees can help engage them in the
process of carbon reduction and energy management. If employees are asked to save
energy, it is important to show them what difference they are making to the organization‟s
emissions and the environment in general. The data collected may also help employees
identify efficiencies in existing processes and practices.
External communication
The organizational carbon footprint is communicated externally as part of corporate social
responsibility (CSR) report to demonstrate the concerns the business is having on the
environment. For business-to-business organisations, many businesses may require
suppliers to report emissions or atleast demonstrate green credentials. A published and
certified carbon footprint is a credible way of demonstrating this, particularly if it includes a
carbon reduction plan, and can provide a company with a competitive edge. For business-to-
customer organisations, consumers are increasingly taking environmental issues into
account and publishing carbon footprints is a good way to give the customer confidence in
the organization.
10.10 Reporting GHG Emissions
A credible GHG emissions report presents relevant information that is complete, consistent,
accurate and transparent. A public GHG report should be based on the best data available
at the time of publication. It should also communicate any material discrepancies identified in
the previous years.
222
The GHG Protocol Corporate Standard INFORMATION ON EMISSIONS AND

requires reporting a minimum of scope 1 and PERFORMANCE
scope 2 emissions.
 Emissions data from relevant scope 3
Required information emissions activities for which reliable data
A public GHG emissions report that is in can be obtained.
accordance with the GHG Protocol Corporate
 Emissions data further subdivided, by
Standard shall include the following
business units/facilities, source types
information:
(stationary combustion, process, fugitive,
etc.), and activity types (production of
DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPANY AND
electricity, transportation, generation of
INVENTORY BOUNDARY
purchased electricity that is sold to end
 An outline of the organizational boundaries
users, etc.).
chosen,
 Emissions from GHGs not covered by the
 An outline of the operational boundaries
Kyoto Protocol (e.g., CFCs, NOx,), reported
chosen, and if scope 3 is included, a list
separately from scopes.
specifying which types of activities are
covered.  Relevant ratio performance indicators (e.g.
emissions per kilowatt-hour generated,
 The reporting period covered.
tonne of material production, or sales).
 An outline of any GHG management/
INFORMATION ON EMISSIONS
reduction programs or strategies.
 Total scope 1 and 2 emissions.
 A copy of any verification statement, if
 Emissions data separately for each scope.
applicable, of the reported emissions data.
 Emissions data for all six GHGs separately
 GHG emissions data for all years between
in metric tonnes and in tonnes of CO2
the base year and the reporting year
equivalent.
 Information on the quality of the inventory
 Year chosen as base year, and an
(e.g., information on the causes and
emissions profile over time
magnitude of uncertainties in emission
 Methodologies used to calculate or measure estimates)
emissions
 A list of facilities included in the inventory.
 Any specific exclusion of sources, facilities,
 A contact person.
and /or operations.
Optional information
A public GHG emissions report should include,
when applicable, the following additional
information:
The above content of the report is adapted from the GHG Protocol Corporate Standard. The reader is advised to
refer the standard for comprehensive details.
223
Annexure A
A. ENERGY AUDIT INSTRUMENTS
A1. Introduction
The conduct of an energy audit requires the use of portable instruments to monitor various
electrical and thermal parameters.
The parameters typically monitored during energy audit may include the following:
 Electrical Parameters: Voltage (V), Current (I), Power factor (cosФ), Active power (kW),
apparent power (demand) (kVA), Reactive power (kVAr), Energy consumption (kWh),
Frequency (Hz),etc.
 Harmonics Parameters: The harmonic spectrum of currents and voltages (amplitudes

and percentage of the fundamental), Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) % of Current and
Voltage.
 Thermal Parameters: Temperature, heat flow, air and gas flow, liquid flow, moisture
content, relative humidity, Combustion analyser for measurement of CO2, O2, CO, SOx,
NOx etc.
 Other parameters: Lux, Total Dissolved Solids (TDS), noise vibration, Speed (RPM)
The energy audit instruments should be periodically calibrated as per the established
schedule.
A2. Typical Instruments Used For Energy Audit
The following are the major energy audit instruments used.
No. Name of the Instrument Features and Typical Applications
1. Power & Harmonic Analyser Measures all Electrical and Harmonic Parameters
namely, V, A, PF, KW, kVA, kVAr, Hz, and first 50
Harmonics.
These instruments can be applied on-line i.e. on running

motors without any need to stop the motor. Instant
measurements can be taken with hand-held meters,
while more advanced ones facilitates cumulative
readings with printouts at specified intervals say every
1/2 hr over a shift or a day.
224
2. Tachometer (Contact-type)
A tachometer is an instrument used to measure the

rotational speed of a shaft or wheel in revolutions per
minute (rpm). By measuring speed, energy auditor is
able to find out belt slip if any and loading.
A contact type tachometer can be used where direct

access is possible.
3. Non-contact tachometer allows the users to measure

Non-Contact Tachometer /
Stroboscope the rotational speed without contacting the object.
Non-contact instruments are sophisticated and safer.

These instruments can measure speed for objects that
are visible but not accessible.
A stroboscopic tachometer employs a variable-

frequency, flashing light which makes the rotating
component appear to stand still when the frequencies
match.
4. Lux meter
A lux meter is a device for measuring illumination or
lighting levels. The lux is a unit of measurement of
illuminance (brightness).
A lux meter works by using a photo cell to capture light.

The light is then converted to an electric current and
corresponding lux value.
5. Combustion analyser measures the composition of flue

gases in percentage (% O 2 (or) % CO2), and flue gas
temperature.
Combustion / Flue Gas
Analysers The instrument estimates the combustion efficiency of
furnaces, boilers and other fossil fuel-fired devices with
an inbuilt programme.
Two types are available: digital analyzers and manual

combustion analysis kits. Digital combustion analysis
equipment performs the measurements and reads out
combustion efficiency in percentage.
The manual combustion analysis kits typically require

multiple measurements including exhaust stack:
temperature, oxygen content, and carbon dioxide
content. The efficiency of the combustion process can
be calculated after determining these parameters. The
manual process is tedious and is frequently subject to
human error.
225
6. Thermometer
These thermocouples measures temperatures of flue
gas, hot air, hot water by insertion of appropriate probe
into the stream. Different types include Fluid Filled,
Resistance, Thermocouple and Thermistor.
Most HVAC applications require a thermometer with

0 0
temperature of -50 C to 175 C. Boiler and oven stacks
require thermometers able to measure up to about
0
500 C.
By knowing the process temperature, the auditor can

determine process equipment efficiency. It also helps us
to waste heat recovery potential.
For surface temperature, a leaf type probe is used with

the same instrument.
7. Fyrite Gas Analyzer

This instrument is used for measuring and analyzing
carbon dioxide or oxygen. The instrument contains
absorbing fluid which is selective in the chemical
absorption of carbon dioxide or oxygen, respectively.
Fyrite readings are unaffected by the presence of most
background gases in the sample.
Fyrite accuracy is sufficient for most industrial

applications and test procedure is simple.
The instrument is basically non-contact type which is

8. able to measure temperature from a distance. Non-
contact infrared thermometers, also known as heat
guns, are very useful for measuring surface
temperatures of steam lines, boiler surfaces, processes
Infrared Thermometer (Non- temperatures, etc.
contact type)
An infrared thermometer infers temperature from a
portion of the thermal radiation sometimes called
blackbody radiation emitted by the object being
measured (as radiation is characteristic of their
temperature). By knowing the amount of infrared energy
emitted by the object and its emissivity, the object's
temperature can be determined.
The heart of the infrared thermometer is the detecting

surface, which absorbs infrared energy and converts it
to an electrical voltage or current.
0
These instruments typically cover a range from 30 C to
0
2000 C.
9. Thermal Imaging Devices Thermal cameras are instruments that create pictures of
heat rather than light. They measure infrared (IR) energy
and convert the data to corresponding images of
226
temperatures.
Non-contact infrared imagers provide fast, safe,

accurate measurements for objects that are:
 Moving or very hot
 Difficult to reach
 Impossible to shut-off
 Dangerous to contact
 Where contact would damage, contaminate or

change temperature.
10. Water and other fluid flows in pipelines can be easily

Ultrasonic Flow Meter measured using ultrasonic sensors mounted on the
pipelines. This instrument is used to estimate the flow
rates entering or leaving a pump. The meters are used
to determine the fluid flow in terms of velocity and flow
rate (given the diameter of pipe).
This non-contact flow measuring device uses Doppler

effect / Ultra sonic principle. A transmitter and a receiver
are positioned on opposite sides of the pipe. Modes of
operation and measurement are either by Doppler effect
(or) Transit Time.
11. Thermo-anemometer
This instrument is used for measuring air velocity in

ventilation, air-conditioning and refrigeration systems
etc.
12. Thermo-hygrometer
This instrument measures humidity and temperature for

determination of dew point and calculation of heat being
carried away by out-going gases where product drying
requires hot air.
13. These instruments operate as electronic stethoscopes.

Ultrasonic Steam Trap
They are able to pick up the very high-pitched sound
Tester
indicative of freely blowing steam (condensate draining
makes a lower-pitched sound).
The advantage of ultrasonic testers is that they can

227
listen to one pipe and detect if any of the nearby steam

traps have failed.
Ultrasonic detecting devices can also be used to identify

any type of gas or fluid leaks e.g. compressed air leaks.
14. Pitot Tube and manometer
(Inclined /Digital manometer )
Air velocity in ducts can be measured using a pitot tube

and an inclined manometer for further calculation of
flows.
The principle is based on measuring the differential

(velocity) pressure at various points (traverse points)
across the cross-section of the duct.
In addition to velocity pressure, this instrument can also

determine Static and Total pressures.
15. Compressed air is one of the most costly utilities in a

Leak Detectors facility today. A simple program of leak inspection and
repair helps greatly to reduce energy costs.
Ultrasonic Leak Detector has an high quality flexible

sensor is mounted on the end of a flexible steel
pipe so the ultrasonic sound sensor can access hard to
reach areas. The unit converts the ultrasonic noise of a
leak into a sound a human can hear such as some
beeping sound or LED display.
Features of this instrument are
• Detects the location of leaks

• Detects almost any leak because
 Short distance/access not needed
 High pressure not needed
 Sensitive to sound
 Filters background noises
This instrument does not measure the size of

228
the leak.
16. Conductivity Meter This instrument is used for spot analysis of the amount
of total dissolved solids (TDS) in water especially in
case of boiler blowdown. An accurate measurement of
TDS is required to maintain blow down rate in boilers
and optimize energy consumption.
TDS meter measures the conductivity of the solution

then converts that value to an equivalent TDS reading.
17. pH meter
pH meter is used for spot analysis of acidity or alkalinity
of a solution/water..
The meter uses the property of certain types of

electrodes to exhibit electrical potential when immersed
in a solution.
18. Thermal Insulation scanner This instrument measures loss of energy in kCal per unit
area from hot/cold insulated surfaces. The total heat
loss can be obtained by multiplying the value with total
surface area.
229
Annexure B
B. SOFTWARE AND SIMULATION FOR ENERGY AUDITING
B1. Introduction
The use of energy audit software significantly decreases the time and costs of conducting
energy audits, by standardising energy audit methodology, analysis and reporting across the
organization. It also helps in preparing focused energy efficiency report.
The software-enabled study helps in identification of full range of energy efficiency options that
are applicable with cost and benefit estimates. In recent years, cloud-based energy auditing
software platforms are increasingly available
B2. Applications of Various Softwares
There are many software applications in the form of Modelling, Simulation and Assessment
tools available in the market for various utility systems. The brief use and applications of the
select software tools that are used in the industries are given as follows:
Pumps
a. Pumping System Assessment Tool (Figure B1)
Main Inputs Main Outputs
 Electrical energy consumption (measured  Motor, Pumping (Hydraulic) & System

or nameplate) energy efficiencies
 Run hours  Motor, Pumping & Piping Losses
 Static head (from drawings)  Total Energy Consumption & Energy Cost
 Discharges pressure (from pressure  CO2 Emissions
gauge)  Energy Performance Indicators
 Flow rate (from flow meter or estimate)  Comparison of Actual Performance versus
 Average unit price (electricity) Best Practice
 Performance Certificate
230
Software tools
Free download
Available at
https://www.seai.ie/resources/tools/Pump-Energy-Efficiency-Calculation-Tool-V7.xlsx
Figure B1: Pump Efficiency Calculations
b. Pump System Improvement Modeling Tool (PSIM)

PSIM which is highly graphical, drag-and-drop for centrifugal pump modeling tool (Figure
B2) with following features:
 Pump sizing
 Variable speed drives
 Impeller trimming
 Best Efficiency Point (BEP) calculations
 NPSH calculations
 Viscosity correction to pump curves
 Power calculations
 Energy usage and cost
 Positive displacement pump modeling includes:
 Generated head
 Power calculations
 Energy usage and cost
 Ability to model flow and pressure control valves
231
 Generation of pump versus system curves (Figure B3)

 Ability to model different types of fluids
 Ability to model pipe networks with up to twelve pipe elements
Figure B2: Model of Pumping System
Figure B3: Results of Pump vs System Curve

232
Building Simulation Software (ESim)
ESim is a building energy simulation tool used for design, commissioning, and retrofit analysis.
Building energy simulation is performed using a computer to virtually represent a building design
and perform physics based calculations. The simulations can range from a building component
to a cluster of buildings. For energy simulation, the building model along with the usage pattern
and weather of the location are required to determine various outputs, such as peak loads,
system sizing, and energy consumption for any given period. This information can be used for
estimating the utility bills, for evaluating cost–benefit analysis of various design strategies.
Some of the uses for energy simulation tools are:
 Early design decisions: In early design stage, decisions such as orientation and layout of
the building are taken. Energy simulation can help in evaluating various design
strategies. However, a detailed simulation may not be possible because of the limited
information available at this stage.
 Component or material selection: Simulation helps in the decision-making process while

selecting individual components of building envelope or systems. It can be used to carry
out cost–benefit analysis of various designs and components. Modeling at this stage
needs to be performed with greater accuracy as compared to modelling for early design
decisions.
 Retrofitting decisions: For retrofit of existing buildings, energy simulation can help in
selecting cost effective solutions. For an accurate analysis, simulation model should be
calibrated using the measured performance data of the building.
The following basic information is required:
Location and weather file: Energy simulation tools need hourly ambient conditions
(temperature, humidity, wind velocity, solar radiation, etc.) at the building location. This
information is available in weather files. Simulation tools use these weather files to extract the
hourly ambient conditions while carrying out the simulation. However, for some locations, the
weather file may not be available. In such cases, the weather file of some other location with
similar weather conditions can be used
Building geometry: Building elevation and floor plans are required to create the geometric
model of a building. Architectural drawings may have many details that might not be directly
useful for energy simulation. It is useful to simplify the drawings based on thermal zoning into a
single line drawing by removing unnecessary details.
233
Envelope components: It is necessary to have construction details, such as thickness and

thermal physical properties of materials used in each layer of building envelope. Besides the
opaque components, it is very important to have properties of window glass, frame and shading
devices.
Building services: Information about various services such as HVAC and lighting is required.
This includes equipment capacities, energy efficiency, location and controls.
Usage of building; the hourly values of the following are required:

• Occupancy
• Lighting
• Equipment
• Thermostat set point
• HVAC operation
How Simulation Software Works?
The simulation program enables simultaneous interaction of the geometric model with outdoor
conditions, occupancy, and usage of building systems to predict various loads arising in the
building on an hourly basis. Basic laws of physics and energy balance equations are used for
calculations. The energy consumption for the operation of systems corresponding to the heat
and other loads is also calculated on the same time scale. Results of the processing are passed
to the calculations of next time slice and are also supplied to the output file. This process
continues for the entire duration of the simulation, and the final output is seen as aggregated or
on the same time slice for which calculation has been carried out. Most simulation tools are
capable of simulating the energy flows through different building components on an hourly
basis, including the transient effects of the envelope and systems.
Simulation software: DESIGN BUILDER

Website for purchase: https://www.designbuilder.co.uk
B3 Softwares for Process Plants, Power Plants, Solar Systems Refinery, Optimizing Heat
Exchanger network, Steam plants, and other thermal systems
EBSILON
EBSILON is a simulation system for thermodynamic cycle processes that is used for plant
planning, design and optimization. It allows the benefits of repowering and retrofitting measures
by simulating them.
234
It allows performance of the plant to be optimized for by introducing specific parameter. It allows
calculations of the effects of component degradation, changes in load and changes in
environmental conditions. It allows simulation of the operation of newly developed components
in a cycle.
Any thermodynamic cycle can be modeled. The modeling options are available for conventional
power plants, nuclear and solar power plants, desalination plants, fuel cell applications and so
on.
Some of the features include,
• Intuitive modeling with graphical user interface

• Powerful calculation tools and solution algorithm
• Comprehensive component library
• Material data libraries for working fluids and fuels
• Comfortable analysis and presentation of results
• Open software architecture and powerful interfaces
• Intelligent error analysis and online help
• Expansion of the functionality by means of add-on modules
Website for purchase: https://www.steag-systemtechnologies.com
Thermoflex
This is referred to as “heat balance software”. It is a fully flexible program with a graphic user
interface in which the user creates a thermal system network by selecting, dragging, dropping
and connecting icons representing over two hundred different components. The program
covers both design and off-design simulation, and models all types of power plants, including
combined cycles, conventional steam cycles, and repowering; as well as a wide range of
renewable energy plants and systems. It can also model general thermal power systems and
network.
Software for purchase: https://www.thermoflow.com
STEAM PRO
This software automates the process of designing a conventional (Rankine cycle) steam power
plant, guiding the user to rapidly and easily attain an optimal configuration including its technical
parameters.
235
The user inputs design criteria, starting with the big picture and progressing in a logical
sequence into greater details. Built-in expert logic automatically selects appropriate options and
inputs for the various details, based on the user’s high level selections. The program designs
the new plant, computes its performance, its detailed heat and mass balance, and creates its
major equipment physical sizes and design details.
Free
Website for download: https://steam-pro.soft112.com/
STEAMMASTER
This software simulates performance of a given plant at different operating conditions, such as
part-loads, feed water heater by-pass, different environmental parameters, etc.
The user may change the physical hardware of a radiant furnace, or a feed water heater, or a
condenser, or a pipe, etc., to match vendor or final engineering specs. Steam Master is a based
on an Excel spreadsheet with a Visual Basic interface to simplify steam system characterization
Features of the Software:
General Features:
 Software accepts multiple boilers
 Four firing rates (and efficiencies) for each boiler
 Matches boiler furl use for multiple boilers and firing rates
 Visual Basic Interface
Combustion Efficiency
 ASME indirect method of calculating combustion efficiency
 Fuel properties lookup table that includes gas, oil, coal, and wood
Boiler Efficiency
 Part load efficiencies
 Radiation and convection losses that are important at part loads
 Cycling losses are also important at low loads
System Losses
 Uninsulated steam piping
 Steam leaks
 Trap leaks
 Flash steam
236
Databases
 Boiler manufacturer specification database
 Steam trap manufacturer specification database
Calculates savings from five steam recommendations:

 Tune boilers
 Insulate steam pipes
 Repair steam leaks
 Repair trap leaks
 Recover flash steam
TRNSYS
It is an extremely flexible graphically based software environment used to simulate the behavior
of transient systems. The vast majority of simulations are focused on assessing the
performance of thermal and electrical energy systems
TRNSYS is made up of two parts. The first part is an engine (called the kernel) that reads and
processes the input file, iteratively solves, determines convergence, and plots system variables.
The kernel also provides utilities that determine thermo-physical properties, invert matrices,
perform linear regressions, and interpolate external data files.
The second part of TRNSYS is an extensive library of components, each of which models the
performance of one part of the system. The standard library includes approximately 150 models
ranging from pumps to multi-zone buildings, wind turbines to electrolyzers, weather data
processors to economics routines, and basic HVAC equipment to cutting edge emerging
technologies. Models are constructed in such a way that users can modify existing components
or write their own, extending the capabilities of the environment.
Applications
 Central plant modeling
 Building simulation (including LEED Energy Modeling)
 Solar thermal processes
 Ground coupled heat transfer
 High temperature solar applications
 Geothermal heat pump systems
 Coupled multi-zone thermal/airflow modeling
 Optimization
 Energy system research
 Emerging technology assessment
 Power plants (Biomass, Cogeneration)
237
 Hydrogen fuel cell systems

 Wind and Photovoltaic Systems
 Data and simulation calibration
Reference website for purchase: http://www.trnsys.com/
Engineering Equation Solver (EES)
EES is a general equation-solving program that can numerically solve thousands of coupled
non-linear algebraic and differential equations. The program can also be used to solve
differential and integral equations, do optimization, provide uncertainty analyses, perform linear
and non-linear regression, convert units, check unit consistency, and generate publication-
quality plots. A major feature of EES is the high accuracy thermodynamic and transport property
database that is provided for hundreds of substances that allows it to be used with the equation
solving capability.
Reference website for purchase: http://www.fchart.com/
Aspen Energy Analyzer
Aspen Energy Analyzer is energy management software for performing optimal heat exchanger
network design to minimize process energy. The software is used to develop improved heat
integration projects while significantly reducing operating, capital, and design costs, and
minimizing energy-related emissions of heat exchanger networks. The purpose of the networks
is to maximize heat recovery, thereby lowering the overall plant costs.
In process industries, during operation of any heat exchanger network (HEN), the major aim is
to focus on the best performance of the network so as to optimize the given process and
minimize the heating load and cooling load. This software implements a methodology for HEN
synthesis with the use of pinch technology. Several heat integration networks are designed with
different ΔT min and total annualized cost compared to obtain the optimal design
Utilizing either a graphical or algorithmic method, users can identify the best heat exchanger
network design solutions without spending excessive amounts of resources. It also provides an
easy environment to perform optimal heat exchanger network design and retrofit. Using this
tool, it is possible to cut down on unnecessary energy use, for a less expensive and greener
process design.
Reference website for purchase: https://www.aspentech.com

238
Compressors (AirSim)
AirSim is a compressed air simulation software tool, which is useful for estimating savings from
various energy efficiency upgrades and control changes. AirSim is designed so that simulation
outputs can be visually calibrated to measured energy consumption and pressure data. Once
calibrated, system parameters can be changed to simulate expected compressor and system
performance under various conditions.
AirSim allows users to simulate multiple compressor systems with pressure band staging control
or automatic sequencer control. Savings can be estimated as the difference between current
and expected compressed air system energy use.
AirSim allows the user to simulate a compressed air system with multiple compressors using
automatic sequencer control. AirSim uses basic control logic to determine which compressors
operate based on the variable plant air demand, rather than the user having to specify the
staging order for each hour using AirMaster+.
The AirSim sequence of operation begins by opening the program file. The user can choose to
run a simulation on a compressed air system with one air compressor or multiple air
compressors.
Single Compressor Data Inputs

The AirSim single compressor input screen is shown in the Figure B4. The input screen allows
the user to define the values of the key system parameters and to select how the outputs will be
displayed. The inputs are divided into Compressor, Controls and Plant Air Demand sections.
Figure B4: Data Input

239
The plant air demand

The compressor inputs The controls inputs include
inputs
Rated power (HP) Control type (load/unload or Constant or variable
Nominal motor modulate/VSD/multistage) plant air demand
efficiency Blowdown time (seconds) – only Constant plant air
Supply voltage (V) activated if load/unload control demand (scfm)
Maximum type is selected Variable plant air
compressed air Optional air compressor automatic demand load profile
output (scfm/HP) shutoff (percent time and
Nominal power factor Automatic shutoff delay time scfm)
Volume of (minutes) – only activated if Simulation interval
compressed air automatic shutoff is selected (minutes)
storage Maximum compressor pressures Graphical output
(psig) display of current (A)
Minimum compressor pressures or power (kW)
(psig)
Compressor brake power at no
output
Compressor rated power at max
output (sometimes referred to as a
motor’s service factor)
Multiple Compressors Data Inputs

The AirSim multiple compressor input screen is shown in Figure B5. The input screen allows the
user to define the values of the key system parameters and to select how the outputs will be
displayed. The inputs are divided into compressed air system, plant air demand and multiple
compressors sections.
Figure B5: Data Inputs (Multiple Compressors)

240
Single Compressor Outputs
The output screen for the single compressor simulation is shown in Figure B6. AirSim displays
key simulation inputs in the top left panel. AirSim also calculates the average current and
average power over the simulation interval and displays these in the top right panel. The
graphical display of the simulation interval includes the system pressure and power/current draw
of the air compressor.
Figure B6: Output Screen (Single Compressor Simulation)
Free
Website for download: https://www.airbestpractices.com/
Lighting (LightSim) - Natural Daylighting Simulation Tool
This software uses TMY (Typical Meteorological Year) or EPW (Energy Plus weather data)
weather files as input. The hourly illuminance incident on windows and skylights is computed
assuming that natural daylight has luminous efficacy of 110 lm/W. The hourly illuminance on
the work plane of an interior space is computed using the IES method. The fraction of time that
daylighting meets a target illuminance, and hence the fraction of time that electric lights can be
turned off, is computed. These results support the design and economic evaluation of
daylighting projects.
After each simulation, LightSim reports input data and annual simulation results. It reports the
fraction of hours that illumination from daylighting meets or exceeds the target illumination on a
monthly basis.
The fraction of hours that illumination from daylighting meets or exceeds the target illumination
is an indication of the amount of time that all electric lighting in a room could be turned off.
241
However, sophisticated lighting controls may be able to turn off or dim a portion of the lights,
even when daylighting alone cannot meet the target illumination.
LightSim also reports the “fraction electrical power reduction” if sophisticated controls were able
to turn off or dim a portion of the lights, to meet the target illumination.
Reference website for purchase: https://syngient.in

242
REFERENCES
1. ASRAE Guideline 14-2002, Measurement of Energy and Demand Savings

2. ASRAE Guideline 14-2002, Measurement of Energy and Demand Savings
3. Association for Development and Research of Sustainable Habitats, (2012), The National Rating
System for Green Buildings, Ministry of New and Renewable Energy, Government of India.
4. Central Electricity Authority, (2017), Power Sector Profile, Government of India.
5. Chief Sustainability Officer’s forum & The Energy Research Institute, (2013), Road map for
incorporating Energy Efficiency. Retrofit in Existing Building, TERI.
6. Craig Simmons, (2014), Carbon Handbook: Reducing the carbon footprint of world class events,
Moscow.
7. Department of Energy (2003), Industrial Heat Pumps for Steam and Fuel Savings, Washington,
DC.
8. Fawzi Behmann, Kwok Wu, (2015), Collaborative Internet Of Things (C-IOT), John Wiley & Sons
Ltd, United Kingdom.
9. Hydraulic Institute, (2004) Variable Speed Pumping - A Guide To Successful Applications, U.S.
Department of Energy Industrial Technologies Program, Washington, D.C.
10. International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol; Concepts and Options for
determining Energy and Water Savings; Volume 1; Jan 2012; Efficiency Valuation organization
11. International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol; Concepts and Options for
determining Energy and Water Savings; Volume 1; Jan 2012; Efficiency Valuation organization
12. IS/ISO 19011:2011 Guidelines for Auditing Management Systems
13. IS/ISO 19011:2011 Guidelines for Auditing Management Systems
14. IS/ISO 50001:2011 Energy Management Systems- Requirements with guidance for use
18. IS/ISO 9000:2005 QMS  Fundamental and Vocabulary
19. IS/ISO 9000:2005 QMS  Fundamental and Vocabulary
20. ISO 50004:2014 Energy management systems—Guidance for the implementation, maintenance
and improvement of an energy management system
21. ISO 50004:2014 Energy management systems—Guidance for the implementation, maintenance
and improvement of an energy management system
22. ISO 50006:2014 Energy management systems—Measuring Energy Performance using Energy
Baselines (EnB) and Energy Performance Indicators (EnPIs)―General principles and guidance
23. ISO 50006:2014 Energy management systems—Measuring Energy Performance using Energy
Baselines (EnB) and Energy Performance Indicators (EnPIs)―General principles and guidance
24. ISO 50015:2014 Energy management systems—Measurement and Verification of energy
performance of organizations - General principles and guidance
25. ISO 50015:2014 Energy management systems—Measurement and Verification of energy
performance of organizations - General principles and guidance
26. ISO/IEC 17021, Second Edition 201102-01, Conformity Assessment – Requirements for bodies
providing audit and certification for management systems
243
27. ISO/IEC 17021, Second Edition 201102-01, Conformity Assessment – Requirements for bodies
providing audit and certification for management systems
28. ISO_50001energy.pdf published by ISO
29. ISO_50001energy.pdf published by ISO
30. JA Clarke, (2001), Energy Simulation in Building Design, Butter Worth Heinemann.
31. John Randolph and Gilbert M Masters, (2008), Energy for Sustainability Technology, Planning,
Policy, Island Press.
32. M&V Guidelines: Measurement and Verification for Federal Energy Projects; Version 3.0; FEMP;
U.S. Department of Energy
33. M&V Guidelines: Measurement and Verification for Federal Energy Projects; Version 3.0; FEMP;
U.S. Department of Energy
34. Ministry of Urban Development, (2015), Smart Cities, Government of India.
35. New Energy & Industrial Technology Development Organization, (2008), Japanese Technologies
for Energy Savings/GHG Emissions Reduction, Japan.
36. Sanjay Seth, (2011), BEE Star rating for buildings - An initiative to promote energy efficiency in
buildings.
37. Shakti Sustainable Energy Foundation & Indian Smart Grid forum, ( 2017) , Smart Grid Handbook
for Regulators and Policy Makers.
38. Stephen Dixon, TDS Dixon Inc. and Doug Tripp, (2011), DME Energy Auditing Course Trainer’s
Guidebook, SADC Industrial Energy Management Project.
39. Stephen Wiel & James E McMohan, (2005), Energy Efficiency Labels and Standards – A
Guidebook for appliances Equipment and Lighting, Washington, DC.
40. Steven Fawkes, Kit Oung, David Thorpe, (2016), Best Practices and Case Studies for Industrial
Energy Efficiency Improvement, Copenhagen Centre on Energy Efficiency, Denmark.
41. TATA Strategic Management Group, (2014), Energy Efficiency in India: PAT Scheme - The Way
Ahead, Tata Strategic Management Group.
42. The Australasian Energy Performance Contracting Association, (2004), A Best Practice Guide to
Measurement and Verification of Energy Savings, Commonwealth of Australia.
43. The Indian Green Building Council, (2014), Green New Buildings Rating Systems, Indian Green
Building Council, Hyderabad.
44. World Energy Council, (2016), World Energy Resources, Hans-Wilhelm Schiffer.
WEBSITES
www.nzeb.in
https://www.nrcan.gc.ca
https://www.powermin.nic.in
https://mnre.gov.in
http://www.beeindia.gov.in
www.iso.org
www.energymanagertraining.com
www.bee-india.nic.in
www.enms-doc.com
www.iaf.nu
https://www.coal.nic.in
petroleum.nic.in/
244

RC Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RC Material

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RC Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guide Book

Bureau of Energy Efficiency

Copyright © Bureau of Energy Efficiency 2018

Mr. Abhay Bakre

Mr. Pankaj Kumar

Mr. Saurabh Diddi

Dr. Ashok Kumar

Mr. Sameer Pandita

Ms. Rajini Thompson

Mr. K.V.R. Raju

Mr. Padu S Padmanabhan Mr. R.K. Khilnani, A. M Narayanan J. Nagesh Kumar

Mr. T. Sankaranarayanan Mr. P. Dharmalingam Mr. H. Ragavendra Dr. P. Kanagavel

Mr. Velayutham V Mr. J. P. Varun, Asst. Mr. Idhayachander Ms. V G. Sandhya

The training based on refresher course material is expected to boost self-

AAC Autoclaved Aerated Concrete

1. ENERGY SCENARIO UPDATES 1

2. PERFORM ACHIEVE TRADE (PAT) UPDATES 29

3. KEY THRUST AREAS OF ENERGY CONSERVATION ACT, 2001 49

4. ENERGY EFFICIENCY DATA ANALYTICS 66

5. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EnMS): ISO 50001: 2018 80

6. MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION OF ENERGY PERFORMANCE 104

7. BEST PRACTICES, TECHNOLOGIES AND CASE STUDIES  125

8. BEST PRACTICES IN BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND 150

9. RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS 174

A. ENERGY AUDIT INSTRUMENTS 223

B. SOFTWARE AND SIMULATION FOR ENERGY AUDITING 229

2.1 Timelines and Activities for a PAT Cycle 35

7.1 IE Classes 126

8.1 List of Green Building Features 152

9.1 Installable Potential and Installed Capacities 175

10.1 GHG and its GWP 211

2.1 Components of NMEEE 29

3.1 Endorsement Label (Laptops) 50

4.1 Energy Productivity Indicators 67

5.1 Relationship between EnMS and Energy Performance 81

6.1 Steps involved in M&V Process 110

7.1 Efficiency classes IE1 to IE4 128

8.1 Energy Consumption in an Information Technology Park Building 150

9.1 Various Forms of Renewable Energy Resources 174

10.1 Global CO2 Concentration Increase Since 1980 206

B1 Pump Efficiency Calculations 230

1.0 ENERGY SCENARIO UPDATES

World Primary Energy Consumption - 2017

6.8% 3.6% Oil

Figure 1.1: Breakup of World Primary Energy Consumption by Fuel/Source

India - Primary Energy Consumption - 2017

Figure 1.2: Breakup of India’s Primary Energy Consumption by Fuel/Source

World Primary Energy Consumption Trend

Oil Gas Coal Nuclear Hydro Other renewables

Figure 1.3: World Primary Energy Consumption Trend

The India’s growth of primary energy consumption is shown in Figure 1.4.

Primary Energy Consumption Trend of India

Oil Gas Coal Nuclear Hydro Other renewables

Figure 1.4: Primary Energy Consumption Trend of India

Coal is the predominant of

India has 9.4% of the world

Figure 1.7: Coal Demand by Sector: 2015-16 (Quantity in Million Tonnes)

Figure 1.8: India’s Oil Energy Scenario

Figure 1.9: Sector-wise Breakup of Petroleum products Consumption 2016-17

Government is continually promoting improvements in energy efficiency in conventional